advertisement
G9 ASD Installation and Operation
Manual
Document Number: 58681-003
Date: October, 2009
G9 ASD Installation and Operation
Manual
Document Number: 58681-003
Date: October, 2009
Introduction
Congratulations on the purchase of the new G9 True Torque Control
2
Adjustable Speed Drive!
The G9 True Torque Control
2
Adjustable Speed Drive (ASD) is a solid-state AC drive that features
True Torque Control
2
. Toshiba’s Vector Control Algorithm enables the motor to develop high starting torque and provide compensation for motor slip, which results in smooth, quick starts and highly efficient operation. The G9 ASD uses digitally-controlled pulse width modulation. The programmable functions may be accessed via the easy-to-use menu selections or via the Direct Access Numbers (see
).
This feature, combined with Toshiba’s high-performance software, delivers unparalleled motor-control and reliability.
The G9 ASD is a very powerful tool, yet surprisingly simple to operate. The user-friendly Electronic
Operator Interface (EOI) of the ASD has an easy-to-read LCD Screen. There is also a read-only LED
Screen with enhanced visibility that can be read from a greater distance. The EOI provides easy access to the many monitoring and programming features of the ASD.
The motor-control software is menu-driven, which allows for easy access to the motor-control parameters and quick changes when required.
To maximize the abilities of your new G9 ASD, a working familiarity with this manual will be required.
This manual has been prepared for the ASD installer, user, and maintenance personnel. This manual may also be used as a reference guide or for training. With this in mind, use this manual to develop a system familiarity before attempting to install or operate the device.
Important Notice
The instructions contained in this manual are not intended to cover all details or variations in equipment types, nor may it provide for every possible contingency concerning the installation, operation, or maintenance of this equipment. Should additional information be required contact your Toshiba Sales
Representative.
The contents of this manual shall not become a part of or modify any prior or existing agreement, commitment, or relationship. The sales contract contains the entire obligation of Toshiba International
Corporation. The warranty contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of Toshiba
International Corporation and any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or modify the existing warranty.
Any electrical or mechanical modifications to this equipment without prior written consent of
Toshiba International Corporation may void all warranties and may void the UL/CUL listing or other safety certifications. Unauthorized modifications may also result in a safety hazard or equipment damage.
Misuse of this equipment could result in injury and equipment damage. In no event will Toshiba
Corporation be responsible or liable for direct, indirect, special, or consequential damage or injury that may result from the misuse of this equipment.
About This Manual
This manual was written by the Toshiba Technical Publications Group. This group is tasked with providing technical documentation for the G9 Adjustable Speed Drive. Every effort has been made to provide accurate and concise information to you, our customer.
At Toshiba we’re continuously searching for better ways to meet the constantly changing needs of our customers. E-mail your comments, questions, or concerns about this publication to
.
Manual’s Purpose and Scope
This manual provides information on how to safely install, operate, maintain, and dispose of your
G9 Adjustable Speed Drive. The information provided in this manual is applicable to the
G9 Adjustable Speed Drive only.
This manual provides information on the various features and functions of this powerful cost-saving device, including
• Installation,
• System operation,
• Configuration and menu options, and
• Mechanical and electrical specifications.
Included is a section on general safety instructions that describe the warning labels and symbols that are used throughout the manual. Read the manual completely before installing, operating, performing maintenance, or disposing of this equipment.
This manual and the accompanying drawings should be considered a permanent part of the equipment and should be readily available for reference and review. Dimensions shown in the manual are in metric and/or the English equivalent.
Because of our commitment to continuous improvement, Toshiba International Corporation reserves the right, without prior notice, to update information, make product changes, or to discontinue any product or service identified in this publication.
Toshiba International Corporation (TIC) shall not be liable for direct, indirect, special, or consequential damages resulting from the use of the information contained within this manual.
This manual is copyrighted. No part of this manual may be photocopied or reproduced in any form without the prior written consent of Toshiba International Corporation.
© Copyright 2009 Toshiba International Corporation.
TOSHIBA® is a registered trademark of Toshiba Corporation. All other product or trade references appearing in this manual are registered trademarks of their respective owners.
TOSHIBA Leading Innovation® is a registered trademark of Toshiba International Corporation.
All rights reserved.
Printed in the U.S.A.
Contacting Toshiba’s Customer
Support Center
Toshiba’s Customer Support Center can be contacted to obtain help in resolving any Adjustable Speed
Drive system problem that you may experience or to provide application information.
The Support Center is open from 8 a.m. to 5 p.m. (CST), Monday through Friday. The Center’s toll free number is US (800) 231-1412/Fax (713) 937-9349 — Canada (800) 527-1204. For after-hours support follow the directions in the outgoing message when calling.
You may also contact Toshiba by writing to:
Toshiba International Corporation
13131 West Little York Road
Houston, Texas 77041-9990
Attn: ASD Product Manager.
For further information on Toshiba’s products and services, please visit our web site at www.toshiba.com/ind/ .
TOSHIBA INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION
G9 Adjustable Speed Drive
Please complete the Warranty Card supplied with the G9 ASD and return it to Toshiba by prepaid mail. This will activate the 12 month warranty from the date of installation; but, shall not exceed 18 months from the shipping date.
Complete the following information and retain for your records.
Model Number: ______________________________________________________________________
Serial Number:______________________________________________________________________
Project Number (if applicable):__________________________________________________________
Date of Installation:__________________________________________________________________
Inspected By:______________________________________________________________________
Name of Application:_________________________________________________________________
Table of Contents
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual i
ii
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
General Safety Information
DO NOT attempt to install, operate, maintain, or dispose of this equipment until you have read and understood all of the product safety information and directions contained in this manual.
Safety Alert Symbol
The Safety Alert Symbol is comprised of an equilateral triangle enclosing an exclamation mark. This indicates that a potential personal injury hazard exists.
Signal Words
Listed below are the signal words that are used throughout this manual followed by their descriptions and associated symbols. When the words DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION are used in this manual they will be followed by important safety information that must be carefully adhered to.
The word DANGER preceded by the safety alert symbol indicates that an imminently hazardous situation exists that, if not avoided, will result in serious injury to personnel or loss of life.
DANGER
The word WARNING preceded by the safety alert symbol indicates that a potentially hazardous situation exists that, if not avoided, could result in serious injury to personnel or loss of life.
WARNING
The word CAUTION preceded by the safety alert symbol indicates that a potentially hazardous situation exists that, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION
The word CAUTION without the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation exists that, if not avoided, may result in equipment and property damage.
CAUTION
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 1
2
Special Symbols
To identify special hazards, other symbols may appear in conjunction with the DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION signal words. These symbols indicate areas that require special and/or strict adherence to the procedures to prevent serious injury to personnel or loss of life.
Electrical Hazard Symbol
A symbol that is comprised of an equilateral triangle enclosing a lightning bolt indicates a hazard of injury from electrical shock or burn.
Explosion Hazard Symbol
A symbol that is comprised of an equilateral triangle enclosing an explosion indicates a hazard of injury from exploding parts.
Equipment Warning Labels
DO NOT attempt to install, operate, perform maintenance, or dispose of this equipment until you have read and understood all of the user directions contained in this manual.
Warning labels that are attached to the equipment will include the exclamation mark within a triangle.
DO NOT remove or cover any of these labels. If the labels are damaged or if additional labels are required, contact your Toshiba Sales Representative.
Labels attached to the equipment are there to provide useful information or to indicate an imminently hazardous situation that may result in serious injury, severe property and equipment damage, or loss of life if safe procedures or methods are not followed as outlined in this manual.
Qualified Personnel
Installation, operation, and maintenance shall be performed by Qualified Personnel Only. A Qualified
Person is one that has the skills and knowledge relating to the construction, installation, operation, and maintenance of the electrical equipment and has received safety training on the hazards involved (Refer to the latest edition of NFPA 70E for additional safety requirements).
Qualified Personnel shall:
• Have carefully read the entire operation manual.
• Be familiar with the construction and function of the G9 ASD, the equipment being driven, and the hazards involved.
• Be able to recognize and properly address hazards associated with the application of motor-driven equipment.
• Be trained and authorized to safely energize, de-energize, ground, lockout/tagout circuits and equipment, and clear faults in accordance with established safety practices.
• Be trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment such as safety shoes, rubber gloves, hard hats, safety glasses, face shields, flash clothing, etc., in accordance with established safety practices.
For further information on workplace safety visit www.osha.gov.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Equipment Inspection
• Upon receipt of the equipment inspect the packaging and equipment for shipping damage.
• Carefully unpack the equipment and check for damaged parts, missing parts, or concealed damage that may have occurred during shipping. If any discrepancies are discovered, it should be noted with the carrier prior to accepting the shipment, if possible. File a claim with the carrier if necessary and immediately notify your Toshiba Sales Representative.
• DO NOT install or energize equipment that has been damaged. Damaged equipment may fail during operation resulting in equipment damage or injury to personnel.
• Ensure that the rated capacity and the model number specified on the nameplate conform to the order specifications.
• Modification of this equipment is dangerous and is to be performed by factory trained representatives. When modifications are required contact your Toshiba Sales Representative.
• Inspections may be required before and after moving installed equipment.
• Contact your Toshiba Sales Representative to report discrepancies or for assistance if required.
Handling and Storage
• Use proper lifting techniques when moving the ASD; including properly sizing up the load, getting assistance, and using a forklift if required.
• Store in a well-ventilated covered location and preferably in the original carton if the equipment will not be used upon receipt.
• Store in a cool, clean, and dry location. Avoid storage locations with extreme temperatures, rapid temperature changes, high humidity, moisture, dust, corrosive gases, or metal particles.
• The storage temperature range of the G9 ASD is -13° to 149° F (-25° to 65° C).
• DO NOT store the unit in places that are exposed to outside weather conditions (i.e., wind, rain, snow, etc.).
• Store in an upright position.
Disposal
Never dispose of electrical components via incineration. Contact your state environmental agency for details on disposal of electrical components and packaging in your area.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 3
Installation Precautions
Location and Ambient Requirements
• The Toshiba ASD is intended for permanent installations only.
• Installation should conform to the 2008 National Electrical Code — Article 110 (NEC)
(Requirements For Electrical Installations), all regulations of the Occupational Safety and
Health Administration, and any other applicable national, regional, or industry codes and standards.
• Select a mounting location that is easily accessible, has adequate personnel working space, and adequate illumination for adjustment, inspection, and maintenance of the equipment (refer to 2008
NEC Article 110-13).
• DO NOT mount the ASD in a location that would produce catastrophic results if it were to fall from its mounting location (equipment damage or injury).
• DO NOT mount the ASD in a location that would allow it to be exposed to flammable chemicals or gases, water, solvents, or other fluids.
• Avoid installation in areas where vibration, heat, humidity, dust, fibers, metal particles, explosive/ corrosive mists or gases, or sources of electrical noise are present.
• The installation location shall not be exposed to direct sunlight.
• Allow proper clearance spaces for installation. Do not obstruct the ventilation openings. Refer to the section titled
Installation and Connections on pg. 14
for further information on ventilation requirements.
• The ambient operating temperature range of the G9 ASD is 14° to 104° F (-10° to 40° C).
•
See the section titled Installation and Connections on pg. 14
for additional information on installing the drive.
4
Mounting Requirements
• Only
should install this equipment.
• Install the unit in a secure and upright position in a well-ventilated area.
• As a minimum, the installation of the equipment should conform to the 2008 National Electrical
Code — Article 110 (NEC), OSHA, as well as any other applicable national, regional, or industry codes and standards.
• Installation practices shall conform to the latest revision of NFPA 70E Electrical Safety
Requirements for Employee Workplaces.
• It is the responsibility of the ASD Installer/Maintenance personnel to ensure that the unit is installed into an enclosure that will protect personnel against electric shock.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Conductor Routing and Grounding
WARNING
• Use separate metal conduits for routing the input power, output power, and control circuits.
• A separate ground cable shall be run inside of the conduit of the input power, output power, and the control circuits.
• A separate ground cable should be run inside the conduit with the input power, output power, and and control circuits.
• DO NOT connect CC to earth ground.
• Use IICC terminal as the return for the VI/II (V/I) input.
• Always ground the unit to prevent electrical shock and to help reduce electrical noise.
• It is the responsibility of the ASD Installer/Maintenance personnel to provide proper grounding and branch circuit protection in accordance with the 2008 NEC and any applicable local codes.
— T h e M e t a l O f C o n d u i t I s N o t A n A c c e p t a b l e G r o u n d —
Grounding Capacitor Switch
The ASD is equipped with noise reduction capacitors which are used to reduce the EMI leakage via the
3-phase power-input circuit and for compliance with the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive
(EMC).
The effective value of the capacitor may be increased, reduced, or removed entirely via the Selector
Switch, Switching Bar, or the Switching Screw — the type used is typeform-specific.
The Grounding Capacitor Switch allows the user to quickly change the value of the leakage-reduction capacitance of the 3-phase input circuit without the use of tools.
See the section titled System Grounding on pg. 18 for more on the Grounding Capacitor
.
See figures
,
,
6 , and 7 on pg. 19 for an electrical depiction of the leakage-reduction functionality of
and the methods used to set the capacitance value.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 5
Power Connections
DANGER
C o n t a c t W i t h E n e r g i z e d W i r i n g W i l l C a u s e S e v e r e
I n j u r y O r L o s s O f L i f e .
• Turn off, lockout, and tag out all power sources before proceeding to connect the power wiring to the equipment.
• After ensuring that all power sources are turned off and isolated in accordance with established lockout/tag out procedures, connect the 3-phase power source wiring of the correct voltage to the correct input terminals and connect the output terminals to a motor of the correct voltage and type for the application (refer to NEC Article 300 – Wiring Methods and Article 310 – Conductors For
General Wiring). Size the branch circuit conductors in accordance with NEC Table 310.16.
• If multiple conductors are used in parallel for the input or output power and it is necessary to use separate conduits, each parallel set shall have its own conduit (i.e., place U1, V1, W1, and a ground wire in one conduit and U2, V2, W2 and a ground wire in another; refer to NEC Article 300.20 and
Article 310.4). National and local electrical codes should be referenced if three or more power conductors are run in the same conduit (refer to 2008 NEC Article 310 adjustment factors).
• Ensure that the 3-phase input power is NOT connected to the output of the ASD. This will damage the ASD and may cause injury to personnel.
• DO NOT install the ASD if it is damaged or if it is missing any component(s).
• DO NOT connect resistors across terminals PA – PC or PO – PC. This may cause a fire.
• Ensure the correct phase sequence and the desired direction of motor rotation in the Bypass mode
(if applicable).
• Turn the power on only after attaching and/or securing the front cover.
6
Protection
• Ensure that primary protection exists for the input wiring to the equipment. This protection must be able to interrupt the available fault current from the power line. The equipment may or may not be equipped with an input disconnect (option).
• All cable entry openings must be sealed to reduce the risk of entry by vermin and to allow for maximum cooling efficiency.
• External dynamic braking resistors must be thermally protected.
• It is the responsibility of the ASD Installer/Maintenance personnel to setup the Emergency Off braking system of the ASD. The function of the Emergency Off braking function is to remove output power from the drive in the event of an emergency. A supplemental braking system may also be engaged in the event of an emergency.
For further information on braking systems see
and
.
Note:
A supplemental emergency stopping system should be used with the ASD. Emergency stopping should not be a task of the ASD alone.
• Follow all warnings and precautions and do not exceed equipment ratings.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
System Integration Precautions
The following precautions are provided as general guidelines for the setup of the ASD within the system.
• The Toshiba ASD is a general-purpose product. It is a system component only and the system design should take this into consideration. Please contact your Toshiba Sales Representative for application-specific information or for training support.
• The Toshiba ASD is part of a larger system and the safe operation of the ASD will depend upon observing certain precautions and performing proper system integration.
• Improperly designed or improperly installed system interlocks may render the motor unable to start or stop on command.
• The failure of external or ancillary components may cause intermittent system operation (i.e., the system may start the motor without warning).
• A detailed system analysis and job safety analysis should be performed by the systems designer and/or systems integrator before the installation of the ASD component. Contact your Toshiba
Sales Representative for options availability and for application-specific system integration information if required.
Personnel Protection
• Installation, operation, and maintenance shall be performed by
Only.
• A thorough understanding of the ASD will be required before the installation, operation, or maintenance of the ASD.
WARNING
• Rotating machinery and live conductors can be hazardous and shall not come into contact with personnel. Personnel should be protected from all rotating machinery and electrical hazards at all times.
• Insulators, machine guards, and electrical safeguards may fail or be defeated by the purposeful or inadvertent actions of workers. Insulators, machine guards, and electrical safeguards are to be inspected (and tested where possible) at installation and periodically after installation for potential hazardous conditions.
• DO NOT allow personnel near rotating machinery. Warning signs to this effect shall be posted at or near the machinery.
• DO NOT allow personnel near electrical conductors. Contact with electrical conductors can be fatal. Warning signs to this effect shall be posted at or near the hazard.
• Personal protection equipment shall be provided and used to protect employees from any hazards inherent to system operation.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 7
8
System Setup Requirements
• When using the ASD as an integral part of a larger system, it is the responsibility of the ASD
Installer/Maintenance personnel to ensure that there is a fail-safe in place (i.e., an arrangement designed to switch the system to a safe condition if there is a fault or failure).
• System safety features should be employed and designed into the integrated system in a manner such that system operation, even in the event of system failure, will not cause harm or result in system damage or injury to personnel (i.e., E-Off, Auto-Restart settings, System Interlocks, etc.).
• The programming setup and system configuration of the ASD may allow it to start the motor unexpectedly. A familiarity with the Auto-Restart settings are a requirement to use this product.
• Power factor improvement/correction capacitors or surge absorbers MUST NOT be installed on the output of the ASD.
• Use of the built-in system protective features is highly recommended (i.e., E-Off, Overload
Protection, etc.).
• The operating controls and system status indicators should be clearly readable and positioned where the operator can see them without obstruction.
• Additional warnings and notifications shall be posted at the equipment installation location as deemed required by
.
CAUTION
• There may be thermal or physical properties, or ancillary devices integrated into the overall system that may allow for the ASD to start the motor without warning. Signs to this effect must be posted at the equipment installation location.
• If a secondary magnetic contactor (MC) or an ASD output disconnect is used between the ASD and the load, it should be interlocked to halt the ASD before the secondary contact opens. If the output contactor is used for bypass operation, it must be interlocked such that commercial power is never applied to the ASD output terminals (U, V, or W).
• When using an ASD output disconnect, the ASD and the motor must be stopped before the disconnect is either opened or closed. Closing the output disconnect while the 3-phase output of the
ASD is active may result in equipment damage or injury to personnel.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Operational and Maintenance
Precautions
WARNING
• Turn off, lockout, and tag out the main power, the control power, and instrumentation connections before inspecting or servicing the drive, or opening the door of the enclosure.
• Turn off, lockout, and tag out the main power, the control power, and instrumentation connections before proceeding to disconnect or connect the power wiring to the equipment.
• The capacitors of the G9 ASD maintain a residual charge for a period of time after turning off the
ASD. The required time for each ASD typeform is indicated with a cabinet label and a Charge
LED (shown for smaller ASDs in
Figure 2 on pg. 16 ; LED is located on the front panel of larger
ASDs). Wait at least the minimum time indicated on the enclosure-mounted label and ensure that the Charge LED has gone out before opening the door of the ASD once the ASD power has been turned off.
• Turn the power on only after attaching (or closing) the front cover and DO NOT remove or open the front cover of the G9 ASD when the power is on.
• DO NOT attempt to disassemble, modify, or repair the ASD. Call your Toshiba Sales
Representative for repair information.
• DO NOT place any objects inside of the ASD.
• If the ASD should emit smoke, or an unusual odor or sound, turn off the power immediately.
• The heat sink and other components may become extremely hot to the touch. Allow the unit to cool before coming in contact with these items.
• Remove power from the ASD during extended periods of non-use.
• The system should be inspected periodically for damaged or improperly functioning parts, cleanliness, and to ensure that the connectors are tightened securely.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 9
Motor Characteristics
Listed below are some variable speed AC motor-control concepts with which the user of the
ASD should become familiar.
Motor Autotuning
Motor production methods may cause minor differences in motor operation. The negative effects of these differences may be minimized by using the Autotune feature of the ASD. Autotuning is a function of the
ASD that measures several parameters of the connected motor and places these readings in a stored table.
The software uses the information in the table to help optimize the response of the ASD to applicationspecific load and operational requirements. The Autotuning function may be enabled for automatic
tuning, configured manually at F400 , or disabled.
The measured parameters include the rotor resistance, the stator resistance, the required excitation inductance, rotational inertia values, and leakage inductance values.
Pulse Width Modulation Operation
The ASD uses sinusoidal Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) control. The output current waveform generated by the ASD approaches that of a perfect sine wave; however, the output waveform is slightly distorted. For this reason, the motor may produce more heat, noise, and vibration when operated by an
ASD, rather than directly from commercial power.
Low-Speed Operation
Operating a general-purpose motor at lower speeds may cause a decrease in the cooling ability of the motor. Reducing the torque requirement of the motor at lower speeds will decrease the generated heat at lower speeds.
When the motor is to be operated at low speed (less than 50% of full speed) and at the rated torque continuously, a Toshiba VF motor (designed for use in conjunction with an ASD) is recommended.
Overload Protection Adjustment
The ASD software monitors the output current of the system and determines when an overload condition occurs. The overload current level is a percentage of the rating of the motor. This function protects the motor from overload.
The default setting for the overload detection circuit is set to the maximum rated current of the ASD at the factory. This setting will have to be adjusted to match the rating of the motor with which the ASD is to be
used. To change the overload reference level, see Motor Overload Protection Level 1 on pg. 182
.
Operation Above 60 Hz
A motor produces more noise and vibration when it is operated at frequencies above 60 Hz. Also, when operating a motor above 60 Hz, the rated limit of the motor or its bearings may be exceeded; this may void the motor warranty.
Contact the motor manufacturer for additional information before operating the motor above 60 Hz.
10 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Power Factor Correction
DO NOT connect a power factor correction capacitor or surge absorber to the output of the ASD.
If the ASD is used with a motor that is equipped with a capacitor for power factor correction, remove the capacitor from the motor.
Connecting either of these devices to the output of the ASD may cause the ASD to malfunction and trip, or the output device may cause an over-current condition resulting in damage to the device or the ASD.
Light Load Conditions
When a motor is operated under a continuous light load (i.e., at a load of less than 50% of its rated capacity) or it drives a load which produces a very small amount of inertia, it may become unstable and produce abnormal vibration or trips because of an over-current condition. In such a case, the carrier frequency may be lowered to compensate for this undesirable condition (see Program
Special
Carrier Frequency
).
Note:
When operating in the Vector Control mode the carrier frequency should be set to
2.2 kHz or above.
Motor/Load Combinations
When the ASD is used in combination with one of the following motors or loads, it may result in unstable operation.
• A motor with a rated capacity that exceeds the motor capacity recommended for the ASD.
• An explosion-proof motor.
When using the ASD with an explosion-proof motor or other special motor types, lower the carrier frequency to stabilize the operation. DO NOT set the carrier frequency below 2.2 kHz if operating the system in the vector control mode.
Note:
When operating in the Vector Control mode the carrier frequency should be set to
2.2 kHz or above.
If the motor that is coupled to a load that has a large backlash or a reciprocating load, use one of the following procedures to stabilize its operation.
• Adjust the S-pattern acceleration/deceleration setting,
• If operating in the Vector control mode, adjust the response time, or
• Switch to the Constant Torque control mode.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 11
12
Load-Produced Negative Torque
When the ASD is used with a load that produces negative torque (an overhauling load), the over-voltage or over-current protective functions of the ASD may cause nuisance tripping.
To minimize the undesirable effects of negative torque the dynamic braking system may be used. The dynamic braking system converts the regenerated energy into heat that is dissipated using a braking resistor. The braking resistor must be suitably matched to the load. Dynamic braking is also effective in reducing the DC bus voltage during a momentary over-voltage condition.
CAUTION
If under extreme conditions the dynamic braking system or a component of this system were to fail, the dynamic braking resistor may experience an extended over-current condition. The DBR circuit was designed to dissipate excessive amounts of heat and if the extended over-current condition were allowed to exceed the circuit parameters, this condition could result in a fire hazard.
To combat this condition, the 3-phase input may be connected using contactors that are configured to open in the event of an extended DBR over-current condition or an internal circuit failure. Using a thermal sensor and/or overload protection as the 3-phase input contactor drive signal, the contactors will open and remove the 3-phase input power in the event of an extended DBR over-current or system over-voltage condition. See
for more information using Dynamic Braking with the ASD.
Motor Braking
The motor may continue to rotate and coast to a stop after being shut off due to the inertia of the load. If an immediate stop is required, a braking system should be used. The two most common types of motor braking systems used with the ASD are DC Injection Braking and Dynamic Braking.
For further information on braking systems, see DC Injection Braking on pg. 124
and
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
G9 ASD Characteristics
Over-Current Protection
Each ASD model is designed for a specified operating power range. The ASD will incur a trip if the design specifications are exceeded.
However, the G9 ASD may be operated at 115% of the specified output-current range continuously (or
110% continuously if
60 HP for the 230-volt system or if 125 HP for the 460-volt system) or at 150%
Also, the Stall Prevention Level
may be adjusted to help with nuisance over-current trips (see
).
When using the ASD for an application to control a motor that is rated significantly less than the maximum current rating of the ASD, the over-current limit (Thermal Overload Protection) setting will have to be changed to match the FLA of the motor. For further information on this parameter, see
Overload Protection Level 1 on pg. 182
.
ASD Capacity
The ASD must not be used with a motor that has a larger capacity than the ASD, even if the motor is operated under a small load. An ASD being used in this way will be susceptible to a high-output peak current which may result in nuisance tripping.
Do not apply a level of input voltage to an ASD that is beyond that which the ASD is rated. The input voltage may be stepped down when required with the use of a step-down transformer or some other type of voltage-reduction system.
Using Vector Control
Using Vector Control enables the system to produce very high torque over the entire operating range even at extremely low speeds. Vector Control may be used with or without feedback. However, using feedback increases the speed accuracy for applications requiring precise speed control.
See
F015 on pg. 81 for further information on using Vector Control.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 13
Installation and Connections
The G9 True Torque Control
2
Adjustable Speed Drive may be set up initially by performing a few simple configuration settings. To operate properly, the ASD must be securely mounted and connected to a power source (3-phase AC input at the R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 terminals). The control terminals of the
ASD may be used by connecting the terminals of the Terminal Board (P/N 072314P903) to the proper sensors or signal input sources (see the section titled
).
System performance may be further enhanced by assigning a function to the output terminals of the
Terminal Board and connecting the terminals to the proper indicators or actuators (relays, contactors,
LEDs, etc.).
Note:
The optional ASD interface boards may be used to expand the I/O functionality of the
ASD.
14
Installation Notes
CAUTION
When a brake-equipped motor is connected to the ASD, it is possible that the brake may not release at startup because of insufficient voltage. To avoid this, DO NOT connect the brake or the brake contactor to the output of the ASD.
If an output contactor is used for bypass operation, it must be interlocked such that commercial power is never applied to the output terminals of the ASD (U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3).
DO NOT apply commercial power to the ASD output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3.
If a secondary magnetic contactor (MC) is used between the output of the ASD and the motor, it should be interlocked such that the ST – CC connection is disconnected before the output contactor is opened.
DO NOT open and then close a secondary magnetic contactor between the ASD and the motor unless the ASD is off and the motor is not rotating.
Note:
Re-application of power via a secondary contact while the G9 ASD is on or while the motor is still turning may cause ASD damage.
The ASD input voltage should remain within 10% of the specified input voltage range. Input voltages approaching the upper or lower-limit settings may require that the over-voltage and under-voltage stall protection level parameters be adjusted. Voltages outside of the permissible tolerance should be avoided.
The frequency of the input power should be ±2 Hz of the specified input frequency.
DO NOT use an ASD with a motor that has a power rating higher than the rated output of the ASD.
The G9 ASD is designed to operate NEMA B motors. Consult with your Toshiba Sales Representative before using the ASD for special applications such as with an explosion-proof motor or applications with a piston load.
Disconnect the ASD from the motor before megging or applying a bypass voltage to the motor.
Interface problems may occur when an ASD is used in conjunction with some types of process controllers. Signal isolation may be required to prevent controller and/or ASD malfunction (contact your Toshiba Sales Representative or the process controller manufacturer for additional information about compatibility and signal isolation).
Use caution when setting the output frequency. Over speeding a motor decreases its ability to deliver torque and may result in damage to the motor and/or the driven equipment.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Not all ASDs are equipped with internal primary power input fuses (typeform dependent). When connecting two or more drives that have no internal fuse to the same power line as shown in
will be necessary to select a circuit-breaking configuration that will ensure that if a short circuit occurs in ASD 1, only MCCB2 trips, not MCCB1. If it is not feasible to use this configuration, insert a fuse between MCCB2 and ASD 1.
Figure 1. Circuit Breaker Configuration.
Mounting the ASD
CAUTION
— The following thermal specifications apply to the 230- and the 460-volt ASDs ONLY —
Install the unit securely in a well ventilated area that is out of direct sunlight.
The process of converting AC to DC, and then back to AC produces heat. During normal ASD operation, up to 5% of the input energy to the ASD may be dissipated as heat. If installing the ASD in a cabinet, ensure that there is adequate ventilation.
DO NOT operate the ASD with the enclosure door open.
The ambient operating temperature rating of the G9 ASD is 14° to 104° F (-10° to 40° C).
When installing adjacent ASDs horizontally Toshiba recommends at least 5 cm of space between adjacent units. However, horizontally mounted ASDs may be installed side-by-side with no space in between the adjacent units — side-by-side installations require that the top cover be removed from each
ASD.
For 150 HP ASDs and above, a minimum of 50 cm of space is required above and below adjacent units and any obstruction.This space is the recommended minimum space requirement for the G9 ASD and ensures that adequate ventilation is provided for each unit. More space will provide a better
Note:
Ensure that the ventilation openings are not obstructed.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 15
Connecting the ASD
DANGER
Refer to the section titled Installation Precautions on pg. 4 and the section titled
Specifications on pg. 20 before attempting to connect the ASD and the motor to electrical power.
Power Connections
DANGER
C o n t a c t W i t h 3 - p h a s e I n p u t / O u t p u t T e r m i n a l s M a y C a u s e A n
E l e c t r i c a l S h o c k R e s u l t i n g I n I n j u r y O r L o s s O f L i f e .
for a system I/O connectivity schematic.
An inductor (DCL) may be connected across the PO and PA/+ terminals to provide additional filtering.
When not used, a jumper must be connected across these terminals (see
).
PA/+ and PB are used for the DBR connection if using a braking resistor.
PC/- is the negative terminal of the DC bus.
R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 are the 3-phase input supply terminals for the ASD.
U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 are the output terminals of the ASD that connect to the motor.
The location of the Charge LED for the smaller typeform ASD is provided in
. The Charge
LED is located on the front door of the enclosure of the larger ASDs.
Figure 2 . Typical G9 ASD Input/output Terminals and the
Charge LED
Grounding Capacitor Switch — Pull for Small capacitance/push for Large capacitance.
16 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Power Connection Requirements
Connect the 3-phase input power to the input terminals of the ASD at R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 (see
for the typical electrical connection scheme). Connect the output of the ASD to the motor from the ASD terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. The input and output conductors and terminal lugs used shall be in accordance with the requirements listed in the section titled
Current/Voltage Specifications on pg. 263 .
If multiple conductors are used in parallel for the input or output power and it is necessary to use separate conduits, each parallel set shall have its own conduit and not share its conduit with other parallel sets (i.e., place U1, V1, and W1 in one conduit and U2, V2, and W2 in another; refer to NEC
Article 300.20 and Article 310.4). National and local electrical codes should be referenced if three or more power conductors are run in the same conduit (refer to 2008 NEC Article 310 adjustment factors).
Note:
National and local codes should be referenced when running more than three conductors in the same conduit.
Install a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or fuse between the 3-phase power source and the
ASD in accordance with the fault current setting of the ASD and 2008 NEC Article 430.
The ASD is designed and tested to comply with UL Standard 508C. Modifications to the ASD system or failure to comply with the short circuit protection requirements outlined in this manual may
disqualify the UL rating. See Table 22 on pg. 269 for typeform-specific short circuit protection
recommendations.
As a minimum, the installation of the ASD shall conform to 2008 NEC Article 110, the Occupational
Safety and Health Administration requirements, and to any other local and regional industry codes and standards.
Note:
In the event that the motor rotates in the wrong direction when powered up, reverse any two of the three ASD output power leads (U, V, or W) connected to the motor.
Figure 3. G9 ASD/Motor Typical Connection Diagram.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 17
18
System Grounding
Proper grounding helps to prevent electrical shock and to reduce electrical noise. The ASD is designed to be grounded in accordance with Article 250 of the 2008 NEC or Section 10/Part One of the
Canadian Electrical Code (CEC).
The grounding conductor shall be sized in accordance with Article 250-122 of the NEC or Part One-
Table 6 of the CEC.
— T h e M e t a l O f C o n d u i t I s N o t A n A c c e p t a b l e G r o u n d —
The input, output, and control lines of the system shall be run in separate metal conduits and each shall have its own ground conductor.
ASDs produce high-frequency noise — steps must be taken during installation to avoid the negative effects of noise. Listed below are some examples of measures that will help to combat noise problems.
• DO NOT install the input power and output power wires in the same duct or in parallel with each other, and do not bind them together.
• DO NOT install the input/output power wires and the wires of the control circuit in the same duct or in parallel with each other, and do not bind them together.
• Use shielded wires or twisted wires for the control circuits.
• Ensure that the grounding terminals (G/E) of the ASD are securely connected to ground.
• Connect a surge suppressor to every electromagnetic contactor and every relay installed near the
ASD.
• Install noise filters as required.
Grounding Capacitor
The Grounding Capacitor plays a role in minimizing the effects of leakage current through the ASD system and through ground paths to other systems. Leakage current may cause the improper operation of earth-leakage current breakers, leakage-current relays, ground relays, fire alarms, and other sensors
— and it may cause superimposed noise on CRT screens.
The Grounding Capacitor Switch
allows the user to quickly change the value of the leakage-reduction capacitance of the 3-phase input circuit. See figures
4 , 5 , 6 , and 7 on pg. 19 for an electrical depiction of
the leakage-reduction functionality and the methods used to change the capacitance value. The method used is typeform-specific.
If using a 460-volt 5 HP ASD or a 460-volt ASD that is in the range of 7.5 HP to 25 HP, and the U/T1,
V/T2, and W/T3 connections to the motor are 100 meters or more in length, the ASD Carrier
Frequency must be set to 4 kHz or less when activating or deactivating the Grounding Capacitor
See pg. 5 for more information on the Grounding Capacitor Switch and
for the location of the switch.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Figure 4. The Grounding Capacitor
Switch is used on typeforms 230-volt
0.5 HP to 10 HP and the 25 and 30 HP/
460-volt 1.0 HP to250 HP.
The value may be set to Maximum
(default setting) or to Zero by pushing or pulling the switch actuator, respectively.
Figure 5. The Grounding Capacitor
Switch is used on typeforms 230-volt
15 HP to 20 HP and the 40 HP to
60 HP/460-volt 30 HP to 100 HP.
The value may be set to Large (default setting) or Small by pushing or pulling the switch actuator, respectively.
Figure 6. The Grounding Capacitor
Bar is used on typeforms 230-volt 75
HP and the 100 HP/460-volt 125 HP and the 150 HP.
The value may be set to Large or
Small (default setting) by connecting or disconnecting the switching bar, respectively.
Figure 7. The Grounding Capacitor
Screw is used on typeforms 460-volt
175 HP and above.
The value may be set to Large or
Small (default setting) by placing the screw in the A position or by placing the screw in the B position, respectively.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 19
Lead Length Specifications
Adhere to the NEC and any local codes during the installation of ASD/motor systems. Excessive lead lengths may adversely effect the performance of the motor. Special cables are not required. Lead lengths
from the ASD to the motor in excess of those listed in Table 1
may require filters to be added to the output of the ASD.
Table 1 lists the suggested maximum lead lengths for the listed motor voltages.
Model
230 Volt
Table 1. Lead Length Recommendations.
PWM Carrier
Frequency
NEMA MG-1-1998 Section IV Part 31
Compliant Motors
2
All 1000 feet
460 Volt
< 5 kHz
5 kHz
600 feet
300 feet
Note:
Contact the Toshiba Customer Support Center for application assistance when using lead lengths in excess of those listed.
Exceeding the peak voltage rating or the allowable thermal rise time of the motor insulation will reduce the life expectancy of the motor.
When operating in the Vector Control mode the carrier frequency should be set to
2.2 kHz or above.
20 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
I/O and Control
Terminal
Name
ST
RES
F
R
S1
S2
S3
S4
(
The ASD can be controlled by several input types and combinations thereof, as well as operate within a wide range of output frequency and voltage levels. This section discusses the ASD control methods and supported I/O functions.
The Terminal Board supports discrete and analog I/O functions and is shown in
terminals of the Terminal Board.
Note:
To use the input lines of the Terminal Board to provide Run commands the Command
Mode setting must be set to Terminal Block.
Figure 20 on pg. 26 shows the basic connection diagram for the G9 ASD system.
Table 2. Terminal Board Default Assignment Terminal Names And Functions.
Input/Output
Default Function
(Also See
Terminal Descriptions on pg. 22
)
— Multifunctional programmable discrete input. Activation required for normal ASD operation.
Reset — Multifunctional programmable discrete input. Resets the ASD.
Discrete Input
Forward — Multifunctional programmable discrete input.
Connect to CC to activate (Sink mode).
— Multifunctional programmable discrete input.
— Multifunctional programmable discrete input.
— Multifunctional programmable discrete input.
— Multifunctional programmable discrete input.
Switched Output
— Multifunctional programmable discrete input.
— Multifunctional programmable discrete output.
Reach Frequency — Multifunctional programmable discrete output.
Fault relay (N.O.).
Fault relay (N.C.).
Fault relay (common).
Circuit Config.
Multifunction programmable analog input. (0.0 to 10 VDC input).
IICC
CCA
CC
Analog Input
Analog Output
DC Input
DC Output
Pulsed Output
—
—
—
Multifunctional programmable analog input (-10 to +10 VDC input).
Unassigned
— V — Multifunctional programmable isolated analog voltage input
(0 to 10 VDC input)
Frequency Mode 2 (default SW301 setting) — I —Multifunctional
programmable isolated analog current input (4 [0] to 20 mADC input — 0 Hz to
Maximum Frequency).
— Current output that is proportional to the output current of the
ASD or to the magnitude of the function assigned to this terminal (see
Table 6 on pg. 237 for assignment listing).
Output Frequency — Current or Voltage output that is proportional to the output
frequency of the ASD or to the magnitude of the function assigned to this
terminal (see Table 6 on pg. 237 ). Select Current or Voltage at
Externally-supplied 24 VDC backup control power (1.1 A min.).
24 VDC output (200 mA max.).
10.0 VDC/10 mA voltage source for the external potentiometer.
Frequency Pulse — Multifunctional programmable output pulse train of a
frequency based on the output frequency of the ASD (see Table 6 on pg. 237 ).
Return for the V/I input terminal (see IICC
Return for the RR, RX, P24, and the PP terminals.
Return for the AM, FM, SU+, and the discrete input terminal.
DO NOT
connect to
Earth Gnd or to each other.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 21
22
Terminal Descriptions
Note:
The programmable terminal assignments may be accessed and changed from their
default settings as mapped on pg. 46
or via the Direct Access method: Program
Direct Access
Applicable Parameter Number. See the section titled
Mode Menu Navigation on pg. 46
for the applicable Direct Access parameter numbers.
For further information on terminal assignments and default setting changes, see the sections titled
and Default Setting Changes on pg. 74 .
Note:
See the section titled Cable/Terminal/Torque Specifications on pg. 265
for the G9
ASD conductor and terminal electrical specifications.
Note:
Programmable terminals will not retain their settings indefinitely in the event of a power loss. Connect an external +24 VDC supply to the SU+ terminal to retain the programmable settings in the event of Control Power loss (see
ST — The default setting for this terminal is the Standby mode controller. As the default setting, this terminal must be activated for normal system operation. The ST terminal is activated by connecting CC to this terminal (Sink mode). When deactivated, OFF is flashed on the LED Screen and the Not-Ready-
programmed to any of the functions listed in
).
RES — The default setting for this terminal is Reset. The RES terminal is activated by connecting CC to this terminal (Sink mode). A momentary connection to CC resets the ASD and any fault indications from the display. Reset is effective when faulted only. This input terminal may be programmed to any
of the functions listed in Table 5 on pg. 234
(see
).
F — The default setting for this terminal is Forward run command. The F terminal is activated by connecting CC to this terminal (Sink mode). This input terminal may be programmed to any of the
functions listed in Table 5 on pg. 234
(see
).
R — The default setting for this terminal is Reverse run command. The R terminal is activated by connecting CC to this terminal (Sink mode). This input terminal may be programmed to any of the
functions listed in Table 5 on pg. 234
(see
S1 — The default setting for this terminal is Preset Speed 1 (see
Preset Speed 1 on pg. 83 ). The S1
terminal is activated by connecting CC to this terminal (Sink mode). This input terminal may be programmed to any of the functions listed in
).
S2 — The default setting for this terminal is Preset Speed 2 (see
Preset Speed 2 on pg. 83 ). The S2
terminal is activated by connecting CC to this terminal (Sink mode). This input terminal may be programmed to any of the functions listed in
).
S3 — The default setting for this terminal is Preset Speed 3 (see
Preset Speed 3 on pg. 84 ). The S3
terminal is activated by connecting CC to this terminal (Sink mode). This input terminal may be programmed to any of the functions listed in
).
S4 — The default setting for this terminal is Preset Speed 4 (see
Preset Speed 4 on pg. 84 ). The S4
terminal is activated by connecting CC to this terminal (Sink mode). This input terminal may be programmed to any of the functions listed in
).
RR — The default function assigned to this terminal is the Frequency Mode 1 setting. The RR terminal accepts a 0 – 10 VDC input signal that is used to control the function assigned to this terminal.
This input terminal may be programmed to control the speed or torque of the motor via an amplitude setting or regulate by setting a limit. The gain and bias of this terminal may be adjusted for application-
specific suitability (see F210 –
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
SU+
P24
PP
O1A/B
O2A/B
RX — The default function assigned to this terminal is the Torque Command setting. The RX terminal accepts a ±10 VDC input signal that is used to carry out the function assigned to this terminal.
This input terminal may be programmed to raise or lower the speed or torque of the motor via an amplitude setting. This terminal may also be used to regulate the speed or torque of a motor by setting a
–
Figure 20 on pg. 26 for an electrical depiction of the RX terminal. This terminal references
CCA.
V/I — The V/I terminal has the dual function of being able to receive an input voltage or current. The function as a voltage input to receive a 0 – 10 VDC input signal. The function as a current input is to receive a 0 – 20 mA input signal. Using either input type, the function is to control the 0.0 – Maximum
Frequency output or the 0.0 to 250% torque output of the ASD. This is an isolated input terminal. This terminal may be programmed to control the speed or torque of the motor and cannot process both input types simultaneously. SW301 must be set to V or I to receive a voltage or current, respectively (see
). Terminal scaling is accomplished via
. The gain and bias of this terminal may be adjusted for application-specific suitability (see
SU+ — Externally supplied +24 VDC ±10% at 1.1 A (minimum) backup control power. This terminal references CC.
P24 — +24 VDC at 200 mA power supply for customer use. This terminal references CCA.
PP — The function of output PP is to provide a 10 VDC/10 mADC output that may be divided using a potentiometer. The tapped voltage is applied to the RR input to provide manual control of the RR programmed function. This terminal references CCA.
O1A/B (OUT1A/B) — The default function assigned to this terminal is Output Low Speed. This output may be programmed to provide an indication (open or closed) that any one of the functions listed
has occurred or is active. This function may be used to signal external equipment or to activate the brake (see
F130 ). The OUT1 terminal is rated at 2 A/120 VAC and
2 A/30 VDC.
O2A/B (OUT2A/B) — The default function assigned to this terminal is ACC/DEC Complete. This output may be programmed to provide an indication (open or closed) that any one of the functions listed
has occurred or is active. This function may be used to signal external equipment or to activate the brake (see
F131 ). The OUT2 terminal is rated at 2 A/120 VAC and
2 A/30 VDC.
FP — The default function of this output terminal is to output a series of pulses at a rate that is a function of the output frequency of the ASD (50 mA max. at 1.0 kHz to 43.3 kHz). As the output frequency of the ASD goes up so does the FP output pulse rate. This terminal may be programmed to
AM — This output terminal produces an output current that is proportional to the output frequency of the ASD or of the magnitude of the function assigned to this terminal. The available assignments for this output terminal are listed in
Table 6 on pg. 237 . For further information on this terminal see
FM — This output terminal produces an output current or voltage that is proportional to the output frequency of the ASD or of the magnitude of the function assigned to this terminal. The available
assignments for this output terminal are listed in Table 6 on pg. 237
. For further information on this terminal see
. The Voltage/Current output selection is performed at
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 23
FLC
FLB
FLA
FLA — One of two normally closed contacts that, under user-defined conditions, connect to FLC.
FLB — One of two normally open contacts that, under user-defined conditions, connect to FLC.
FLC — FLC is the common leg of a single-pole double-throw form C relay. The FL relay is the Fault
Relay by default, but may be programmed to any of the selections of Table 8 on pg. 239
. For further
information on this terminal see F132
and
Note:
The FLA, FLB, and FLC contacts are rated at 2A/120 VAC and 2A/30 VDC.
Figure 8 . FLA, FLB, and FLC Switching Contacts Shown In The Normal Operating Condition.
Note: The relay is shown in the normal operating condition. During a faulted condition the relay connection is FLC-to-FLA.
Figure 9 . Terminal Board.
Sink Source
CAUTION
J100
1 to 2 = Sink
2 to 3 = Source
J101
(24V)
1 to 2 = System Supplied
2 to 3 = Ext. Supplied
SW301
V/I Switch
TB1
Ensure that the ground screw is securely in place to prevent arcing, intermittent operation, or system failure.
24
TB2
TB3
TB4
Half/Full Duplex Switch
for more information on the Terminal Board connections.
See the section titled Terminal Descriptions on pg. 22 for terminal descriptions.
See the section titled Cable/Terminal/Torque Specifications on pg. 265 for information on the proper
cable/terminal sizes and torque specifications when making Terminal Board connections.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
I/O Circuit Configurations
Figure 10. Discrete Input.
Figure 11. RR Input.
Figure 12. RX Input.
Figure 13. V/I Isolated Input.
Figure 14. P24 Output.
Figure 15. PP Output.
Figure 16. OUT1/OUT2 Output.
Figure 17. FP Output.
Figure 18. AM/FM Output.
Figure 19. Fault Relay (Shown Not Faulted).
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 25
Typical Connection Diagram
Figure 20 . The G9 ASD Typical Connection Diagram.
Note:
When connecting multiple wires to any of ASD terminals, do not connect a solid wire and a stranded wire to the same terminal.
26
Note:
The AM, FM, and the +SU analog terminals are referenced to CC.
Note:
The PP, RR, RX, and the P24 analog terminals are referenced to CCA.
Note:
The isolated V/I analog terminal references IICC.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Startup and Test
Before turning on the ASD ensure that:
• R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 are connected to the 3-phase input power.
• U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 are connected to the motor.
• The 3-phase input voltage is within the specified tolerance.
• There are no shorts and all grounds are secured.
• All personnel are at a safe distance from the motor and the motor-driven equipment.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 27
Electronic Operator Interface
The G9 ASD Electronic Operator Interface (EOI) is comprised of an LED Screen, an LCD Screen, two
LEDs, a rotary encoder, and five keys. These items are shown and described on
.
EOI Operation
The EOI is the primary input/output device for the user. The EOI may be used to monitor system functions, input data into the system, perform diagnostics, and view performance data (e.g., motor frequency, bus voltage, torque, etc.).
The software used with the ASD is menu driven; thus, making it a select-and-click environment. The operating parameters of a motor may be selected and viewed or changed using the EOI (or via communications).
EOI Remote Mounting
The EOI may be mounted remotely using the optional ASD-MTG-KIT9. The kit contains all of the hardware required to mount the EOI of the 9-Series ASD remotely.
System operation and EOI operation while using the remotely-mounted EOI are the same as with the
ASD-mounted configuration.
28 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Figure 21. The G9 ASD Electronic Operator Interface Features.
Selected
item: (01)
Number
of items: (14)
Program
Fundamental...
Terminal...
Direct Access...
Utilities...
Protection...
01:14
LED Screen
Rotary Encoder
LCD Screen
Local/Remote
Key (LED)
Run Key
(LED)
Escape Key
Mode
Key
Stop-Reset Key
EOI Features
LED Screen
— Displays the running frequency, active Fault, or active Alarm information.
Rotary Encoder
— Used to access the G9 ASD menu selections, change the value of a displayed parameter, and performs the Enter key function. Turn the Rotary Encoder either clockwise or counterclockwise to perform the Up or Down functions of the displayed menu selection. Press the Rotary
Encoder to perform the Enter (select) function.
LCD Screen
— Displays configuration information, performance data (e.g., output frequency, bus voltage, torque, etc.), diagnostic information, and LED Screen information in expanded normal text.
Local/Remote Key
— Toggles the system to and from the Local and Remote modes. The Local/
Remote Key is disabled while the Fault screen is displayed. The LED is on when the system is in the
Local Command mode. The Local mode allows the Command and Frequency control functions to be carried out via the EOI.
The Remote mode enables the Command and Frequency control functions to be carried out via the
Terminal Board, RS485, Communication Card, Pulse Input, or the settings of
/
. The
selection may be made via Program Fundamental Standard Mode Settings Command Mode
and
Frequency Mode 1 , respectively.
The availability of Local mode control (Command and Frequency control) may be disabled via Program
Local/Remote Key Command Override and Local/Remote Key Frequency
performing a Reset (see
ESC Key
— Returns the system to the previous level of the menu tree, toggles between the EOI
Command screen and the Frequency Command screen, or cancels changes made to a field if pressed while still in the reverse video mode (dark background/light text). The three functions are menu-specific.
Run Key
— Issues the Run command while in the Local mode. The Run key LED illuminates green while stopped or red while running to alert personnel.
Mode Key
— Provides a means to access the three root menus. Pressing the Mode Key key repeatedly
menus, the Program menu will display the root menu screen or the Program sub-menu item being accessed prior to pressing the Mode key.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 29
30
Stop-Reset Key
— This key has three functions.
1. Issues the Off command (decelerates to Stop at the programmed rate) if pressed once while in the
Local mode in accordance with the setting of F721 .
2. Initiates an Emergency Off Fault if pressed twice quickly from the Local or Remote modes. The
Emergency Off function terminates the G9 ASD output and stops the motor in accordance with the
.
3. Resets active Faults if pressed twice quickly. The source of the Fault must be determined and corrected before normal ASD operation can resume.
LED/LCD Screen
The LED Screen is used to display the output frequency, active alarms and/or active faults or Off. If there are no active alarms or faults, the output frequency is displayed.
During an active alarm, the display toggles to and from the running frequency and the active alarm.
During an active fault, the fault is displayed.
Loss of the ST-to-CC connection flashes Off.
LED Character/Font
Information
Characters displayed on the LED Screen will be of the seven-segment format. Not all alphanumeric characters are used with the LED
Screen.
Listed are the seven-segment characters used on the LED Screen along with the same characters as they are displayed on the LCD Screen.
LCD Font Information
All alpha-numeric characters are used.
LED
A b
C d
E
F
G
H
I
J
L
M n
O b
P r
S t
U
LED/LCD Screen Information
O
P
M n
J
L
H
I
S t q r
U
F
G d
E
LCD
A b
C
LED
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
6
7
4
5
LCD
1
2
3
8
9
0 v y
v y
-
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
LCD Screen
The LCD Screen is the primary user input/output information center. Parameter settings may be viewed or changed using the LCD Screen module of the EOI. To view or change a parameter setting using the
LCD Screen, press the Mode key until the Program menu is displayed. Turn the Rotary Encoder until
the desired Primary Menu item (see pg. 46
) is within the cursor block. Press the Rotary Encoder to select the item from the Primary Menu (repeat the press-to-select function for submenu items).
See the section titled
Default Setting Changes on pg. 74
for more information on changing parameter settings.
Upon reaching the desired parameter selection the current setting may be viewed, or selected and changed by pressing the Rotary Encoder — the setting will take on the reverse video format (dark background/ light text). Turn the Rotary Encoder to change the parameter setting. Press the ESC key while the new parameter setting is in the reverse video mode to exit the selection without saving the change or press the
Rotary Encoder while the parameter setting is in the reverse video mode to accept the new change.
Repeated ESC key entries at any time takes the menu back one level each time the ESC key is pressed until the Frequency Command screen is reached. Further ESC entries will toggle the system to and from the Frequency Command screen and the EOI Command menu.
Note:
Changes carried out from the EOI Command screen will be effective for EOIcontrolled ASD operation only. See the section titled
EOI Command Mode on pg. 42 for further information on EOI Command Mode
operations.
Primary Menus of the LCD Screen
The three primary screens of the LCD Screen are displayed while accessing the associated operating mode: the Frequency Command, Monitor, and Program Menu screens.
Figure 22. Frequency Command Screen.
Speed Reference %
Speed Reference Hz
User-Selected
Monitored Parameters
(see
Shows Discrete I/O Terminal
Status or Alarm Condition
Not-Ready-to-Run
Indicator (ST-to-CC required)
Ready-to-Run Indicator
Appears When ST is Connected to CC
Forward Run Active
Reverse Run Active
Figure 23. Monitor Screen (see pg. 43 for more on the Monitor Screen items).
Screen Name
Monitor
01:43
Item Number 1 of 43
Monitored items
(Only 5 Items Listed)
Active Frequency
Command
Active DC Bus Voltage
Freq At Trip:
Freq Ref:
Output Current:
DC Voltage:
Output Voltage:
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
Speed at Trip (If Applicable)
Active output Current
ASD Output Voltage
Figure 24. Program Menu Screen (see pg. 46 for more on the Program Menu Screen).
Screen Name
Item Number 1 of 15
Program Menu items
(Only 5 Items Listed)
Primary Menu Items
{
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 31
LED/LCD Screen Installation Note
When installing the LED/LCD Screen module of the EOI ensure that the left side of the display is inserted first with the top and bottom catches (see Phillips screws at underside of display) securely in place. This ensures the proper alignment and electrical connection of the CNX connector of the LED/LCD Screen module PCB. Gently hold the display in place while securing the Phillips mounting screw.
If improperly seated, the periphery of the LED/LCD Screen module will not be flush with the front panel surface and the unit will not function properly.
32 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Keypad Remote Mounting
The ASD may be controlled from a remotely-mounted keypad. For safety and application-specific reasons, some ASD installations will warrant that the operator not be in the vicinity during operation or that the keypad not be attached to the ASD housing. The keypad may be mounted either with or without the optional Remote Mounting Kit (P/N ASD-MTG-KIT). The ease of installation is enhanced by the
Remote Mounting Kit (P/N 58333) which allows for keypad placement and easier cable routing.
Remote mounting will also allow for multiple keypad mountings at one location if controlling and monitoring several ASDs from a central location is required.
The keypad can operate up to 9 feet away from the ASD. A keypad extender cable is required for remote mounting. The keypad extender cable is available in a 9-ft. length and may be ordered through your
Toshiba Sales Representative.
The optional dust cover (P/N ASD-BPC) may be used to cover the front panel opening of the ASD housing after removing the keypad.
Remote Keypad Required Hardware
Keypad Mounting Hardware
• EOI Remote-Mount Housing — P/N 58333 (included with 230-volt 40-HP and above; and with the
460-volt 75 HP and above)
• 6-32 x 5/16” Pan Head Screw — P/N 50595 (4 ea.)
• #6 Split-Lock Washer — P/N 01884 (4 ea.)
• #6 Flat Washer — P/N 01885 (4 ea.)
Bezel Plate Mounting Hardware
• Bezel Plate — P/N 52291
• 10-32 Hex Nut — P/N 01922 (4 ea.)
• #10 Split-Lock Washer — P/N 01923 (4 ea.)
• #10 Flat Washer — P/N 01924 (4 ea.)
• Dust Cover — P/N ASD-BPC (Optional)
Extender Cable
• ASD-CAB10F: Cable, 9 ft.
Keypad Installation Precautions
Install the unit securely in a well ventilated area that is out of direct sunlight using the four mounting holes at the rear of the keypad. The ambient temperature rating for the keypad is 14° to 104° F (-10° to 40° C).
• Select a mounting location that is easily accessible by the user.
• Avoid installation in areas where vibration, heat, humidity, dust, metal particles, or high levels of electrical noise (EMI) are present.
• Do not install the keypad where it may be exposed to flammable chemicals or gases, water, solvents, or other fluids.
• Turn on the power only after securing the front cover of the ASD.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 33
Keypad Remote Mounting w/o the ASD-MTG-KIT
Note:
for the dimensions and the item locations referenced in steps
through
.
1. At the keypad mounting location, mark the 3.80” by 3.56” hole and the four 7/32” screw holes.
2. Cut the 3.80” by 3.56” rectangular hole.
3. Drill the four 7/32” screw holes.
4. Attach and secure the EOI to the front side of the mounting location using the four 6-32 x 5/16” pan head screws, the #6 split lock washers, and the #6 flat washers.
5. Connect the extension cable.
Keypad Mounting Dimensions
Figure 25. Keypad Mounting Dimensions.
34 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Keypad Remote Mounting Using the ASD-MTG-KIT
Note:
See Figure 26 for the dimensions and the item locations referenced in steps 1
through
.
1. At the keypad mounting location, mark the 4.60” by 4.50” hole and the four 11/32” screw holes.
2. Cut the 4.60” by 4.50” rectangular hole.
3. Drill the four 11/32” holes for the Bezel Plate mount.
4. Attach and secure the Bezel Plate to the front side of the mounting location using the four 10-32 hex nuts, #10 split lock washers, and the #10 flat washers.
5. Attach and secure the keypad to the front side of the Bezel Plate using the four 6-32 x 5/16” pan head screws, #6 split lock washers, and the #6 flat washers.
6. Connect the extension cable.
Keypad ASD-MTG-KIT Mounting Dimensions
Figure 26. Keypad Bezel Plate Mounting Dimensions.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 35
Command Mode and Frequency Mode
Control
Command control includes instructions such as Stop, Run, Jog, etc. The source of the Command signal must be established for normal operation.
Frequency commands control the output speed of the ASD. The source of the frequency control signal must be established for normal operation.
The source of the command control and speed control may be either internal or external. Once the source signal is selected for either function, the system may be configured to use the selected signal all of the time or switch under user-defined conditions.
Command and Frequency control may be carried out using any one of several control methods (signal sources) or combinations thereof. In the event that multiple control commands are received, the signal sources are assigned priority levels. The primary control method for Command and Frequency control
uses the settings of F003 and F004
, respectively.
Command Control (
01:06
Standard Mode Selection
The Command Mode selection of
the primary source of the command input for the ASD.
However, the Override feature may supersede the
.
(F003) Command Mode
Selection
shows the hierarchy of the control sources managed by the Override function. The level
Terminal Block of the control item of the hierarchy is listed from left to right, most to least, respectively. As indicated in
the table, the Override setting may supersede the F003
setting.
Placing the EOI in the Local mode selects the RS485 2-wire as the Command Mode control source.
Local mode operation may be superseded by other Override settings.
Example: With the EOI set to Local, Communication Board input or RS485 4-wire input will supersede EOI control input.
The remaining control sources may be placed into the Override mode using communications.
The source of the Command control signal may be selected by:
• The
setting,
• Placing an item from the Command signal source selections in the Override mode via communications, or
• Placing the EOI in the Local mode (places only the RS485 [2-wire] or the RS485 [4-wire] in the
Override mode).
Possible Command signal source selections include the following:
• Terminal Block (default),
• EOI Keypad,
• RS485,
• Communication Option Board, or
•
setting (is used if no signal sources are in the Override mode).
Note:
The Terminal Board is placed in the Override mode for Command functions by assigning a discrete terminal to Command Terminal Board Priority and connecting the terminal to CC. Once activated (Run command required), the Terminal Board settings will be used for Override Command control (F, R, Preset Speeds, etc.).
36 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Frequency Control (
Standard Mode Selection
(F004) Frequency Mode 1
02:06
The Frequency Mode 1 (or the Frequency Mode 2) setting establishes the user-selected source of the frequency-control input for the G9 ASD. The signal source selected here is used for speed control unless the Reference Priority Selection parameter is configured to switch this setting automatically (see
F200) or if the Override feature is enabled.
RR
shows the hierarchy of the control sources managed by the Override function. The level of the control item of the hierarchy is listed from left to right, most to least, respectively. As indicated in the table, the Override setting may supersede the selection at
Placing the EOI in the Local mode selects the RS485 2-wire as the Frequency Mode 1 control source.
Local mode operation may be superseded by other Override settings.
Example: With the EOI set to Local, the Communication Board input or the RS485 4-wire input will supersede EOI control input.
The remaining control sources may be placed into the Override mode using communications.
The source of the Frequency control signal may be selected by:
• The
setting,
• Placing an item from the Frequency control source selections in the Override mode via communications, or
• Placing the EOI in the Local mode (places only the RS485 [2-wire] in the Override mode).
Possible Frequency control source selections include the following:
• Communication Board,
• RS485,
• EOI Keypad,
• Terminal Block (the default setting), or
•
setting (used if no other items are in the Override mode).
Note:
The Terminal Board is placed in the Override mode for Speed control functions by assigning a discrete terminal to V/I Terminal Priority and connecting the terminal to
CC. Once the discrete terminal is activated, V/I is used as the Terminal Board
Override control item.
Command and Frequency Control Selections
The user may select only one Command source and only one source for Frequency control. The default settings for Command and Frequency control are Terminal Block and RR, respectively.
The ASD has a command register for each item listed as a Command or Frequency source. The registers store the Override setting for each control source. The registers are continuously scanned to determine if any of the listed items are in the Override mode.
For each scan cycle, the command registers of the control sources are scanned for the Override setting
the Frequency section detected as being in the Override mode will be used for Command and
Frequency control, respectively. If no items are detected as being in the Override mode, the settings of
F003 and F004 will be used for Command and Frequency control, respectively.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 37
Any or all of the Command and Frequency control input sources may be placed in the Override mode.
Placing the ASD in the Local mode (Local/Remote LED on) via the EOI places the RS485 2-wire control selection in the Override mode for Command and Frequency input (see the section titled
for the proper setting). The Local/Remote control Override feature for
Command and Frequency (or either) may be enabled/disabled at Program
Utilities Prohibition
Local/Remote Key (Command or Frequency) Override.
Communications may be used to place the remaining Command and eligible Frequency control input sources in the Override mode. Once placed in the Override mode this setting is valid until it is cancelled, the power supply is turned off, or the ASD is reset.
Override Operation
The signal sources of
are scanned from left to right in the order that they are listed to determine which input sources are in the Override mode (active Command or Frequency command present). The first item detected as having the Override function turned on is the selection that is used for Command or
Frequency control input.
The Override control setting supersedes the setting of the Command mode setting ( F003
) and the
Frequency mode setting ( F004 ). However, the F003 and F004
settings will be used in the event that the register scan returns the condition that none of the listed items have the Override feature turned on or a discrete input terminal is set to Serial/Local Switch and is activated.
Command and Frequency-Control Override Hierarchy
1
Forced F003/
F004 by I/P
Terminal
(Assign to Serial/
Local Switch)
1
Frequency control Override operation.
The ASD software reads the memory locations of the listed control sources from the left to the right.
The first item to be read that has the Override feature turned on will be used for Command or Frequency control.
Table 3 . Command and Frequency Control Hierarchy.
2 3 4 5 6 Priority Level
Comm.
Board
X
RS485
X
EOI/
Keypad
X
Terminal Board
(Binary/BCD Input)
X
F003/F004
X
Command/
Frequency Mode
F003/F004 Setting
0
0
1
0
X
1
X
X
X
X
X
X
Communication Board
RS485
0 0 0
1
X X EOI/Keypad
0 0 0 0
1
X Terminal Board
0 0 0 0 0
F003/F004
Setting
F003/F004 Setting
Note: 1 = Override feature is turned on for that control input source; 0 = Override Off; X = Don’t Care.
38 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Command Control Selections
The following is a listing with descriptions of the
Command Mode (
) selections (Program
Fundamental
Standard Mode Selection Command
Mode Selection).
Settings:
0 — Terminal Block
Allows for Command control input via the
Terminal Board.
Standard Mode Selection
01:06
(F003) Command Mode
Selection
Terminal Block
(Default)
1 — Not Used
Unused.
2 — EOI Keypad
This setting is used for EOI command control.
3 — RS485
This setting is used to transfer commands to the ASD via RS485 4-wire.
4 — Communication Option Board
Use this setting if using the optional Communication Board for command control.
Frequency Control
Selections
Standard Mode Selection
(F004) Frequency Mode 1
02:06
The following is a listing with descriptions of the
Frequency Mode ( F004 ) selections (Program
Fundamental
Standard Mode Selection
Frequency Mode 1).
Settings:
RR
(Default)
(Default)
1 — VI/II (V/I)
Used when a 0 to 10-volt DC analog input or a 0 – 20 mA DC current input is used as the speed control input. Only one input signal type may be used at a time. Set SW301 to the desired signal type.
2 — RR
Used for a 0 to 10-volt DC analog input signal.
3 — RX
Used for a -10 to +10-volt DC analog input signal.
4 — Not Used
Unused.
5 — EOI Keypad
Used for EOI frequency control.
6 — RS485
Used to transfer speed commands to the ASD via RS485 4-wire.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 39
7 — Communication Option Board
Use this setting if using the optional Communication Board for frequency control.
8 — RX2 Option (AI1)
Used for a -10 to +10-volt DC analog input signal.
9 — Option V/I
Allows for the use of the optional voltage/current frequency-control interface.
10 — UP/DOWN Frequency
A discrete terminal may be configured to increase or decrease the speed of the motor by
momentarily connecting the assigned discrete input terminal to CC. See F264 on pg. 128 for
further information on this feature.
11 — Pulse Input Option
Used to allow the system to use a pulsed input for frequency control. See
for further information on this feature.
12 — Pulse Input (motor CPU)
Used to allow the system to use a pulsed input for frequency control. See
for further information on this feature.
13 — Binary/BCD Input Option
Allows for discrete terminal to be used for frequency-control input.
40 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
System Configuration and Menu Options
Root Menus
The Mode key accesses the three primary modes of the ASD: the Frequency Command mode, the
Monitor mode, and the Program mode. From either mode, press the Mode key to loop through to the
other two modes (see Figure 27 ). While in the Frequency Command mode, pressing the ESC key
toggles the menu to and from the EOI Command mode and the Frequency Command mode.
The Alarm or Fault information will be displayed in the event of an active Alarm or Fault. Alarm text will be displayed on the Frequency Command screen and on the LED Screen when active. Fault information will be displayed via the Fault screen. See
for more information on Alarms and Trips.
Note:
EOI Command mode changes are effective for EOI control Only.
Figure 27. G9 ASD Root Menu Navigation.
Frequency Command Mode
Frequency Setting
While operating in the Local mode (Local LED is illuminated on the front panel), the running frequency of the motor may be set from the Frequency Command screen. Using the Rotary Encoder, enter the
Frequency Command value, connect ST to CC, provide a Run command (F and/or R), and then press the Run key. The motor will run at the Frequency Command speed and may be changed while running.
See
and
for more information on the Frequency
Command mode.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 41
EOI Command Mode
The EOI Command mode is accessed by pressing the ESC key from the Frequency Command screen.
The control settings of the EOI Command menu are effective for EOI control only.
The EOI Command mode provides quick access to the following menu parameters:
Direction — Forward or Reverse.
Stop Pattern — The Decel Stop or Coast Stop settings determines the method used to stop the motor when using the Stop-Reset key of the EOI. The Decel Stop setting enables the Dynamic
or the DC Injection Braking system setup at F250 , F251
.
The Coast Stop setting allows the motor to stop at the rate allowed by the inertia of the load.
Note:
The Stop Pattern setting has no effect on the Emergency Off settings of
V/f Group — One of 4 V/f profiles may be selected and run. Each V/f profile is comprised of 4 user settings: Base Frequency, Base Frequency Voltage, Manual Torque Boost, and Electronic
Thermal Protection. Expanded descriptions of these parameters may be found in the section titled
Direct Access Parameter Information on pg. 76 .
Accel/Decel Group — One of 4 Accel/Decel profiles may be selected and run. Each of the Accel/
Decel profiles is comprised of three user settings: Acceleration, Deceleration, and Pattern.
Expanded descriptions of these parameters may be found in the section titled Direct Access
Parameter Information on pg. 76
).
Feedback in Panel Mode — This feature enables or disables the PID feedback function.
Torque Limit Group — This parameter is used to select 1 of 4 preset positive torque limits to apply to the active motor (of a multiple motor configuration). The settings of profiles 1 – 4 may be setup at
,
42 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Monitor Mode
The Monitor mode allows the user to monitor motor performance variables, control settings, and configuration data during motor operation. The items viewable from this mode are listed and described below.
Note:
The Monitor mode is a read-only mode. The settings cannot be changed from the
Monitor mode. For information on how to change the values, see the section titled
Default Setting Changes on pg. 74
.
Note:
Any two of the Underlined monitored items may be selected for display at the
Frequency Command screen while running via Program
Utilities
(see
pg. 45 for information on using the Main Monitor Selections
feature).
Note:
The
setting will determine if the Current and Voltage values displayed appear as
A (Amps) and V (Voltage), or if the value is shown as a % (percentage) of the ASD rating.
Frequency at Trip — Displays the at-trip frequency.
Frequency Reference — Displays the Frequency Setpoint.
Output Current — Displays the Output Current as a percentage of the rated capacity of the ASD.
DC Bus Voltage — Displays the Bus Voltage as a percentage of the rated capacity of the ASD.
Output Voltage — Displays the Output Voltage as a percentage of the rated capacity of the ASD.
AM Output — Displays the AM output terminal value for the function assigned to the AM terminal.
FM Output — Displays the FM output terminal value for the function assigned to the FM terminal.
Motor OL (Overload) Real — Displays the real-time Motor Overload value as a percentage of the rated capacity of the motor.
Motor OL (Overload) Trip — Displays the Motor Overload Trip value as a percentage of the rated capacity of the motor.
Motor Load — Displays the real-time Motor Load as a percentage of the rated capacity of the motor.
ASD OL (Overload) Real — Displays the real-time ASD Overload as a percentage of the rated capacity of the ASD.
ASD OL (Overload) Trip — Displays the ASD Overload Trip value as a percentage of the rated capacity of the ASD.
ASD Load — Displays the ASD Load as a percentage of the rated capacity of the ASD.
Run Time — Displays the Cumulative Run Time in hours.
Compensation Frequency — Displays the Output Frequency after the application of the slip compensation correction value (Post Compensation Frequency).
DBR OL (Overload) Real — Displays the real-time DBR Overload value as a percentage of the
Dynamic Braking Resistor capacity.
DBR OL (Overload) Trip — Displays the DBR Overload Trip value as a percentage of the
Dynamic Braking Resistor capacity.
DBR Load — Displays the DBR Load as a percentage of the Dynamic Braking Resistor capacity.
Feedback (inst) — Provides a status of the Real Time Feedback in Hz.
Feedback (1 second) — Provides a status of the 1-Second Averaging feedback in Hz.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 43
Past Trip 1
44
Torque — Displays the Output Torque as a percentage of the rated capacity of the ASD.
Torque Reference — Displays the Torque Reference as a percentage of the maximum torque available.
Torque Current — Displays the torque-producing current value.
Excitation Current — Displays the current value required to produce the excitation field.
PID Feedback — Provides a status of the PID Real Time Feedback in Hz.
Input Power — Displays the Input Power in Kilowatts (kW).
Output Power — Displays the Output Power in Kilowatts (kW).
Pattern Group Number — Displays the active Pattern Run Group Number.
Pattern Group Cycle — Displays the cycle number of the active Pattern Run Group.
Pattern Group Preset — Displays the active Preset Speed being run of the active Pattern Run
Group.
Pattern Time — Displays the remaining time for the active Pattern Run Group.
RR — Displays the RR input value as a percentage of the full range of the RR value (potentiometer input).
V/I — Displays the V/I input setting as a percentage of the full range of the V/I value.
Note:
The isolated V/I input terminal may receive Current or Voltage to control the
output speed or the output torque. The input signal type must be selected at SW301 on the Terminal Board.
The V input setting of SW301 is used for the 0 – 10 VDC analog input signal and the I input setting of SW301 is used for the 0 – 20 mA analog input signal. Either
may be used as a frequency or torque command source. See parameter F201
for
more information on the setup of this terminal.
The LCD Screen shows the V/I terminal as VI/II (the additional character I is used to indicate “Input.”).
RX — Displays the RX input setting as a percentage of the full range of the RX value (-10 to
+10 VDC input).
RX2 Option (AI1) — Displays the RX2 input setting as a percentage of the full range of the RX2 value.
Note:
The RX2 function is available on the Expansion IO Card Option 1 option board
(P/N ETB003Z) only.
Trip Code — Displays None if there are no errors, or displays one of the associated Fault Codes
listed in Table 14 on page 248
if there is an active Fault (e.g., E = Emergency Off).
Past Trip 1 — This function records and displays the last trip incurred. Subsequent trips will replace
Past Trip 1. As trip records are replaced they are shifted to the next level of the Past Trip locations until being deleted (i.e., Past Trip 1 is moved to Past Trip 2 and then to Past Trip 3 until being shifted out of Past Trip 4). Once shifted out of Past Trip 4 the record is deleted. If no trips have occurred since the last reset, None is displayed for each trip record.
Past Trip 2 — Past trip information or None.
Past Trip 3 — Past trip information or None.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Past Trip 4 — Past trip information or None.
Note:
An improper ASD setup may cause some trips — reset the ASD to the Factory
Default settings before pursuing a systemic malfunction (Program
Utilities
Type Reset
Reset to Factory Settings).
Direction — Displays the Direction command (forward/reverse).
Discrete Input Terminals — Displays the status (activated = reverse video) of the discrete input terminals of the Terminal Board.
Discrete Output Terminals — Displays the status (activated = reverse video) of the discrete output lines of the Terminal Board.
Main Monitor Selections
Two (2) Monitor Mode items may be selected from the Main Monitor Selections screen to be displayed
on the Frequency Command screen while the ASD is running.
The selected items, along with their real-time values, are displayed on the Frequency Command screen while running. Not all
items are available for display on the Frequency Command screen.
The available items are underlined on pg. 43 and
.
Any two of the underlined items may be selected from the listing at Program
Utilities Main
Monitor Selections. Select an item from the Monitor 1 listing and another item from the Monitor 2 listing to be displayed as shown in
.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 45
Program
Program Mode Menu Navigation
The following table lists the menu items of the Program mode and maps the flow of the menu selections.
The Parameter Numbers for the listed functions are provided where applicable.
The functions listed may be viewed or selected and changed as mapped below or via the Direct Access method: Program
Direct Access Applicable Parameter Number.
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Primary Menu Sub Menu Parameter Name
Parameter
Number
S
TARUP
W
IZARD
See the section titled Initial Setup on pg. 70
for Startup Wizard Requirements.
F
UNDAMENTAL
Fundamental
Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration
Acceleration Time 1
T
ERMINAL
Accel/Decel 1 Settings
Frequency Settings
Motor Set 1
Standard Mode
Selection
Analog Output
Terminals
Deceleration Time 1
Acceleration/Deceleration Suspended Function
Acceleration Suspend Frequency
Acceleration Suspend Time
Deceleration Suspend Frequency
Deceleration Suspend Time
Maximum Frequency
Upper-Limit Frequency
Lower-Limit Frequency
V/f Pattern
Time Limit for Lower-Limit Frequency Operation
Automatic Torque Boost
Base Frequency 1
Manual Torque Boost 1
Motor Overload Protection Level 1
Command Mode
Frequency Mode 1
Forward/Reverse Run
Frequency Priority
Frequency Mode 2
Frequency Mode Priority Switching Frequency
FM Output Terminal Function
FM Output Terminal Adjustment
46
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Primary Menu
T
ERMINAL
Terminal
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Sub Menu
Analog Output
Terminals
Input Special
Functions
Input Terminal Delays
Parameter Name
FM Output Gradient Characteristic
FM Bias Adjustment
FM Voltage/Current Output Switching
AM Output Terminal Function
AM Output Terminal Adjustment
AM Output Gradient Characteristic
AM Bias Adjustment
MON 1 Terminal Meter Selection
MON 1 Terminal Meter Adjustment
MON 1 Output Gradient Characteristic
MON 1 Bias Adjustment
MON 1 Voltage/Current Output Switching
MON 2 Terminal Meter Selection
MON 2 Terminal Meter Adjustment
MON 2 Output Gradient Characteristic
MON 2 Bias Adjustment
MON 2 Voltage/Current Output Switching
Selection of OUT Terminal
Pulse Output Function
Pulse Output Frequency
Forward/Reverse Run Priority When Both Are Activated
Input Terminal Priority
16-Bit Binary/BCD Input
VI/II (V/I) Analog Input Broken Wire Detection Level
Input Terminal 1 (F) Response Time
Input Terminal 2 (R) Response Time
Input Terminal 3 (ST) Response Time
Input Terminal 4 (RES) Response Time
Input Terminal 5–12 Response Time
Input Terminal 13–20 Response Time
Parameter
Number
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 47
Primary Menu
T
ERMINAL
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Sub Menu Parameter Name
Input Terminals
Line Power Switching
Always ON Terminal Function
Input Terminal 1 (F) Function
Input Terminal 2 (R) Function
Input Terminal 3 (ST) Function
Input Terminal 4 (RES) Function
Input Terminal 5 (S1) Function
Input Terminal 6 (S2) Function
Input Terminal 7 (S3) Function
Input Terminal 8 (S4) Function
Input Terminal 9 (LI1) Function
Input Terminal 10 (LI2) Function
Input Terminal 11 (LI3) Function
Input Terminal 12 (LI4) Function
Input Terminal 13 (LI5) Function
Input Terminal 14 (LI6) Function
Input Terminal 15 (LI7) Function
Input Terminal 16 (LI8) Function
Input Terminal 17 (B12) Function
Input Terminal 18 (B13) Function
Input Terminal 19 (B14) Function
Input Terminal 20 (BI5) Function
Virtual Input Terminal Selection 1
Virtual Input Terminal Selection 2
Virtual Input Terminal Selection 3
Virtual Input Terminal Selection 4
Commercial Power/ASD Switching Output
Commercial Power/ASD Switching Frequency
ASD Side-Switching Delay Time
Commercial Power Side-Switching Delay Time
Commercial Power Switching Frequency Hold Time
Parameter
Number
48 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Primary Menu
T
ERMINAL
D
IRECT
A
CCESS
Direct Access
U
TILITIES
Utilities
Trace
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Sub Menu
Output Terminals
Reach Settings
Display Parameters
Prohibition
Parameter Name
Output Terminal 1 (OUT1) Function
Output Terminal 2 (OUT2) Function
Output Terminal 3 (FL) Function
Output Terminal 4 (OUT3) Function
Output Terminal 5 (OUT4) Function
Output Terminal 6 (R1) Function
Output Terminal 7 (OUT5) Function
Output Terminal 8 (OUT6) Function
Output Terminal 9 (R2) Function
Output Terminal 10 (R3) Function
Output Terminal 11 (R4) Function
Low-Speed Signal Output Frequency
Speed Reach Frequency
Speed Reach Detection Band
Parameter Number Input
Unknown Numbers Accepted
Automatic Function Selection
Voltage/Current Display Units
Free Unit Multiplication Factor
Free Unit
Free Unit Display Gradient Characteristic
Free Unit Display Bias
Change Step Selection 1
Change Step Selection 2
Write Parameter Lockout
Command Mode/Frequency Mode Lockout
Lockout All Keys
Local/Remote Key Command Override
Local/Remote Key Frequency Override
Trace Selection
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
N/A
Parameter
Number
N/A
49
Primary Menu
U
TILITIES
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Sub Menu Parameter Name
Trace
Alarm Prohibition
(prohibits an EOI alarm display ONLY — alarm still activated)
Trace Cycle
Trace Data 1
Trace Data 2
Trace Data 3
Trace Data 4
Over-Current Alarm
ASD Overload Alarm
Motor Overload Alarm
Over-Heat Alarm
Over-Voltage Alarm
Main Power Under-Voltage Alarm
Reserved (POFF) Alarm
Under-Current Alarm
Over-Torque Alarm
Braking Resistor Overload Alarm
Cumulative Run Timer Alarm
DeviceNet/Profibus/CC-Link Alarm
RS485 Communication
Main Power Under-Voltage Alarm
Stop After Instantaneous Power-off Alarm
Stop After Lower-Limit Continuous Time
Light-Load Alarm
Heavy-Load Alarm
Maintenance Timer Alarm
Over-Torque Alarm
Soft Stall Alarm
Type Reset
Reset
Real-time Clock Setup
Set Real-time Clock
Trip History (read-only)
Trip Number
Trip Type
50
Parameter
Number
N/A
N/A
N/A
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Primary Menu
U
TILITIES
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Sub Menu Parameter Name
Trip History
(read-only)
Frequency at Trip
Output Current
Output Voltage
Direction
Frequency Reference
DC Voltage
Discrete Input Terminals
Discrete Output Terminals
Run Timer
Post Compensation Frequency
Speed Feedback (Real-Time)
Speed Feedback (1 Second)
Torque Feedback
Torque Reference
Torque Current
Excitation Current
PID Feedback
Motor Overload Ratio
ASD Overload Ratio
DBR Overload Ratio
Motor Load
ASD Load
DBR Load
Input Power
Output Power
Changed From Default
Changed Parameters
Contrast
Contrast Adjustment
Version (read-only)
G9 EOI (Ver:DB)
ASD Type
CPU Code Version
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Number
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
51
Primary Menu
U
TILITIES
P
ROTECTION
Protection
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Sub Menu Parameter Name
Version (read-only)
Main Monitor
Selections
View Trace Data
Abnormal Speed
Settings
CPU Code Revision
MC Version
MC Revision
Main Board EEPROM Version
Monitor 1
Monitor 2
View Trace Data
Abnormal Speed Detection Time
Over-Speed Detection Frequency Upper Band
Over-Speed Detection Frequency Lower Band
Base Frequency
Voltage
Supply Voltage Correction
DC Injection Braking
Dynamic Braking
Emergency Off
Settings
Low-Current Settings
Overload
DC Injection Braking Start Frequency
DC Injection Braking Current
DC Injection Braking Time
Forward/Reverse DC Injection Braking Priority
Motor Shaft Stationary Control
Dynamic Braking Enable
Dynamic Braking Resistance
Continuous Dynamic Braking Capacity
Braking Resistance Overload Time (10x Rated Torque)
Emergency Off
Emergency DC Injection Braking Control Time
Low-Current Trip
Low-Current Detection Current
Low-Current Detection Time
Low-Current Detection Hysteresis Width
Motor Overload Protection Configuration
Overload Reduction Start Frequency
Parameter
Number
N/A
52 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Primary Menu
P
ROTECTION
Overload
Over-Torque
Parameters
Phase Loss
Retry/Restart
Stall
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Sub Menu
Trip Settings
Under-Voltage/
Ridethrough
Special Protection
Parameters
Parameter Name
Motor 150% Overload Time Limit
ASD Overload
Over-Torque Trip
Over-Torque Detection Level During Power Running
Over-Torque Detection Level During Regenerative
Braking
Over-Torque Detection Time
Over-Torque Detection Hysteresis
ASD Output Phase Loss Detection
ASD Input Phase Loss Detection
Auto Restart Enable
Number of Times to Retry
Ridethrough Time
Random Mode
Over-Voltage Limit Operation
Stall Prevention Factor 1
Power Running Stall Continuous Trip Detection Time
Stall Prevention During Regeneration
Stall Prevention Level
Over-Voltage Limit Operation Level
Retain Trip Record at Power Down
Regenerative Power Ridethrough Mode
Synchronized Deceleration Time
Synchronized Acceleration Time
Under-Voltage Trip
Under-Voltage (Trip Alarm) Detection Time
Regenerative Power Ridethrough Control Level
Short Circuit Detection at Start
Cooling Fan Control
Cumulative Operation Time Alarm Setting
Brake Answer Wait Time
Parameter
Number
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 53
Primary Menu
F
REQUENCY
Frequency
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Sub Menu Parameter Name
Analog Filter
Forward/Reverse
Disable
Analog Input Filter
Forward/Reverse Disable
Jog Settings
UP/DOWN Frequency
Functions
V/I Settings
Preset Speeds
Preset Speed 2
Preset Speed 3
Preset Speed 4
Preset Speed 5
Preset Speed 6
Preset Speed 7
Preset Speed 8
Preset Speed 9
Preset Speed 10
Preset Speed 11
Preset Speed 12
Preset Speed 13
Preset Speed 14
Preset Speed 15
Jog Frequency
Jog Stop Pattern
Panel Operation Jog Mode
UP/DOWN Up Response Time
UP/DOWN Up Frequency Step
UP/DOWN Down Response Time
UP/DOWN Down Frequency Step
Initial UP/DOWN Frequency
Initial UP/DOWN Frequency Rewriting
Option V/I Terminal Voltage/Current Selection (AI2
Option Board Input)
Preset Speed 1
Parameter
Number
54 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Primary Menu
F
REQUENCY
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Sub Menu
Speed Reference
Setpoints
Parameter Name
VI/II (V/I) Input Point 1 Setting
VI/II (V/I) Input Point 1 Frequency
VI/II (V/I) Input Point 2 Setting
VI/II (V/I) Input Point 2 Frequency
RR Input Point 1 Setting
RR Input Point 1 Frequency
RR Input Point 2 Setting
RR Input Point 2 Frequency
RX Input Point 1 Setting
RX Input Point 1 Frequency
RX Input Point 2 Setting
RX Input Point 2 Frequency
RX2 Option (AI1) Input Point 1 Setting
RX2 Option (AI1) Input Point 1 Frequency
RX2 Option (AI1) Input Point 2 Setting
RX2 Option (AI1) Input Point 2 Frequency
BIN Input Point 1 Setting
BIN Input Point 1 Frequency
BIN Input Point 2 Setting
BIN Input Point 2 Frequency
PG Input Point 1 Setting
PG Input Point 1 Frequency
PG Input Point 2 Setting
PG Input Point 2 Frequency
VI/II (V/I) Input Bias
VI/II (V/I) Input Gain
RR Input Bias
RR Input Gain
RX Input Bias
RX Input Gain
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Number
55
Primary Menu
F
REQUENCY
S
PECIAL
Special
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Sub Menu Parameter Name
Speed Reference
Setpoints
Acc/Dec 1 – 4 Settings
Acc/Dec Special
Carrier Frequency
Crane/Hoist Settings
RX2 Option (AI1) Input Bias
RX2 Option (AI1) Input Gain
V/I Input Bias (AI2 Option Board Input)
V/I Input Gain (AI2 Option Board Input)
Acceleration Time 2
Deceleration Time 2
Acc/Dec Pattern 1
Acc/Dec Pattern 2
Acceleration Time 3
Deceleration Time 3
Acc/Dec Pattern 3
Acceleration Time 4
Deceleration Time 4
Acc/Dec Pattern 4
Acc/Dec Pattern 1 – 4
Acc/Dec Switching Frequency 1
S-Pattern Acceleration Lower-Limit Adjustment
S-Pattern Acceleration Upper-Limit Adjustment
S-Pattern Deceleration Lower-Limit Adjustment
S-Pattern Deceleration Upper-Limit Adjustment
Acc/Dec Switching Frequency 2
Acc/Dec Switching Frequency 3
PWM Carrier Frequency
Carrier Frequency Control Mode
Light-Load/High-Speed Operation
Light-Load/High-Speed Learning Function
Light-Load/High-Speed Operation Frequency
Light-Load/High-Speed Operation Switching Lower-
Limit Frequency
Light-Load/High-Speed Operation Load Wait Time
Light-Load/High-Speed Operation Detection Time
Parameter
Number
56 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Primary Menu
S
PECIAL
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Sub Menu Parameter Name
Crane/Hoist Settings
V/f Five Point Setting
Frequency Control
Special Parameters
Jump Frequencies
Light-Load/High-Speed Heavy Load Detection Time
Switching Load Torque During Power Running
Heavy Load Torque During Power Running
Heavy Load Torque During Constant Power Running
Switching Load Torque During Regeneration Braking
V/f 5-Point Setting Frequency 1
V/f 5-Point Setting Voltage 1
V/f 5-Point Setting Frequency 2
V/f 5-Point Setting Voltage 2
V/f 5-Point Setting Frequency 3
V/f 5-Point Setting Voltage 3
V/f 5-Point Setting Frequency 4
V/f 5-Point Setting Voltage 4
V/f 5-Point Setting Frequency 5
V/f 5-Point Setting Voltage 5
Start Frequency
Run Frequency
Run Frequency Hysteresis
End Frequency
0 Hz Dead Band Signal
0 Hz Command Output
Exciting Strengthening Coefficient
Annual Average Ambient Temperature
Rush Current Suppression Relay Activation Time
PTC 1 Thermal Selection
PTC 2 Thermal Selection
Jump Frequency 1
Jump Frequency 1 Bandwidth
Jump Frequency 2
Jump Frequency 2 Bandwidth
Parameter
Number
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 57
Primary Menu
S
PECIAL
M
OTOR
Motor
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Sub Menu
Jump Frequencies
Operation Panel
Parameters
Traverse
Motor Set 2
Motor Set 3
Motor Set 4
PM Motor
Parameter Name
Jump Frequency 3
Jump Frequency 3 Bandwidth
Operation Command Clear Selection With Standby
Terminal Off
Panel Stop Pattern
Panel Torque Command
Panel Tension Torque Bias
Panel Load Sharing Gain
Panel Override Multiplication Gain
Panel Frequency Lockout
Panel Emergency Off Lockout
Panel Reset Lockout
Traverse Selection
Traverse Acceleration Time
Traverse Deceleration Time
Traverse Step
Traverse Jump Step
Motor Set 2 Base Frequency
Motor Set 2 Base Frequency Voltage
Motor Set 2 Manual Torque Boost
Motor Set 2 Overload Protection Level
Motor Set 3 Base Frequency
Motor Set 3 Base Frequency Voltage
Motor Set 3 Manual Torque Boost
Motor Set 3 Overload Protection Level
Motor Set 4 Base Frequency
Motor Set 4 Base Frequency Voltage
Motor Set 4 Manual Torque Boost
Motor Set 4 Overload Protection Level
PM Motor Constant 1 (D-Axis Inductance)
PM Motor Constant 2 (Q-Axis Inductance)
58
Parameter
Number
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Primary Menu
M
OTOR
T
ORQUE
Torque
Sub Menu Parameter Name
PM Motor
Vector Motor Model
Manual Torque Limit
Settings
Setpoints
Torque Control
Step-Out Detection-Current Level (For PM Motors)
Step-Out Detection-Current Time (For PM Motors)
Autotune 1
Slip Frequency Gain
Autotune 2
Motor Rated Capacity (Nameplate)
Motor Rated Current (Nameplate)
Motor Rated RPM (Nameplate)
Base Frequency Voltage 1
Motor Constant 1 (Torque Boost)
Motor Constant 2 (No Load Current)
Motor Constant 3 (Leak Inductance)
Motor Constant 4 (Rated Slip)
Power Running Torque Limit 2 Level
Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 2 Level
Power Running Torque Limit 3 Level
Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 3 Level
Power Running Torque Limit 4 Level
Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 4 Level
VI/II (V/I) Input Point 1 Rate
VI/II (V/I) Input Point 2 Rate
RR Input Point 1 Rate
RR Input Point 2 Rate
RX Input Point 1 Rate
RX Input Point 2 Rate
RX2 Option (AI1) Input Point 1 Rate
RX2 Option (AI1) Input Point 2 Rate
Braking Mode
Torque Bias Input
Panel Torque Bias
Panel Torque Gain
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Number
59
Primary Menu
T
ORQUE
F
EEDBACK
Feedback
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Sub Menu
Torque Control
Torque Limit Settings
Torque Speed
Limiting
Drooping Control
Feedback Settings
Parameter Name
Release Time
Creeping Frequency
Creeping Time
Braking Time Learning Function
Torque Command
Tension Torque Bias Input (Torque Control)
Load Sharing Gain Input
Forward Speed Limit Input
Forward Speed Limit Input Level
Reverse Speed Limit Input
Reverse Speed Limit Input Level
Power Running Torque Limit 1
Power Running Torque Limit 1 Level
Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 1
Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 1 Level
Acceleration/Deceleration Operation After Torque Limit
Speed Limit (Torque = 0) Center Value Reference
Speed Limit (Torque = 0) Center Value
Speed Limit (Torque = 0) Band
Allow Specified Direction ONLY
Drooping Gain
Speed at 0% Drooping Gain
Speed at
Drooping Gain
Drooping Insensitive Torque
Drooping Output Filter
PID Control Switching
PID Feedback Signal
PID Feedback Delay Filter
PID Feedback Proportional Gain
PID Feedback Integral Gain
Parameter
Number
60 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Primary Menu
F
EEDBACK
M
Y
F
UNCTION
Sub Menu Parameter Name
Feedback Settings
Override Control
PG Settings
PID Deviation Upper-Limit
PID Deviation Lower-Limit
PID Feedback Differential Gain
Process Upper-Limit
Process Lower-Limit
PID Control Wait Time
PID Output Upper-Limit
PID Output Lower-Limit
Process Increasing Rate
Process Decreasing Rate
Speed PI Switching Frequency
Adding Input Selection
Multiplying Input Selection
Number of PG Input Pulses
Number of PG Input Phases
PG Disconnection Detection
Simple Positioning Completion Range
Current Control Proportional Gain
Speed Loop Proportional Gain
Speed Loop Stabilization Coefficient
Load Moment of Inertia 1
Second Speed Loop Proportional Gain
Second Speed Loop Stabilization Coefficient
Load Moment of Inertia 2
My Function Selection
My Function Operating Mode
Input Function Target 1
Input Function Command 1
My Function Unit 1
Input Function Target 2
Input Function Command 2
Input Function Target 3
Output Function Assigned
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Number
61
Primary Menu
M
Y
F
UNCTION
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Sub Menu
My Function Unit 2
My Function Unit 3
My Function Unit 4
My Function Unit 5
My Function Unit 6
Parameter Name
Input Function Target 1
Input Function Command 1
Input Function Target 2
Input Function Command 2
Input Function Target 3
Output Function Assigned
Input Function Target 1
Input Function Command 1
Input Function Target 2
Input Function Command 2
Input Function Target 3
Output Function Assigned
Input Function Target 1
Input Function Command 1
Input Function Target 2
Input Function Command 2
Input Function Target 3
Output Function Assigned
Input Function Target 1
Input Function Command 1
Input Function Target 2
Input Function Command 2
Input Function Target 3
Output Function Assigned
Input Function Target 1
Input Function Command 1
Input Function Target 2
Input Function Command 2
Input Function Target 3
Output Function Assigned
62
Parameter
Number
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Primary Menu
M
Y
F
UNCTION
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Sub Menu
My Function Unit 7
My Function Data
My Function Analog
My Function Monitor
Parameter Name
Input Function Target 1
Input Function Command 1
Input Function Target 2
Input Function Command 2
Input Function Target 3
Output Function Assigned
My Function Percent Data 1
My Function Percent Data 2
My Function Percent Data 3
My Function Percent Data 4
My Function Percent Data 5
My Function Frequency Data 1
My Function Frequency Data 2
My Function Frequency Data 3
My Function Frequency Data 4
My Function Frequency Data 5
My Function Time Data 1
My Function Time Data 2
My Function Time Data 3
My Function Time Data 4
My Function Time Data 5
My Function Count Data 1
My Function Count Data 2
Analog Input Function Target 11
Analog Function Assigned Object 11
Analog Input Function Target 21
Analog Function Assigned Object 21
Monitor Output Function 11
Monitor Output Function Command 11
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Number
63
Primary Menu
M
Y
F
UNCTION
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Sub Menu
My Function Monitor
C
OMMUNICATIONS
C
ommunications
Communication
Adjustments
Communication
Settings
Parameter Name
Monitor Output Function 21
Monitor Output Function Command 21
Monitor Output Function 31
Monitor Output Function Command 31
Monitor Output Function 41
Monitor Output Function Command 41
Frequency Point Selection
Point 1 Setting
Point 1 Frequency
Point 2 Setting
Point 2 Frequency
RS485 2-Wire Baud Rate
RS485 2-Wire and 4-Wire Parity
ASD Number
RS485 2-Wire and 4-Wire Communications Time-Out
RS485 2-Wire and 4-Wire Communication Time-Out
Action
RS485 2-Wire Send Wait Time
RS485 2-Wire ASD-to-ASD Communication
RS485 2-Wire Protocol
RS485 4-Wire Baud Rate
RS485 Send Wait Time
RS485 4-Wire ASD-to-ASD Communication
RS485 4-Wire Protocol (TSB/MODBUS)
Communication Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 1
Communication Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 2
Communication Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 3
Communication Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 4
Communication Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 5
Communication Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 6
Communication Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 7
Parameter
Number
64 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Primary Menu
C
OMMUNICATIONS
P
ATTERN
R
UN
Pattern Run
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Sub Menu
Communication
Settings
Ethernet Settings
Operation Mode
Parameter Name
Communication Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 8
Communication Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 9
Communication Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 10
Communication Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 11
Communication Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 12
Communication Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 13
Disconnection Detection Extended Time
ASD Operation at Disconnection
Preset Speed Operation
Communication Option Station Address Monitor
Communication Option Speed Switch Monitor
DeviceNet/CC-Link
Block Write Data 1
Block Write Data 2
Block Read Data 1
Block Read Data 2
Block Read Data 3
Block Read Data 4
Block Read Data 5
Free Notes
Network Option Reset Setting
IP
Sub Net
Gateway
DHCP Mode
MAC ID
Preset Speed Operation Mode
Preset Speed 1
Direction
Acc/Dec Group
Parameter
Number
N/A
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 65
Primary Menu
P
ATTERN
R
UN
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Sub Menu
Operation Mode
Parameter Name
V/f Group
Torque Limit Group
Preset Speed 2
Direction
Acc/Dec Group
V/f Group
Torque Limit Group
Preset Speed 3
Direction
Acc/Dec Group
V/f Group
Torque Limit Group
Preset Speed 4
Direction
Acc/Dec Group
V/f Group
Torque Limit Group
Preset Speed 5
Direction
Acc/Dec Group
V/f Group
Torque Limit Group
Preset Speed 6
Direction
Acc/Dec Group
V/f Group
Torque Limit Group
Preset Speed 7
Direction
Acc/Dec Group
66
Parameter
Number
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Primary Menu
P
ATTERN
R
UN
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Sub Menu
Operation Mode
Parameter Name
V/f Group
Torque Limit Group
Preset Speed 8
Direction
Acc/Dec Group
V/f Group
Torque Limit Group
Preset Speed 9
Direction
Acc/Dec Group
V/f Group
Torque Limit Group
Preset Speed 10
Direction
Acc/Dec Group
V/f Group
Torque Limit Group
Preset Speed 11
Direction
Acc/Dec Group
V/f Group
Torque Limit Group
Preset Speed 12
Direction
Acc/Dec Group
V/f Group
Torque Limit Group
Preset Speed 13
Direction
Acc/Dec Group
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Number
67
Primary Menu
P
ATTERN
R
UN
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Sub Menu
Operation Mode
Operation Time
Pattern Run
Parameter Name
V/f Group
Torque Limit Group
Preset Speed 14
Direction
Acc/Dec Group
V/f Group
Torque Limit Group
Preset Speed 15
Direction
Acc/Dec Group
V/f Group
Torque Limit Group
Speed 1 Operation Time
Speed 2 Operation Time
Speed 3 Operation Time
Speed 4 Operation Time
Speed 5 Operation Time
Speed 6 Operation Time
Speed 7 Operation Time
Speed 8 Operation Time
Speed 9 Operation Time
Speed 10 Operation Time
Speed 11 Operation Time
Speed 12 Operation Time
Speed 13 Operation Time
Speed 14 Operation Time
Speed 15 Operation Time
Pattern Operation
Pattern Operation Mode
Pattern 1 Repeat
68
Parameter
Number
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Primary Menu
P
ATTERN
R
UN
Speeds
Program Mode Menu Navigation
Sub Menu
Pattern Run
Parameter Name
Pattern 2 Repeat
Pattern Group 1 Selection 1
Pattern Group 1 Selection 2
Pattern Group 1 Selection 3
Pattern Group 1 Selection 4
Pattern Group 1 Selection 5
Pattern Group 1 Selection 6
Pattern Group 1 Selection 7
Pattern Group 1 Selection 8
Pattern Group 2 Selection 1
Pattern Group 2 Selection 2
Pattern Group 2 Selection 3
Pattern Group 2 Selection 4
Pattern Group 2 Selection 5
Pattern Group 2 Selection 6
Pattern Group 2 Selection 7
Pattern Group 2 Selection 8
P
ASSWORD
A
ND
L
OCKOUT
Password
Lockout
Enter Password
Change Password
Lockouts
Enter New Password
Reset From Trip
Local/Remote
Run/Stop from EOI
Frequency Change From EOI
Monitor Screen
Parameter Access
Parameter Write
Parameter
Number
N/A
N/A
N/A
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 69
System Operation
Initial Setup
Upon initial system power up, the Startup Wizard starts automatically. The Startup Wizard assists the user with the initial configuration of the input power settings and the output parameters of the ASD.
The Startup Wizard may also be selected and run from the Program menu after the initial startup, if
required.
The Startup Wizard querys the user to select one of the following items:
Run Now?
Continue on to item
below.
Run Next Time?
Go to
Mode.
Manually Configure?
Go to Finish screen and click Finish.
70
Startup Wizard Parameters
Startup parameter settings may be viewed or changed. Change the parameter setting and click Next. Or click Next without making any changes to go to the next startup parameter.
See the section titled
Startup Wizard Parameter Requirements on pg. 71 for further information on the
Startup Wizard parameters.
Click Finish to close the Startup Wizard when done.
2. The
.
3. The
4. The
Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration Setting.
5. The
.
6. The
.
7. The
.
8. The
.
9. The
.
10. The
.
11. The
12. The
13.
.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Startup Wizard Parameter Requirements
The Startup Wizard queries the user for information on the I/O signal parameters, control, and the EOI display settings of the ASD. The ASD may also be setup by directly accessing each of the startup settings via the
menu or the associated Direct Access Numbers (see the section titled Direct Access
Parameter Information on pg. 76 ).
Upon initial system power up, the Startup Wizard starts automatically. It may also be run from the
menu after startup, if required. The user is queried to either (1) Run Now, (2) Run Next Time, or
(3) Manually Configure the ASD.
Select Run Now to start the Startup Wizard. The wizard will assist the user with the configuration of the
ASD using the user-input screens below.
Select Run Next Time to return to the
menu. The system will default to the Startup Wizard on the next power up.
Select Manually Configure to go to the Finish box. Click Finish to return the system to the Frequency
Command screen.
Voltage and Frequency Rating of the Motor
Motors are designed and manufactured to be operated within a specific voltage and frequency range. The voltage and frequency specifications for a given motor may be found on the nameplate of the motor.
Highlight and click the voltage and frequency of the motor being used.
Upper-Limit Frequency
This parameter sets the highest frequency that the ASD will accept as a frequency command or frequency setpoint. The ASD may output frequencies higher than the Upper-Limit Frequency (but, lower than the
Maximum Frequency) when operating in the PID Control mode, Torque Control mode, or the Vector
Control modes (sensorless or feedback).
Lower-Limit Frequency
This parameter sets the lowest frequency that the ASD will accept as a frequency command or frequency setpoint. The ASD will output frequencies lower than the Lower-Limit Frequency when accelerating to the lower-limit or decelerating to a stop. Frequencies below the Lower-Limit may be output when operating in the PID Control mode, Torque Control mode, or the Vector Control modes (sensorless or feedback).
Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration
When Automatic ACC/DEC is chosen, the ASD adjusts the acceleration and deceleration rates according
to the applied load. The minimum accel/decel time may be set using F508
. The motor and the load must be connected prior to selecting Automatic Accel/Decel.
Select Manual to allow the settings of F009 and F010 to control the accel/decel, respectively. The
acceleration and deceleration times range from 12.5% to 800% of the programmed values for the active acceleration time.
Select Automatic ACC Only to allow for the acceleration rate to be controlled automatically only.
Acceleration Time
This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the output of the ASD to go from 0.0 Hz to the Maximum
Frequency for the 1 Acceleration profile. The Accel/Decel Pattern may be set using
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 71
72
Deceleration Time
This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the output of the ASD to go from the Maximum
Frequency to 0.0 Hz for the 1 Deceleration profile. The Accel/Decel Pattern may be set using
Volts per Hertz Setting
This function establishes the relationship between the output frequency and the output voltage of the
ASD.
Settings:
Constant Torque
Voltage Decrease Curve
Automatic Torque Boost
Sensorless Vector Control (Speed)
Sensorless Vector Control (Speed/Torque Switching)
V/f 5-Point Curve (Go to
F190 to Configure the V/f 5-Point Settings)
PM Drive (Permanent Magnet)
PG Feedback Vector Control (Speed)
PG Feedback Vector Control (Speed/Torque Switching)
Motor Current Rating
This parameter allows the user to input the full load amperage (FLA) of the motor. This value is found on the nameplate of the motor and is used by the ASD to determine the Thermal Overload Protection setting for the motor.
Motor RPM
This parameter is used to input the (nameplated) rated speed of the motor.
Command Source
This selection allows the user to establish the source of the Run commands. Run commands are Run,
Stop, Jog, etc.
Settings:
Use Terminal Block
Use EOI Keypad
Use RS485
Use Communication Option Board
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Frequency Reference Source
This selection allows the user to establish the source of the Frequency command.
Settings:
Use VI/II (V/I)
Use RR
Use RX
EOI Keypad
RS485
Communication Option Board
RX2 Option (AI1)
Option V/I
UP/DOWN Frequency
Pulse Input (Option)
Pulse Input (Motor CPU)
Binary/BCD Input (Option)
Display Unit
This parameter sets the unit of measurement for current and voltage values displayed on the EOI.
Wizard: Finish
This is the final screen of the Startup Wizard. The basic parameters of the ASD have been set. Click
Finish to return to the
mode. Additional application-specific programming may be required.
Operation (Local)
Note:
See the section titled
for information on Remote operation.
To turn the motor on perform the following:
1. Connect the CC terminal to the ST terminal.
2. Press the Mode key until the Frequency
Command screen is displayed.
3. Press the Local/Remote key to enter the Local mode (green Local LED illuminates).
4. Turn the Rotary Encoder clockwise until the desired Frequency Command value is displayed in the SET field of the LCD Screen.
Frequency Command Screen
5. Press the Run key and the motor runs at the Frequency Command value.
Note:
The speed of the motor may be changed while the motor is running by using the
Rotary Encoder to change the Frequency Command value.
6. Press the Stop-Reset key to stop the motor.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 73
74
Default Setting Changes
To change a default parameter setting go to the root level of the
Program menu. Turn the Rotary Encoder
until the desired parameter group is within the cursor block. Press the Rotary Encoder to select an item or to access a subgroup (repeat if required until reaching the parameter to be changed).
Press the Rotary Encoder to enter the Edit mode and the value/setting takes on the reverse video format
(dark background/light text). Turn the Rotary Encoder to change the parameter value/setting.
Press the Rotary Encoder while the parameter setting is in the reverse video mode to accept the new setting or press the ESC key while the new parameter setting is in the reverse video mode to exit the menu without saving the change.
For a complete listing of the
mode menu selections, see the section titled
.
menu items are listed and mapped for convenience. The Direct Access
Numbers are listed where applicable.
The default settings may also be changed by entering the Parameter Number of the setting to be changed at the Direct Access menu (Program
Direct Access Applicable Parameter Number). A listing of the
Direct Access Numbers and a description of the associated parameter may be found in the section titled
Direct Access Parameter Information on pg. 76
.
A listing of all parameters that have been changed from the default setting may be viewed sequentially by accessing the Changed From Default screen (Program
Utilities Changed From Default).
Note:
Parameter F201 was changed to create the example shown in Figure 28.
The Changed From Default feature allows the user to quickly access the parameters that are different from the factory default settings or the post-Reset settings. Once the Changed From Default screen is displayed, the system scrolls through all of the system parameters automatically and halts once reaching a changed parameter.
Once stopped at a changed parameter, the Rotary Encoder may be clicked once clockwise to continue scrolling forward or clicked once counterclockwise to begin scrolling in reverse. With each click of the
Rotary Encoder from a stop, the system scrolls through the parameters and stops at the next parameter that has been changed.
Press the Rotary Encoder while stopped at a changed parameter to display the settings of the changed parameter. Press the Rotary Encoder to enter the Edit mode — the parameter value/setting takes on the reverse video format (dark background/light text).Turn the Rotary Encoder to change the parameter setting.
Press the ESC key while the setting is in the reverse video format to exit the Edit mode without saving the change and to resume the Changed From Default search. Or press the Rotary Encoder while the setting is in the reverse video format to save the change. Press ESC to return to the Changed From Default search.
Pressing ESC while the system is performing a Changed From Default search terminates the search.
Pressing ESC when finished searching (or halted at a changed parameter) takes the menu back one level.
Note:
Communications setting changes will require that the ASD power be removed and then re-applied for the changes to take affect.
Figure 28. Changed From Default Screen.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Save User Settings
A profile of an existing setup may be saved and re-applied when required by using the Save User Setup feature. This function is carried out via Program
Utilities Type Reset Save User Settings
With the initial setup saved, troubleshooting and diagnostics may be performed and the starting setup may be re-applied when finished via Program
Utilities Type Reset Restore User Settings.
Note:
EOI settings are not stored using the Save User Settings or using the Restore User
Settings features (i.e., contrast setting, voltage/current units, display gradient characteristics, etc.).
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 75
Direct Access Parameter Information
The ASD has the ability to allow the user direct access to the motor-control functions. There are two ways in which the motor-control parameters may be accessed for modification: Program
Applicable Menu
Path or Program
Direct Access Applicable Parameter Number.Both methods access the parameter via the Program mode. Once accessed, the parameter may be viewed or changed.
The Program mode allows the user to develop an application-specific motor-control profile. Motorcontrol functions may be set to accommodate specific power and timing requirements for a given application. The configurable parameters of the Program mode that have user-accessible Parameter
Numbers are listed and described below.
Note: Parameter selections are preceded by the number used to select an item if using communications to write to a parameter location in memory (i.e., F000
0-Manual, 1- No
Trip on Acc/Dec, 2-No trip on Acc Only, etc.).
Note: The setup procedures included within this section may require a Reset before performing the procedure. Application-specific settings may then be performed. The pre-Reset conditions
).
Note: Communications setting changes will require that the power be removed and then re-applied for the changes to take affect.
Direct Access Parameters/Numbers
Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration
Program
Fundamental Accel/Decel 1 Settings
This parameter is used to enable automatic acceleration and deceleration rates in accordance with the applied load.
The adjusted acceleration and deceleration times range from 12.5% to 800% of the programmed values for Acceleration Time 1 (
) and Deceleration
Time 1 (
).
Settings:
0 — Manual
1 — Automatic ACC/DEC
2 — Automatic ACC Only
Note:
The motor and the load must be connected prior to selecting
Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration.
Automatic Torque Boost
Program
Fundamental Motor Set 1
This parameter allows the ASD to adjust the output torque in accordance with the applied load automatically. When enabled Autotuning is performed — the motor should be connected before performing an Autotune.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Automatic Torque Boost + Autotuning
2 — Sensorless Vector Control + Autotuning
Direct Access Number — F000
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Manual
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F001
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
76 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Frequency
Mode 1
Command Mode
Program
Fundamental Standard Mode Selection
The Command Mode Selection establishes the source of the command input for the ASD. Command inputs include Run, Stop, Forward, etc. The
Override feature may supersede the Command Mode Selection setting (see
Command Mode and Frequency Mode Control on pg. 36
).
Settings:
0 — Terminal Block
1 — Not Used
2 — EOI Keypad
3 — RS485
4 — Communication Option Board
Frequency Mode 1
Program
Fundamental Standard Mode Selection
The Frequency Mode 1 setting establishes the source of the frequency-control input for the ASD. The Frequency Mode 2 setting or the Override feature may supersede the Frequency Mode 1 setting.
Note:
Only Bolded items from the Settings list below may be placed in the Override mode. See the section titled
Frequency Mode Control on pg. 36
for more information on the
Override feature.
Settings:
1 — VI/II (V/I)
2 — RR
3 — RX
5 — EOI Keypad
6 — RS485
7 — Communication Option Board
8 — RX2 Option (AI1)
9 — Option V/I
10 — UP/DOWN Frequency
11 — Pulse Input (Option)
12 — Pulse Input (Motor CPU)
13 — Binary/BCD Input (Option)
Direct Access Number — F003
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Terminal Block
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F004
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — RR
Changeable During Run — No
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 77
FM
FM Output Terminal Function
Program
Terminal Analog Output Terminals
This parameter is used to set the output function of the FM analog output terminal. The FM output terminal produces an output current or voltage that is proportional to the magnitude of the function assigned to this terminal (select
current or voltage at F681 ). The available assignments for this output terminal
are listed in Table 6 on pg. 237 .
Note:
To read voltage at this terminal connect a 100 – 500
resistor
from the FM (+) terminal to the CC (-) terminal. Using a voltmeter read the voltage across the 100 – 500
resistor.
To read current at this terminal connect a 100 – 500
resistor from the FM (+) terminal through a series Ammeter to the
CC (-) terminal.
The FM analog output has a maximum resolution of 1/1024 and a maximum load rating of 500 ohms.
FM Terminal Setup Parameters
— Set FM Function
— Calibrate FM Terminal
— Voltage/Current Output Switching Selection
— Output Response Polarity Selection
— Set Zero Level
FM Output Terminal Adjustment
Program
Terminal Analog Output Terminals
This parameter is used to calibrate the FM analog output.
To calibrate the FM analog output, connect a meter (current or voltage) as
With the drive running at a known value (e.g., output frequency), adjust this parameter until the assigned function produces the desired DC level output at the FM output terminal.
See
F005 for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F005
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Output Frequency
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F006
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 493
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 1280
78 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Type Reset
Reset
Program
Utilities
This feature assists the user when performing fault analysis or by allowing a quick system setup change when required. Performing a Type Reset results in one of the following user-selected post-reset configurations.
Settings:
0 — None
1 — 50 Hz Setting
2 — 60 Hz Setting
3 — Reset to Factory Settings
4 — Clear Past Trips
5 — Clear Run Timer
6 — Initialize Typeform
7 — *Save User Settings
8 — Restore User Settings
9 — Clear Cumulative Fan Timer
10 — Accel/Decel Time Setting 0.01 – 600.0 Seconds
11 — Accel/Decel Time Setting 0.1 – 6000.0 Seconds
12 — Update EOI Firmware
13 — Set EOI Memory to Default
14 — Save User Settings to EOI
15 — Restore User Settings from EOI
Note: User settings stored in the memory of the EOI are not saved via the Save User Settings selection.
Forward/Reverse Run Selection
Program
Fundamental Standard Mode Selection
While operating in the Local mode, this parameter sets the direction of motor rotation.
From the Frequency Command screen press the ESC key. At the subsequent
EOI Command screen select the Direction field and change the setting. Press the Rotary Encoder and the new setting will be in effect.
This setting will not override parameter F311
(Forward/Reverse Disable).
If either direction is disabled via parameter F311
, the disabled direction will not be recognized if commanded by the keypad. If both directions are disabled via
, the direction command from the keypad will determine the direction of the motor rotation.
Settings:
0 — Forward
1 — Reverse
2 — Forward (EOI-Switchable F/R)
3 — Reverse (EOI-Switchable F/R)
Direct Access Number — F007
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — None
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F008
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward
Changeable During Run — Yes
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 79
Acceleration Time 1
Program
Fundamental Accel/Decel 1 Settings
This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the output of the ASD to go from 0.0 Hz to the Maximum Frequency for the 1 Acceleration profile. The
Accel/Decel pattern may be set using F502
. The minimum Accel/Decel time may be set using
.
Note:
An acceleration time shorter than that which the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads.
Automatic Accel/Decel, Stall, and Ridethrough settings may lengthen the acceleration times.
Acceleration
The acceleration rate of a motor is determined by several factors: applied power, applied load, and the physical properties of the motor (winding parameters, motor size, etc.). The ASD will control the first of these factors: input power. The settings of the ASD will control the frequency and amplitude of the applied voltage to the motor.
Under most operating conditions, as the output frequency of the drive goes up so does the output voltage (linear acceleration). The ASD has the ability to modify the relationship between frequency and voltage automatically to
produce smoother operation or increased (starting) torque (See F502
).
Deceleration Time 1
Program
Fundamental Accel/Decel 1 Settings
This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the output of the ASD to go from the Maximum Frequency to 0.0 Hz for the 1 Deceleration profile. The
Accel/Decel pattern may be set using F502
.
When operating with the Automatic Accel/Decel enabled (
accel/decel time may be set using F508 .
Note:
A deceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads. Automatic
Accel/Decel, Stall, and Ridethrough settings may lengthen the deceleration times.
Maximum Frequency
Program
Fundamental Frequency Settings
This setting determines the absolute maximum frequency that the ASD can output.
Accel/Decel times are calculated based on the Maximum Frequency setting.
The Maximum Frequency is not limited by this setting while operating in the
Drooping Control mode (see F320
for more information on this setting).
Note:
This setting may not be lower than the Upper-Limit Frequency
(
).
Direct Access Number — F009
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-Dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000
Units — Seconds
Direct Access Number — F010
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-Dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000
Units — Seconds
Direct Access Number — F011
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 80.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 30.0
Maximum — 299.0
Units — Hz
80 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Upper-Limit Frequency
Program
Fundamental Frequency Settings
This parameter sets the highest frequency that the ASD will accept as a frequency command or frequency setpoint. The ASD may output frequencies higher than the Upper-Limit Frequency (but, lower than the Maximum
Frequency) when operating in the PID Control mode, Torque Control mode, or the Vector Control modes (sensorless or feedback).
Note:
This setting may not be higher than the Maximum Frequency
(
)
setting.
Lower-Limit Frequency
Program
Fundamental Frequency Settings
This parameter sets the lowest frequency that the ASD will accept as a frequency command or frequency setpoint. The ASD will output frequencies lower than the Lower-Limit Frequency when accelerating to the Lower-Limit or decelerating to a stop. Frequencies below the Lower-Limit may also be output when operating in the PID Control mode, Torque Control mode, or the
Vector Control modes (sensorless or feedback).
Base Frequency 1
Program
Fundamental Motor Set 1
The Base Frequency 1 setting is the frequency at which the output voltage of the ASD reaches its maximum setting. The Base Frequency Voltage 1
For proper motor operation, the Base Frequency should be set for the nameplated frequency of the motor.
V/f Pattern
Program
Fundamental Frequency Settings
This function establishes the relationship between the output frequency and the output voltage.
Bolded selections use the motor tuning parameters of the drive to properly configure the ASD for the motor being used. If Load Reactors or Long Lead
Filters are used, or if the capacity of the ASD is greater than the motor, manual tuning of the motor parameters may be required for optimum performance.
Settings:
0 — Constant Torque
1 — Voltage Decrease Curve
2 — Automatic Torque Boost
3 — Sensorless Vector Control (Speed)
4 — Sensorless Vector Control (Speed/Torque Switching)
5 — V/f 5-Point Curve (Go to F190 to Configure the V/f 5-Point settings)
6 — PM Drive (Permanent Magnet)
7 — PG Feedback Vector Control (Speed)
8 — PG Feedback Vector Control (Speed/Torque Switching)
Note:
When operating in the Vector Control mode the carrier frequency should be set to 2.2 kHz or above.
Direct Access Number — F012
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-Dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F013
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Upper Limit (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F014
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — Upper Limit (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F015
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Constant Torque
Changeable During Run — No
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 81
Manual Torque Boost 1
Program
Fundamental Motor Set 1
The Manual Torque Boost 1 function is used to increase the low frequency torque for high-inertia loads by increasing the output voltage at frequencies below ½ of the Base Frequency 1 (
) setting.
The value programmed as a boost percentage establishes an output voltage vs. output frequency relationship to be used to start the motor or to provide smoother operation.
Direct Access Number — F016
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-Dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 30.0
Units — %
Note:
Setting an excessive Torque Boost level may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads.
Motor Overload Protection Configuration
Program
Protection Overload
This parameter is used to protect the motor from an over-current condition. The type of motor being used and the Overload/Stall setting is selected here to better match the application.
This parameter setting may extend the Over-Voltage Stall time settings.
This parameter may be affected by the setting of the Power Running Stall
Continuous Trip Detection Time ( F452 ).
Settings:
0 — Overload Trip without Stall
1 — Overload Trip with Stall
2 — No Overload without Stall
3 — Stall Only
4 — V/f Motor-Overload without Stall
5 — V/f Motor-Overload with Stall
6 — V/f Motor-No Overload without Stall
7 — V/f Motor-Stall Only
Direct Access Number — F017
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — O/L Trip No Stall
Changeable During Run — Yes
82 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Preset Speed 1
Preset Speed 2
Preset Speed 1
Program
Frequency Preset Speeds
Up to fifteen (15) output frequency values that fall within the Lower-Limit and the Upper-Limit range may be programmed into the drive and output as a
Preset Speed. This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number
0001 and is identified as Preset Speed 1. The binary number is applied to S1 –
S4 of the Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed.
Direct Access Number — F018
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
)
Maximum — Upper Limit (
Units — Hz
Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Preset Speed control input at the S1 – S4 terminals:
1.
Program
Fundamental Standard Mode Selection Command Mode
Selection
Terminal Block.
2.
Program
Terminal Input Terminals S1 (set to Preset Speed 1;
LSB of 4-bit count). Repeat for S2 – S4 (MSB of 4-bit count) as Preset
Speed 2 – 4, respectively (all Normally Open).
3.
Program
Frequency Preset Speeds Preset Speed1 (set an output frequency as Preset Speed 1; repeat for Preset Speeds 2 – 15 as required).
4.
5.
6.
Program
Mode
Pattern Run Operation Mode Preset Speed Operation
Enabled/Disabled.
Select Enable to use the direction, accel/decel, and torque settings of the
Preset Speed being run. The torque settings used will be as defined in F170
–
and as selected via the associated discrete input terminals V/f
Switching 1 and 2 in
.
Select Disabled to use the speed setting only of the Preset Speed being run.
Place the system in the Remote mode (Local/Remote LED Off).
Provide a Run command (connect F and/or R to CC).
Connect S1 to CC to run Preset Speed 1 (S1 to CC = 0001 binary).
With S1 – S4 configured to output Preset Speeds ( F115
–
), 0001 – 1111 may be applied to S1 – S4 of the Terminal Board to run the associated Preset
Speed. If bidirectional operation is required, F and R must be connected to CC, and Preset Speed Operation Mode must be set to Enabled at
With S1 being the least significant bit of a binary count, the S1 – S4 settings will produce the programmed speed settings as indicated in the Preset Speed
Truth Table to the right.
Preset Speeds are also used in the Pattern Run mode.
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
Preset Speed Truth Table
11
12
13
14
15
9
10
7
8
Preset
S4
MSB
1
2
0
0
5
6
3
4
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
S3 S2 Output
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
S1
LSB
1
0
Note: 1 = Terminal connected to CC.
Preset Speed 2
Program
Frequency Preset Speeds
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0010 and is identified as Preset Speed 2. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for more information on
this parameter).
Direct Access Number — F019
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
)
Maximum — Upper Limit (
Units — Hz
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 83
Preset Speed 3
Preset Speed 4
Preset Speed 3
Program
Frequency Preset Speeds
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0011 and is identified as Preset Speed 3. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for more information on
this parameter).
Preset Speed 4
Program
Frequency Preset Speeds
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0100 and is identified as Preset Speed 4. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for more information on
this parameter).
Preset Speed 5
Program
Frequency Preset Speeds
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0101 and is identified as Preset Speed 5. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for more information on
this parameter).
Preset Speed 6
Program
Frequency Preset Speeds
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0110 and is identified as Preset Speed 6. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for more information on
this parameter).
Preset Speed 7
Program
Frequency Preset Speeds
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 0111 and is identified as Preset Speed 7. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for more information on
this parameter).
Direct Access Number — F020
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
)
Maximum — Upper Limit (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F021
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
)
Maximum — Upper Limit (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F022
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
)
Maximum — Upper Limit (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F023
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
)
Maximum — Upper Limit (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F024
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
)
Maximum — Upper Limit (
Units — Hz
84 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Automatic Function Selection
Program
Utilities Display Parameters
This parameter setting is used to configure multiple parameters with the setting of only one parameter. From the selection below multiple parameters may be set as indicated in the table.
Once set, the selected configuration is placed in effect and remains in effect until this parameter is changed or the individual settings are changed.
Set this parameter to Disable to set these parameters individually.
Note:
After performing the desired selection the EOI display returns to
Disabled though the selected function has been carried out (i.e., without this, if selection 1 is performed, F004 and F207 would hold the RR terminal setting regardless of attempts to change the settings individually).
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — RR
2 — VI/II (V/I)
3 — RR or V/I Switched via Terminal Board
4 — Keypad Frequency/Terminal Board Command
5 — Keypad Frequency and Command
Direct Access Number — F040
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
Related
Params
Default
Settings
0-Disable 1-RR 2-V/I
User Settings
3-RR or
V/I via TB
4-Keypad/
Freq.
CMD/TB
5-Keypad
Freq/CMD
Command
Mode
Frequency
Mode 1
Termina l Board
RR N/C
N/C
RR N/C RR
Terminal
Board
*Keypad
*Keypad
S3 Terminal
Preset
Speed 3
N/C
Freq.
Ref.
Priority
N/C
Freq.
Priority
V/I
Setup
Frequency
Mode 2
Termina l Board
0.0%
V/I
N/C
N/C
N/C RR
20.0%
V/I
Terminal Board
N/C
*Keypad
Note:
and select EOI Keypad to use the
EOI for control.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 85
Low Speed
Reach
Frequency
Low-Speed Signal Output Frequency
Program
Terminal Reach Settings
The Low-Speed Signal Output Frequency parameter sets a frequency threshold that activates the assigned output terminal for the duration that the
ASD output is equal to or above this setting (see Table 8 on pg. 239 for the
available output assignments).
Speed Reach Frequency
Program
Terminal Reach Settings
The Speed Reach Frequency sets a frequency threshold that, when reached or
is within the bandwidth specified by parameter F102
, activates the assigned output terminal for the duration that the ASD output is within the bandwidth
specified (see Table 8 on pg. 239 for the available output assignments).
Speed Reach Detection Band
Program
Terminal Reach Settings
This parameter sets the bandwidth of the Speed Reach Frequency (
setting.
Forward/Reverse Run Priority Selection
Program
Terminal Input Special Functions
The Forward/Reverse Priority Selection determines the operation of the ASD if the F and R control terminals are activated simultaneously.
Settings:
0 — Reverse
1 — Suspend
The waveforms shown depict the motor response for all combinations of the F and R terminal settings if the Reverse option is chosen.
The Suspend setting will decelerate the motor to a stop regardless of the rotation direction when both the F and R control terminals are activated.
Direct Access Number — F100
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F101
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F102
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 2.50
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F105
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Suspend
Changeable During Run — No
Simultaneous F and R activation.
86 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Input Terminal Priority
Program
Terminal Input Special Functions
This parameter is used to allow the Jog and DC Injection Braking input signals to control the ASD when received via the Terminal Board even though the system is in the Local mode.
With this parameter enabled, a Jog command or a DC Injection Braking command received from the Terminal Board will receive priority over commands from the EOI.
See
F260 for more information on using the Jog function.
See
F252 for more information on DC Injection Braking.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Enabled
16-Bit Binary/BCD Input
Program
Terminal Input Special Functions
The extended terminal function is used with the Expansion IO Card Option
(P/N ETB004Z).
This parameter defines the format of the binary or BCD data when using the option card.
Note:
The Expansion IO Card Option 2 option board is required to use this terminal.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 1 Instruction Manual (P/N 58685) for more information on the function of this terminal.
Settings:
0 — None
1 — 12-Bit Binary
2 — 16-Bit Binary
3 — 3-Digit BCD
4 — 4-Digit BCD
5 — Inverted 12-Bit Binary
6 — Inverted 16-Bit Binary
7 — Inverted 3-Digit BCD
8 — Inverted 4-Digit BCD
Selections using 16-bit binary or 4-digit BCD will require the configuration of
terminals S1-S4 on the Terminal Board as binary bits 0 – 3 ( F115 – F118 ). The
) parameter must be set to Binary/BCD.
For proper scaling of the binary or BCD input, parameters
–
must be configured.
Direct Access Number — F106
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F107
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — None
Changeable During Run — No
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 87
Forward
Reverse
Standby
Option V/I Terminal Voltage/Current Selection
Program
Frequency V/I Settings
This parameter is used to set the AI2 input terminal to receive either current or voltage as a control signal.
Note:
The Expansion IO Card Option 2 option board (P/N ETB004Z) is required to use this terminal.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 2 Instruction Manual (P/N 58686) for more information on the function of this terminal.
Settings:
0 — Voltage Input
1 — Current Input
Always ON 1 Terminal 1
Program
Terminal Input Terminals ON
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the virtual discrete input terminal ON. As a virtual terminal, the ON control terminal exists only in memory and is considered to always be in its True (connected to CC) state.
It is often practical to assign a function to this terminal that the user desires to be maintained regardless of external conditions or operations.
This parameter sets the programmable ON terminal to any one of the userselectable functions listed in
.
Input Terminal 1 (F) Function
Program
Terminal Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the F discrete input terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This parameter sets the programmable F terminal to any one of the userselectable functions listed in
.
Input Terminal 2 (R) Function
Program
Terminal Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the R discrete input terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This parameter sets the programmable R terminal to any one of the userselectable functions listed in
.
Input Terminal 3 (ST) Function
Program
Terminal Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the ST discrete input terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This parameter sets the programmable ST terminal to any one of the userselectable functions listed in
.
Direct Access Number — F109
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Voltage Input
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F110
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F111
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F112
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Reverse
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F113
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Standby
Changeable During Run — No
88 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Reset
Input Terminal 4 (RES) Function
Program
Terminal Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the RES discrete input terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This parameter sets the programmable RES terminal to any one of the userselectable functions listed in
.
Input Terminal 5 (S1) Function
Program
Terminal Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the S1 discrete input terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This parameter sets the programmable S1 terminal to any one of the userselectable functions listed in
.
Input Terminal 6 (S2) Function
Program
Terminal Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the S2 discrete input terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This parameter sets the programmable S2 terminal to any one of the userselectable functions listed in
.
Input Terminal 7 (S3) Function
Program
Terminal Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the S3 discrete input terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This parameter sets the programmable S3 terminal to any one of the userselectable functions listed in
.
Input Terminal 8 (S4) Function
Program
Terminal Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the S4 discrete input terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This parameter sets the programmable S4 terminal to any one of the userselectable functions listed in
.
Direct Access Number — F114
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Reset
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F115
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Preset Speed 1
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F116
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Preset Speed 2
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F117
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Preset Speed 3
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F118
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Preset Speed 4
Changeable During Run — No
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 89
Input Terminal 9 (LI1) Function
Program
Terminal Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the LI1 discrete input terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable LI1 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
.
Note:
The Expansion IO Card Option 1 option board (P/N ETB003Z) is required to use this terminal.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 1 Instruction Manual (P/N 58685) for more information on the function of this terminal.
Input Terminal 10 (LI2) Function
Program
Terminal Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the LI2 discrete input terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable LI2 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
.
Note:
The Expansion IO Card Option 1 option board (P/N ETB003Z) is required to use this terminal.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 1 Instruction Manual (P/N 58685) for more information on the function of this terminal.
Input Terminal 11 (LI3) Function
Program
Terminal Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the LI3 discrete input terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable LI3 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
.
Note:
The Expansion IO Card Option 1 option board (P/N ETB003Z) is required to use this terminal.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 1 Instruction Manual (P/N 58685) for more information on the function of this terminal.
Direct Access Number — F119
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F120
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F121
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
90 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Input Terminal 12 (LI4) Function
Program
Terminal Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the LI4 discrete input terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable LI4 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
.
Note:
The Expansion IO Card Option 1 option board (P/N ETB003Z) is required to use this terminal.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 1 Instruction Manual (P/N 58685) for more information on the function of this terminal.
Input Terminal 13 (LI5) Function
Program
Terminal Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the LI5 discrete input terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable LI5 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
.
Note:
The Expansion IO Card Option 2 option board (P/N ETB004Z) is required to use this terminal.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 2 Instruction Manual (P/N 58686) for more information on the function of this terminal.
Input Terminal 14 (LI6) Function
Program
Terminal Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the LI6 discrete input terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable LI6 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
Note:
The Expansion IO Card Option 2 option board (P/N ETB004Z) is required to use this terminal.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 2 Instruction Manual (P/N 58686) for more information on the function of this terminal.
Direct Access Number — F122
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F123
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F124
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 91
OUT1
OUT2
92
Input Terminal 15 (LI7) Function
Program
Terminal Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the LI7 discrete input terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable LI7 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
.
Note:
The Expansion IO Card Option 2 option board (P/N ETB004Z) is required to use this terminal.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 2 Instruction Manual (P/N 58686) for more information on the function of this terminal.
Input Terminal 16 (LI8) Function
Program
Terminal Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the LI8 discrete input terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable LI8 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
.
Note:
The Expansion IO Card Option 2 option board (P/N ETB004Z) is required to use this terminal.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 2 Instruction Manual (P/N 58686) for more information on the function of this terminal.
Output Terminal 1 (OUT1) Function
Program
Terminal Output Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the OUT1 discrete output terminals O1A and O1B.
The O1A and O1B (OUT1) output terminals change states (open or close) as a function of a user-selected event. See
for listing the possible assignments for the OUT1 terminals.
In addition, the output terminals must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
See parameter F669 for more information on this setting.
Output Terminal 2 (OUT2) Function
Program
Terminal Output Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the OUT2 discrete output terminals O2A and O2B.
The O2A and O2B (OUT2) output terminals change states (open or close) as a function of a user-selected event. See
for listing the possible assignments for the OUT2 terminals.
In addition, the output terminals must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
See parameter F669 for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F125
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F126
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F130
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Low-Speed Signal
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F131
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — RCH (Acc/Dec
Complete)
Changeable During Run — No
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Output Terminal 3 (FL) Function
Program
Terminal Output Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the FL output terminals to one
of the functions listed in Table 8 on pg. 239 .
In addition, the output terminals must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
Direct Access Number — F132
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Fault (All)
Changeable During Run — No
Output Terminal 4 (OUT3) Function
Program
Terminal Output Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the OUT3 discrete output terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable OUT3 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
.
Note:
The Expansion IO Card Option 1 option board (P/N ETB003Z) is required to use this terminal.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 1 Instruction Manual (P/N 58685) for more information on the function of this terminal.
Output Terminal 5 (OUT4) Function
Program
Terminal Output Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the OUT4 discrete output terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable OUT4 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
.
Note:
The Expansion IO Card Option 1 option board (P/N ETB003Z) is required to use this terminal.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 1 Instruction Manual (P/N 58685) for more information on the function of this terminal.
Direct Access Number — F133
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Always OFF
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F134
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Always OFF
Changeable During Run — No
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 93
Output Terminal 6 (R1) Function
Program
Terminal Output Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the R1 discrete output terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable R1 terminal to any one of
the user-selectable functions listed in Table 8 on pg. 239 .
Note:
The Expansion IO Card Option 1 option board (P/N ETB003Z) is required to use this terminal.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 1 Instruction Manual (P/N 58685) for more information on the function of this terminal.
Output Terminal 7 (OUT5) Function
Program
Terminal Output Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the OUT5 discrete output terminal.
In addition, this output terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable OUT5 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
.
Note:
The Expansion IO Card Option 2 option board (P/N ETB004Z) is required to use this terminal.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 2 Instruction Manual (P/N 58686) for more information on the function of this terminal.
Output Terminal 8 (OUT6) Function
Program
Terminal Output Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the OUT6 discrete output terminal.
In addition, this output terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable OUT6 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
.
Note:
The Expansion IO Card Option 2 option board (P/N ETB004Z) is required to use this terminal.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 2 Instruction Manual (P/N 58686) for more information on the function of this terminal.
Direct Access Number — F135
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Always OFF
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F136
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Always Off
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F137
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Always Off
Changeable During Run — No
94 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Output Terminal 9 (R2) Function
Program
Terminal Output Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the R2 discrete output terminal.
In addition, this output terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable R2 terminal to any one of
the user-selectable functions listed in Table 8 on pg. 239 .
Note:
The Expansion IO Card Option 2 option board (P/N ETB004Z) is required to use this terminal.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 2 Instruction Manual (P/N 58686) for more information on the function of this terminal.
Input Terminal 1 (F) Response Time
Program
Terminal Input Terminal Delays
This parameter delays the response of the ASD to any change in the F terminal input by the programmed value.
Direct Access Number — F138
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Always Off
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F140
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 8.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 2.0
Maximum — 200.0
Units — mS
The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or to prevent the ASD from responding to contact bounce or chatter.
Input Terminal 2 (R) Response Time
Program
Terminal Input Terminal Delays
This parameter delays the response of the drive to any change in the R terminal
input by the programmed value (see waveforms at F140 ).
The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or to prevent the ASD from responding to contact bounce or chatter.
Input Terminal 3 (ST) Response Time
Program
Terminal Input Terminal Delays
This parameter delays the response of the drive to any change in the ST
terminal input by the programmed value (see waveforms at F140
).
The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or to prevent the ASD from responding to contact bounce or chatter.
Direct Access Number — F141
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 8.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 2.0
Maximum — 200.0
Units — mS
Direct Access Number — F142
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 8.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 2.0
Maximum — 200.0
Units — mS
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 95
Input Terminal 4 (RES) Response Time
Program
Terminal Input Terminal Delays
This parameter delays the response of the drive to any change in the RES
terminal input by the programmed value (see waveforms at F140
).
The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or to prevent the ASD from responding to contact bounce or chatter.
Input Terminal 5 – 12 Response Time
Program
Terminal Input Terminal Delays
This parameter delays the response of the drive to any change in the 5 – 12 terminal inputs by the programmed value (see waveforms at
).
The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or to prevent the ASD from responding to contact bounce or chatter.
Input Terminal 13 – 20 Response Time
Program
Terminal Input Terminal Delays
This parameter delays the response of the drive to any change in the 13 – 20 terminal inputs by the programmed value (see waveforms at
).
The delay may be increased to provide additional electrical noise immunity or to prevent the ASD from responding to contact bounce or chatter.
Input Terminal 17 (B12) Function
Program
Terminal Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the B12 discrete input terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This setting assigns the functionality of the programmable B12 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
.
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N E6581335) for more information on the function of this terminal.
Input Terminal 18 (B13) Function
Program
Terminal Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the B13 discrete input terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable B13 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
.
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N E6581335) for more information on the function of this terminal.
Direct Access Number — F143
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 8.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 2.0
Maximum — 200.0
Units — mS
Direct Access Number — F144
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 8.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 2.0
Maximum — 200.0
Units — mS
Direct Access Number — F145
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 8.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 2.0
Maximum — 200.0
Units — mS
Direct Access Number — F164
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F165
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
96 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Input Terminal 19 (B14) Function
Program
Terminal Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the B14 discrete input terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable B14 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
.
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N E6581335) for more information on the function of this terminal.
Input Terminal 20 (B15) Function
Program
Terminal Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the B15 discrete input terminal.
In addition, this input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable B15 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
.
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N E6581335) for more information on the function of this terminal.
Output Terminal 10 (R3) Function
Program
Terminal Output Terminals
This parameter sets the functionality of the R3 output terminal to any one of the
user-selectable functions listed in Table 8 on pg. 239 .
In addition, the output terminals must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
See the 16-bit BIN/BCD Option Instruction Manual for more information on the function of this terminal.
Output Terminal 11 (R4) Function
Program
Terminal Output Terminals
This parameter sets the functionality of the R4 output terminal to any one of the
user-selectable functions listed in Table 8 on pg. 239 .
In addition, the output terminals must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
See the 16-bit BIN/BCD Option Instruction Manual option for more information on the function of this terminal.
Direct Access Number — F166
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F167
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F168
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — OFF
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F169
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — OFF
Changeable During Run — No
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 97
Base Frequency 2
Program
Motor Motor Set 2
The Base Frequency 2 setting is the frequency at which the output voltage of the ASD reaches its maximum setting. The Base Frequency Voltage 2
This parameter is used only when the parameters for Motor Set 2 are configured and selected. Motor Set 2 may be selected by a properly configured
input terminal (see Table 5 on pg. 234 ).
For proper motor operation, the Base Frequency should be set for the nameplated frequency of the motor.
Base Frequency Voltage 2
Program
Motor Motor Set 2
The Base Frequency Voltage 2 setting is the Motor 2 output voltage at the
). Regardless of the programmed value, the output voltage cannot be higher than the input voltage.
The actual output voltage will be influenced by the input voltage of the ASD
and the Supply Voltage Compensation setting ( F307 ).
This parameter is used only when the parameters for Motor Set 2 are configured and selected. Motor Set 2 may be selected by a properly configured
input terminal (see Table 5 on pg. 234 ).
Manual Torque Boost 2
Program
Motor Motor Set 2
The Manual Torque Boost 2 function is used to increase the low frequency torque for high inertia loads by increasing the output voltage at frequencies
below ½ of the Base Frequency 2 setting ( F170 ).
See parameter F016 (Manual Torque Boost 1) for an explanation of torque
boost.
This parameter is used only when the parameters for Motor Set 2 are configured and selected. Motor Set 2 may be selected by a properly configured
input terminal (see Table 5 on pg. 234 ).
Motor Overload Protection Level 2
Program
Motor Motor Set 2
The Motor 2 Overload Protection Level parameter specifies the motor overload current level for Motor Set 2. This value is entered as either a percentage of the full load rating of the ASD or as the FLA of the motor.
The unit of measurement for this parameter may be set to Amps (A/V) or it may be set as a percentage of the ASD rating. The nameplated FLA of the motor may be entered directly when Amps is selected as the unit of
to change the display unit).
The Motor 2 Overload Protection Level setting will be displayed in Amps if the EOI display units are set to A/V rather than %.
Direct Access Number — F170
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 25.0
Maximum — 299.0
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F171
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-Dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 50.0
Maximum — 660.0
Units — Volts
Direct Access Number — F172
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-Dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 30.0
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F173
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 10
Maximum — 100
Units — %
98 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Base Frequency 3
Program
Motor Motor Set 3
The Base Frequency 3 setting is the frequency at which the output voltage of the ASD reaches its maximum setting. The Base Frequency Voltage 3
This parameter is used only when the parameters for Motor Set 3 are configured and selected. Motor Set 3 may be selected by a properly configured
input terminal (see Table 5 on pg. 234 ).
For proper motor operation, the Base Frequency should be set for the nameplated frequency of the motor.
Base Frequency Voltage 3
Program
Motor Motor Set 3
The Base Frequency Voltage 3 setting is the Motor Set 3 output voltage at the
). Regardless of the programmed value, the output voltage cannot be higher than the input voltage.
The actual output voltage will be influenced by the input voltage of the ASD
and the Supply Voltage Compensation setting ( F307 ).
This parameter is used only when the parameters for Motor Set 3 are configured and selected. Motor Set 3 may be selected by a properly configured
input terminal (see Table 5 on pg. 234 ).
Manual Torque Boost 3
Program
Motor Motor Set 3
The Manual Torque Boost 3 function is used to increase the low frequency torque for high inertia loads by increasing the output voltage at frequencies
below ½ of the Base Frequency 3 setting ( F174 ).
See parameter F016 (Manual Torque Boost 1) for an explanation of torque
boost.
This parameter is used only when the parameters for Motor Set 3 are configured and selected. Motor Set 3 may be selected by a properly configured
input terminal (see Table 5 on pg. 234 ).
Motor Overload Protection Level 3
Program
Motor Motor Set 3
The Motor 3 Overload Protection Level parameter specifies the motor overload current level for Motor Set 3. This value is entered as either a percentage of the full load rating of the ASD or as the FLA of the motor.
The unit of measurement for this parameter may be set to Amps (A/V) or it may be set as a percentage of the ASD rating. The nameplated FLA of the motor may be entered directly when Amps is selected as the unit of
to change the display unit).
The Motor 3 Overload Protection Level setting will be displayed in Amps if the EOI display units are set to A/V rather than %.
Direct Access Number — F174
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 25.0
Maximum — 299.0
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F175
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-Dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 50.0
Maximum — 660.0
Units — Volts
Direct Access Number — F176
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-Dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 30.0
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F177
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 10
Maximum — 100
Units — %
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 99
Base Frequency 4
Program
Motor Motor Set 4
The Base Frequency 4 setting is the frequency at which the output voltage of the ASD reaches its maximum setting. The Base Frequency Voltage 4
This parameter is used only when the parameters for Motor Set 4 are configured and selected. Motor Set 4 may be selected by a properly configured
input terminal (see Table 5 on pg. 234 ).
For proper motor operation, the Base Frequency should be set for the nameplated frequency of the motor.
Base Frequency Voltage 4
Program
Motor Motor Set 4
The Base Frequency Voltage 4 is the Motor 4 output voltage at the Base
Frequency ( F178 ). Regardless of the programmed value, the output voltage
cannot be higher than the input voltage.
The actual output voltage will be influenced by the input voltage of the ASD
and the Supply Voltage Compensation setting ( F307 ).
This parameter is used only when the parameters for Motor Set 4 are configured and selected. Motor Set 4 may be selected by a properly configured
input terminal (see Table 5 on pg. 234 ).
Manual Torque Boost 4
Program
Motor Motor Set 4
The Manual Torque Boost 4 function is used to increase the low frequency torque for high inertia loads by increasing the output voltage at frequencies
below ½ of the 4 Base Frequency setting ( F178 ).
See parameter F016 (Manual Torque Boost 1) for an explanation of torque
boost.
This parameter is used only when the parameters for Motor Set 4 are configured and selected. Motor Set 4 may be selected by a properly configured
input terminal (see Table 5 on pg. 234 ).
Motor Overload Protection Level 4
Program
Motor Motor Set 4
The Motor 4 Overload Protection Level parameter specifies the motor overload current level for Motor Set 4. This value is entered as either a percentage of the full load rating of the ASD or as the FLA of the motor.
The unit of measurement for this parameter may be set to Amps (A/V) or it may be set as a percentage of the ASD rating. The nameplated FLA of the motor may be entered directly when Amps is selected as the unit of
to change the display unit).
The Motor 4 Overload Protection Level setting will be displayed in Amps if the EOI display units are set to A/V rather than %.
Direct Access Number — F178
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 25.00
Maximum — 299.0
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F179
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-Dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 50.0
Maximum — 660.0
Units — Volts
Direct Access Number — F180
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-Dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 30.0
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F181
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 10
Maximum — 100
Units — %
100 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
V/f 5-Point Setting Frequency 1
Program
Special V/f 5-Point Setting
The V/f 5-Point Setting Frequency 1 setting establishes the frequency that is to be associated with the voltage setting of
F191 (V/f 5-Point Setting Voltage
1).
The V/f 5-Point settings define a volts per hertz relationship for the startup output of the ASD.
To enable this function, set the V/f Pattern ( F015
) selection to the V/f 5-Point
Curve setting.
V/f Curves may be useful in starting high inertia loads such as rotary drum vacuum filters.
Direct Access Number — F190
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 101
V/f 5-Point Setting Voltage 1
Program
Special V/f 5-Point Setting
The V/f 5-Point Setting Voltage 1 establishes the output voltage level that is to
be associated with the frequency setting of F190 (V/f 5-Point Setting Frequency
1).
parameter setting will determine if the on-screen selection for this parameter appears in the form of a Voltage (V) or as a Percentage (%) of the
ASD rating.
If using Voltage as a unit of measure and with no voltage correction ( F307
Disabled), the limit of the on-screen display value for this parameter is 200 volts for the 230-volt ASD and 400 volts for the 460-volt ASD.
The actual output voltage is scaled to the maximum EOI display values (e.g., a
100-volt EOI display corresponds to a 115-volt actual output for the 230-volt
ASD — ½ of the full display range).
If using % as a unit of measure and with no voltage correction ( F307 Disabled),
the ASD output voltage will be the percentage setting times 230 for the 230volt unit (or % times 460 volts for the 460-volt unit).
See
F190 for additional information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F191
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 100.0
Units — V or % (
)
V/f 5-Point Setting Frequency 2
Program
Special V/f 5-Point Setting
The V/f 5-Point Setting Frequency 2 sets the frequency to be associated with
the voltage setting of parameter F193 (V/f 5-Point Setting Voltage 2).
See
for additional information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F192
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
102 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
V/f 5-Point Setting Voltage 2
Program
Special V/f 5-Point Setting
The V/f 5-Point Setting Voltage 2 establishes the output voltage level that is to
be associated with the frequency setting of F192 (V/f 5-Point Setting Frequency
2).
parameter setting will determine if the selection for this parameter appears in the form of a Voltage (V) or as a Percentage (%) of the ASD rating.
The default setting is %.
See
for additional information on this setting.
V/f 5-Point Setting Frequency 3
Program
Special V/f 5-Point Setting
The V/f 5-Point Setting Frequency 3 sets the frequency to be associated with
the voltage setting of parameter F195 (V/f 5-Point Setting Voltage 3).
See
for additional information on this setting.
V/f 5-Point Setting Voltage 3
Program
Special V/f 5-Point Setting
The V/f 5-Point Setting Voltage 3 establishes the output voltage level that is to
be associated with the frequency setting of F194 (V/f 5-Point Setting Frequency
3).
parameter setting will determine if the selection for this parameter appears in the form of a Voltage (V) or as a Percentage (%) of the ASD rating.
The default setting is %.
See
for additional information on this setting.
V/f 5-Point Setting Frequency 4
Program
Special V/f 5-Point Setting
The V/f 5-Point Setting Frequency 4 sets the frequency to be associated with
the voltage setting of parameter F197 (V/f 5-Point Setting Voltage 4).
See
for additional information on this setting.
V/f 5-Point Setting Voltage 4
Program
Special V/f 5-Point Setting
The V/f 5-Point Setting Voltage 4 establishes the output voltage level that is to
be associated with the frequency setting of F196 (V/f 5-Point Setting Frequency
4).
parameter setting will determine if the selection for this parameter appears in the form of a Voltage (V) or as a Percentage (%) of the ASD rating.
The default setting is %.
See
for additional information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F193
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 100.0
Units — V or % (
)
Direct Access Number — F194
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F195
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 100.0
Units — V or % (
)
Direct Access Number — F196
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F197
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 100.0
Units — V or % (
)
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 103
V/f 5-Point Setting Frequency 5
Program
Special V/f 5-Point Setting
The V/f 5-Point Setting Frequency 5 sets the frequency to be associated with
the voltage setting of parameter F199 (V/f 5-Point Setting Voltage 5).
See
for additional information on this setting.
V/f 5-Point Setting Voltage 5
Program
Special V/f 5-Point Setting
The V/f 5-Point Setting Voltage 5 establishes the output voltage level that is to
be associated with the frequency setting of F198 (V/f 5-Point Setting Frequency
5).
parameter setting will determine if the selection for this parameter appears in the form of a Voltage (V) or as a Percentage (%) of the ASD rating.
The default setting is %.
See
for additional information on this setting.
Frequency Priority Selection
Program
Fundamental Standard Mode Selection
Either Frequency Mode 1 or Frequency Mode 2 may control the output frequency of the ASD. This parameter determines which of the two will control the output frequency and the conditions in which control will be switched from one to the other.
Note:
Frequency Mode is abbreviated as FMOD.
Settings:
0 — FMOD changed by Terminal Board (Frequency Mode)
1 — FMOD ( F208 ) (Frequency Mode)
The Frequency Mode 1 or Frequency Mode 2 selection specifies the source of
the input frequency command signal. These selections are performed at F004
and
If FMOD changed by Terminal Board is selected here, the ASD will follow the control of the discrete input terminal assigned the function of Frequency
Priority. The discrete terminal Frequency Priority will toggle control to and from Frequency Mode 1 and Frequency Mode 2 with each activation/ deactivation.
) is selected here, the ASD will follow the control of the
Frequency Mode 1 setting for the duration that the commanded frequency of the Frequency Mode 1 setting is greater than the setting of
.
If the commanded frequency of the Frequency Mode 1 setting is less than or
equal to the setting of F208 the ASD will follow the setting of Frequency
Mode 2.
Direct Access Number — F198
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F199
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 100.0
Units — V or % (
)
Direct Access Number — F200
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — FMOD (changed by
TB)
Changeable During Run — Yes
104 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
V/I
VI/II (V/I) Input Point 1 Setting
Program
Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the isolated V/I input terminal when the V/I terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control mode or the Torque Control mode.
This parameter sets the V/I input level that is associated with the V/I Input
Point 1 Frequency setting when operating in the Speed control mode or is associated with the V/I Input Point 1 Rate setting when operating in the
Torque Control mode.
Note: See note on
for more information on the V/I terminal.
Direct Access Number — F201
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 100
Units — %
Frequency Settings
V/I Input Speed Control Setup
Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Speed control input at the V/I input terminal:
• Set SW301 of the Terminal Board to Voltage or Current (see Figure 9 on pg. 24
).
• Program
Fundamental Standard Mode Selection Frequency Mode
1
V/I.
• Program
Fundamental Standard Mode Selection Command Mode
Selection
Terminal Block.
Speed Control
Perform the following setup to allow the system to perform Speed control from the V/I input terminal:
• Set V/I Input Point 1 Frequency (
• Set V/I Input Point 1 Setting ( F201 ) — the input analog signal level that
corresponds to the frequency setting at V/I Input Point 1 Frequency.
• Set V/I Input Point 2 Frequency (
• Set V/I Input Point 2 Setting ( F203 ) — the input analog signal level that
corresponds to the frequency setting at V/I Input Point 2 Frequency.
• Provide a Run command (F and/or R).
Once set, as the V/I input voltage or current changes, the output frequency of the ASD will vary in accordance with the above settings.
This parameter value is entered as 0% to 100% of the V/I input signal range.
The V/I input is commonly used for a 4 – 20 mA current loop signal where
4 mA equals 20% of a 20 mA signal. Set this parameter to 20% for 4 – 20 mA current loop signal applications.
Note:
When using the isolated V/I input terminal the IICC terminal must be used as the return (negative) connection.
Note:
If using P24 to power a transducer that is to be used to supply the V/I input signal, it may be necessary to connect IICC to CCA.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 105
VI/II (V/I) Input Point 1 Frequency
Program
Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the V/I input terminal when the V/I terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control mode.
This parameter sets V/I Input Point 1 Frequency and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of V/I Input Point 1 Setting when operating in the
Speed Control mode.
See V/I Input Point 1 Setting ( F201 ) for more information on this setting.
VI/II (V/I) Input Point 2 Setting
Program
Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the V/I input terminal when the V/I terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control mode or the Torque Control mode.
This parameter sets the V/I input level that is associated with V/I Input Point 2
Frequency
when operating in the Speed control mode or is associated with the
V/I Input Point 1 Rate when operating in the Torque Control mode.
This value is entered as 0% to 100% of the V/I input signal range.
See V/I Input Point 1 Setting ( F201 ) for more information on this setting
when used for Speed control.
See V/I Input Point 1 Rate (
) for more information on this setting when used for Torque Control.
VI/II (V/I) Input Point 2 Frequency
Program
Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the V/I input terminal when the V/I terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control mode.
This parameter sets V/I Input Point 2 Frequency and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of V/I Input Point 2 Setting when operating in the
Speed Control mode.
See V/I Input Point 1 Setting ( F201 ) for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F202
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F203
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 100
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F204
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
106 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
VI/II (V/I) Input Point 1 Rate
Program
Torque Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the isolated V/I input terminal when the V/I terminal is used as the control input while operating in the
Torque Control mode.
Direct Access Number — F205
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.00
Units — %
Torque Settings
V/I Input Torque Control Setup
Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Torque Control input at the V/I input terminal:
• Set SW301 of the Terminal Board to Voltage or Current (see Figure 9 on pg. 24 ).
• Program
Fundamental Standard Mode Selection Frequency Mode 1
V/I.
• Program
Fundamental Standard Mode Selection Command Mode
Selection
Terminal Block.
Torque Control
Perform the following setup to allow the system to perform Torque Control from the V/I input terminal:
• Set V/I Input Point 1 Rate ( F205
).
• Set V/I Input Point 1 Setting (
) — the input analog signal level that corresponds to the torque setting at V/I Input Point 1 Rate.
• Set V/I Input Point 2 Rate ( F206
).
• Set V/I Input Point 2 Setting (
) — the input analog signal level that corresponds to the torque setting at V/I Input Point 2 Rate.
• Provide a Run command (F and/or R).
Torque Control is accomplished by establishing an associated V/f output pattern for a given V/I input level.
Once set, as the V/I input voltage changes or the V/I current changes, the output torque of the ASD will vary in accordance with the above settings.
This parameter sets V/I Input Point 1 Rate and is the output torque value that is associated with the setting of V/I Input Point 1 Setting when operating in the Torque Control mode.
This value is entered as 0% to 250% of the rated torque.
Note:
When using the isolated V/I input terminal the IICC terminal must be used as the return (negative) connection.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 107
VI/II (V/I) Input Point 2 Rate
Program
Torque Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the V/I input terminal when the V/I terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque
Control mode.
Torque Control is accomplished by establishing an associated V/f output pattern for a given V/I input level.
This parameter sets V/I Input Point 2 Rate and is the output torque value that is associated with the setting of V/I Input Point 2 Setting when operating in the Torque Control mode.
This value is entered as 0% to 250% of the rated torque.
See V/I Input Point 1 Rate (
)for more information on this setting.
Frequency Mode 2
Program
Fundamental Standard Mode Selection
This parameter is used to set the source of the frequency command signal to be used as Frequency Mode 2 in the event that Frequency Mode 1 is disabled or if Frequency Mode 2 is set up as the primary control parameter.
See
for additional information on this setting.
Settings:
1 — VI/II (V/I)
2 — RR
3 — RX
4 — Not Used
5 — EOI Keypad
6 — RS485
7 — Communication Option Board
8 — RX2 Option (AI1)
9 — Option V/I
10 — UP/DOWN Frequency (Terminal Board)
11 — Pulse Input (Option)
12 — Pulse Input (Motor CPU)
13 — Binary/BCD Input (Option)
Frequency Mode Priority Switching Frequency
Program
Fundamental Standard Mode Selection
This parameter establishes a threshold frequency that will be used as a reference when determining when to switch the output frequency control source from the
Frequency Mode 1 setting to the Frequency Mode 2 setting.
See
F200 for additional information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F206
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.00
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F207
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — VI/II
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F208
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.10
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.10
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
108 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Analog Input Filter
Program
Frequency Analog Filter
Analog filtering is applied after the analog reference signal is converted to a digital signal. The type of filtering used is Rolling Average over time.
Settings:
0 — None (1 mS)
1 — Small (8 mS)
2 — Medium (16 mS)
3 — Large (32 mS)
4 — Huge (64 mS)
The analog input signal is sampled and converted to a digital signal. With no filtering applied, the resulting digital value is scaled for use by the microprocessor of the ASD.
If the filtering selection Small is selected, the ASD averages the last 8 mS of sampled signal and converted (digital) values. The rolling average is updated
(every 4 µS) and scaled for use by the microprocessor.
This holds true for the Medium, Large, and Huge selections providing a larger sample to produce the average for use by the microprocessor.
False responses to electrical noise are eliminated with no loss in bandwidth because the value used by the drive is the average value of several samples.
Direct Access Number — F209
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — None
Changeable During Run — Yes
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 109
RR
RR Input Point 1 Setting
Program
Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when the RR terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control mode or the Torque Control mode.
This parameter sets the RR input level that is associated with the RR Input
Point 1 Frequency setting when operating in the Speed control mode or is associated with the RR Input Point 1 Rate setting when operating in the
Torque Control mode.
Direct Access Number — F210
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 100
Units — %
Frequency Settings
Speed Control
Perform the following setup to allow the system to perform Speed control from the RR input terminal:
• Set RR Input Point 1 Frequency (
• Set RR Input Point 1 Setting (
F210 ) — the input analog signal level that
corresponds to the frequency setting at RR Input Point 1 Frequency.
• Set RR Input Point 2 Frequency (
).
• Set RR Input Point 2 Setting (
F212 ) — the input analog signal level that
corresponds to the frequency setting at RR Input Point 2 Frequency.
RR Input Speed Control Setup
Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Speed control input at the RR input terminal:
• Program
Fundamental Standard Mode Selection Frequency Mode
1
RR.
• Program
Fundamental Standard Mode Selection Command Mode
Selection
Terminal Block.
• Provide a Run command (F and/or R).
Once set, as the RR input voltage changes, the output frequency of the ASD will vary in accordance with the above settings.
This parameter value is entered as 0% to 100% of the RR input signal range.
RR Input Point 1 Frequency
Program
Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when the RR terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control mode.
This parameter sets RR Input Point 1 Frequency and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of RR Input Point 1 Setting when operating in the
Speed Control mode.
See RR Input Point 1 Setting (
) for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F211
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
110 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
RR Input Point 2 Setting
Program
Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when the RR terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control mode or the Torque Control mode.
This parameter sets the RR input level that is associated with RR Input Point 2
Frequency
when operating in the Speed control mode or is associated with the
RR Input Point 1 Rate when operating in the Torque Control mode.
This value is entered as 0% to 100% of the RR input signal range.
See RR Input Point 1 Setting (
) for more information on this setting when used for Speed control.
See RR Input Point 1 Rate ( F214 )for more information on this setting when
used for Torque Control.
RR Input Point 2 Frequency
Program
Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when the RR terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control mode.
This parameter sets RR Input Point 2 Frequency and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of RR Input Point 2 Setting when operating in the
Speed Control mode.
See RR Input Point 1 Setting (
) for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F212
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 100
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F213
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 111
RR Input Point 1 Rate
Program
Torque Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when the RR terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque
Control mode.
RR Input Torque Control Setup
Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Torque Control input at the RR input terminal:
• Program
Fundamental Standard Mode Selection Frequency Mode
RR.
• Program
Fundamental Standard Mode Selection Command Mode
Selection
Terminal Block.
Direct Access Number — F214
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.00
Units — %
Torque Settings
Torque Control
Perform the following setup to allow the system to perform Torque Control from the RR input terminal:
• Set RR Input Point 1 Rate ( F214
).
• Set RR Input Point 1 Setting (
F210 ) — the input analog signal level that
corresponds to the torque setting at RR Input Point 1 Rate.
• Set RR Input Point 2 Rate ( F215
).
• Set RR Input Point 2 Setting (
F212 ) — the input analog signal level that
corresponds to the frequency setting at RR Input Point 2 Rate.
• Provide a Run command (F and/or R).
Torque Control is accomplished by establishing an associated V/f output pattern for a given RR input level.
Once set, as the RR input voltage changes, the output torque of the ASD will vary in accordance with the above settings.
This parameter sets RR Input Point 1 Rate and is the output torque value that is associated with the setting of RR Input Point 1 Setting when operating in the Torque Control mode.
This value is entered as 0% to 250% of the rated torque.
RR Input Point 2 Rate
Program
Torque Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RR input terminal when the RR terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque
Control mode.
Torque Control is accomplished by establishing an associated V/f output pattern for a given RR input level.
This parameter sets RR Input Point 2 Rate and is the output torque value that is associated with the setting of RR Input Point 2 Setting when operating in the Torque Control mode.
This value is entered as 0% to 250% of the rated torque.
See RR Input Point 1 Rate ( F214 ) for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F215
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.00
Units — %
112 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
RX
RX Input Point 1 Setting
Program
Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX input terminal when the RX terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control mode or the Torque Control mode.
This parameter sets the RX input level that is associated with RX Input Point 1
Frequency when operating in the Speed Control mode or is associated with the RX Input Point 1 Rate when operating in the Torque Control mode.
Direct Access Number — F216
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -100
Maximum — +100
Units — %
Frequency Settings
RX Input Speed Control Setup
Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Speed control input at the RX input terminal:
• Program
Fundamental Standard Mode Selection Frequency Mode
1
RX.
• Program
Fundamental Standard Mode Selection Command Mode
Selection
Terminal Block.
Speed Control
Perform the following setup to allow the system to perform Speed control from the RX input terminal:
• Set RX Input Point 1 Frequency (
).
• Set RX Input Point 1 Setting (
F216 ) — the input analog signal level that
corresponds to the speed setting at RX Input Point 1 Frequency.
• Set RX Input Point 2 Frequency (
).
• Set RX Input Point 2 Setting (
F218 ) — the input analog signal level that
corresponds to the speed setting at RX Input Point 2 Frequency.
• Provide a Run command (F and/or R).
Once set, as the RX input voltage changes, the ASD output speed and/or torque will vary in accordance with the above settings.
This parameter value is entered as -100% to +100% of the RX input signal range.
See parameter F474 and F475 for information on fine-tuning this terminal
response.
RX Input Point 1 Frequency
Program
Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX input terminal when the RX terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control mode.
This parameter sets RX Input Point 1 Frequency and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of RX Input Point 1 Setting when operating in the
Speed Control mode.
See RX Input Point 1 Setting (
) for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F217
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 113
RX Input Point 2 Setting
Program
Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX input terminal when the RX terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control mode or the Torque Control mode.
This parameter sets the RX input level that is associated with RX Input Point 2
Frequency
when operating in the Speed control mode or is associated with the
RX Input Point 2 Rate when operating in the Torque Control mode.
This value is entered as -100% to +100% of the RX input signal range.
See RX Input Point 1 Setting (
) for more information on this setting when used for Speed control.
See RX Input Point 1 Rate ( F220 ) for more information on this setting when
used for Torque Control.
RX Input Point 2 Frequency
Program
Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX input terminal when the RX terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control mode.
This parameter sets RX Input Point 2 Frequency and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of RX Input Point 2 Setting when operating in the
Speed Control mode.
See RX Input Point 1 Setting (
) for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F218
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — +100
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -100.0
Maximum — +100.0
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F219
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00.
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
114 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
RX Input Point 1 Rate
Program
Torque Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX input terminal when the RX terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque
Control mode.
RX Input Torque Control Setup
Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Torque Control input at the RX input terminal:
• Program
Fundamental Standard Mode Selection Frequency Mode
RX.
• Program
Fundamental Standard Mode Selection Command Mode
Selection
Terminal Block.
Direct Access Number — F220
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -250.00
Maximum — +250.00
Units — %
Torque Settings
Torque Control
Perform the following setup to allow the system to perform Torque Control from the RX input terminal:
• Set RX Input Point 1 Rate ( F220
).
• Set RX Input Point 1 Setting (
F216 ) — the input analog signal level that
corresponds to the torque setting at RX Input Point 1 Rate.
• Set RX Input Point 2 Rate ( F221
).
• Set RX Input Point 2 Setting (
F218 ) — the input analog signal level that
corresponds to the speed setting at RX Input Point 2 Rate.
• Provide a Run command (F and/or R).
Torque Control is accomplished by establishing an associated V/f output pattern for a given RX input level.
Once set, as the RX input voltage changes, the ASD output speed and/or torque will vary in accordance with the above settings.
This parameter sets RX Input Point 1 Rate and is the output torque value that is associated with the setting of RX Input Point 1 Setting when operating in the Torque Control mode.
This value is entered as -250% to +250% of the rated torque.
RX Input Point 2 Rate
Program
Torque Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX input terminal when the RX terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Torque
Control mode.
Torque Control is accomplished by establishing an associated V/f output pattern for a given RX input level.
This parameter sets RX Input Point 2 Rate and is the output torque value that is associated with the setting of RX Input Point 2 Setting when operating in the Torque Control mode.
This value is entered as -250% to +250% of the rated torque.
See RX Input Point 1 Rate ( F220 ) for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F221
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -250.00
Maximum — +250.00
Units — %
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 115
RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Setting
Program
Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX2 (AI1) input terminal when the RX2 (AI1) terminal is used as the control input while operating in the
Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode.
Note:
The Expansion IO Card Option 1 option board (P/N ETB003Z) is required to use this terminal.
This parameter sets the RX2 (AI1) input level that is associated with RX2
(AI1) Input Point 1 Frequency when operating in the Speed Control mode or is associated with the RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Rate when operating in the
Torque Control mode.
Direct Access Number — F222
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -100
Maximum — +100
Units — %
Frequency Settings
RX2 (AI1) Input Speed Control Setup
Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Speed control input at the RX2 (AI1) input terminal:
• Program
Fundamental Standard Mode Selection Frequency Mode
1
RX2.
• Program
Fundamental Standard Mode Selection Command Mode
Selection
Terminal Block.
Speed Control
Perform the following setup to allow the system to perform Speed control from the RX2 (AI1) input terminal:
• Set RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Frequency (
).
• Set RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Setting (
F222 ) — the input analog signal
level that corresponds to the speed setting at RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1
Frequency.
• Set RX2 (AI1) Input Point 2 Frequency (
).
• Set RX2 (AI1) Input Point 2 Setting (
F224 ) — the input analog signal
level that corresponds to the speed setting at RX Input Point 2 Frequency.
• Provide a Run command (F and/or R).
Once set, as the RX2 (AI1) input voltage changes, the ASD output speed and/or torque will vary in accordance with the above settings.
This parameter value is entered as -100% to +100% of the RX2 (AI1) input signal range.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 1 Instruction Manual (P/N 58685) for
more information on the function of this terminal. See parameter F476
and
F477 for information on fine-tuning this terminal response.
116 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Frequency
Program
Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX2 (AI1) input terminal when the RX2 (AI1) terminal is used as the control input while operating in the
Speed Control mode.
This parameter sets RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Frequency and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Setting when operating in the Speed Control mode.
See RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Setting (
F222 ) for more information on this
setting.
RX2 (AI1) Input Point 2 Setting
Program
Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX2 (AI1) input terminal when the RX2 (AI1) terminal is used as the control input while operating in the
Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode.
This parameter sets the RX2 (AI1) input level that is associated with RX2
(AI1) Input Point 2 Frequency when operating in the Speed control mode or is associated with the RX2 (AI1) Input Point 2 Rate when operating in the
Torque Control mode.
This value is entered as -100% to +100% of the RX2 (AI1) input signal range.
See RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Setting (
F222 ) for more information on this
setting when used for Speed control.
See RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Rate ( F226
) for more information on this setting when used for Torque Control.
RX2 (AI1) Input Point 2 Frequency
Program
Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX2 (AI1) input terminal when the RX2 (AI1) terminal is used as the control input while operating in the
Speed Control mode.
This parameter sets RX2 (AI1) Input Point 2 Frequency and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of RX2 (AI1) Input Point 2 Setting when operating in the Speed Control mode.
See RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Setting (
F226 ) for more information on this
setting.
Direct Access Number — F223
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F224
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — +100
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -100
Maximum — +100
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F225
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 117
RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Rate
Program
Torque Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX2 (AI1) input terminal when the RX2 (AI1) terminal is used as the control input while operating in the
Torque Control mode.
Note:
The Expansion IO Card Option 1 option board (P/N ETB003Z) is required to use this terminal.
Direct Access Number — F226
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -250.00
Maximum — +250.00
Units — %
RX2 (AI1) Input Torque Control Setup
Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Torque Control input at the RX2 (AI1) input terminal:
• Program
Fundamental Standard Mode Selection Frequency Mode
RX2.
• Program
Fundamental Standard Mode Selection Command Mode
Selection
Terminal Block.
• Provide a Run command (F and/or R).
Torque Control
Perform the following setup to allow the system to perform Torque Control from the RX2 (AI1) input terminal:
• Set RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Rate (
).
• Set RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Setting (
F222 ) — the input analog signal
level that corresponds to the speed setting at RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1
Rate.
• Set RX2 (AI1) Input Point 2 Rate (
).
• Set RX2 (AI1) Input Point 2 Setting (
F224 ) — the input analog signal
level that corresponds to the speed setting at RX Input Point 2 Rate.
• Provide a Run command (F and/or R).
Torque Control is accomplished by establishing an associated V/f output pattern for a given RX2 (AI1) input level.
Once set, as the RX2 (AI1) input voltage changes, the ASD output speed and/or torque will vary in accordance with the above settings.
This parameter sets RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Rate and is the output torque value that is associated with the setting of RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Setting when operating in the Torque Control mode.
This value is entered as -250% to +250% of the rated torque.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 1 Instruction Manual (P/N 58685) for more information on the function of this terminal.
Torque Settings
118 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
RX2 (AI1) Input Point 2 Rate
Program
Torque Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the RX2 (AI1) input terminal when the RX2 (AI1) terminal is used as the control input while operating in the
Torque Control mode.
Torque Control is accomplished by establishing an associated V/f output pattern for a given RX2 (AI1) input level.
This parameter sets RX2 (AI1) Input Point 2 Rate and is the output torque value that is associated with the setting of RX2 (AI1) Input Point 2 Setting when operating in the Torque Control mode.
This value is entered as -250% to +250% of the rated torque.
See RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Rate ( F226
) for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F227
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -250.00
Maximum — +250.00
Units — %
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 119
BIN Input Point 1 Setting
Program
Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the BIN input terminals when the BIN terminals are used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control mode.
The discrete input terminals of the Terminal Board are used as the BIN terminals.
Direct Access Number — F228
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 100
Units — %
BIN Input Speed Control Setup
Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Speed control input at the BIN input terminals:
• Program
Fundamental Standard Mode Selection Frequency Mode
1
Binary/BCD.
• Program
Fundamental Standard Mode Selection Command Mode
Selection
Terminal Block.
• Program
Terminal Input Terminals; select and set the desired discrete input terminals to Binary Bit(s) 0 – 7 (or 0 – MSB). The binary input byte will control the speed of the motor.
• Program
Terminal Input Terminals; select and set a discrete input terminal to Binary Data Write. Activation of the Binary Data Write terminal will transfer the status of the Binary Bit(s) 0 – 7 (or 0 – MSB) to the control board for speed control.
Frequency Settings
Speed Control
Perform the following setup to allow the system to perform Speed control from the BIN input terminals:
• Set BIN Input Point 1 Frequency ( F229 ).
• Set the BIN input value (% of 255
D
) (
F228 ) that represents BIN Input
Point 1 Frequency.
• Set BIN Input Point 2 Frequency ( F231 ).
• Set the BIN input value (% of 255
D
) (
F230 ) that represents BIN Input
Point 2 Frequency.
• Provide a Run command (F and/or R).
Note:
255
D is the decimal equivalent of the 8-bit BIN byte with all input terminals set to 1 (255 decimal = 11111111 binary).
Once set, as the BIN input signal changes are transferred to the control board, the output frequency of the ASD will vary in accordance with the above settings.
This parameter sets BIN Input Point 1 Setting and is entered as 0% to 100% of the of the range represented by the BIN binary input byte 11111111 (255
D
) or the binary bit(s) 0 – MSB.
120 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
BIN Input Point 1 Frequency
Program
Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the speed of the BIN input terminals when the
BIN terminals are used as the control input.
This parameter sets BIN Input Point 1 Frequency and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of BIN Input Point 1 Setting.
See BIN Input Point 1 Setting ( F228 ) for further information on this setting.
BIN Input Point 2 Setting
Program
Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the speed of the BIN input terminals when the
BIN terminals are used as the control input.
This parameter sets the BIN input signal that is associated with BIN Input
Point 2 Frequency.
This value is entered as 0% to +100% of the BIN input signal range.
See BIN Input Point 1 Setting ( F228 ) for further information on this setting.
BIN Input Point 2 Frequency
Program
Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the speed of the BIN input terminals when the
BIN terminal are used as the control input.
This parameter sets BIN Input Point 2 Frequency and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of BIN Input Point 2 Setting.
See BIN Input Point 1 Setting ( F228 ) for further information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F229
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F230
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 100
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F231
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Maximum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 121
PG Input Point 1 Setting
Program
Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the PG input terminal of the option board when a shaft-mounted encoder is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode.
Note:
See PG Option Board Instruction Manual P/N 58687 for more information.
Direct Access Number — F234
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 100.0
Units — %
Frequency Settings
PG Input Speed Control Setup
Perform the following setup to allow the system to receive Speed control input at the PG input terminal:
• Program
Fundamental Standard Mode Selection Frequency Mode
1
Pulse Input (option).
• Program
Fundamental Standard Mode Selection Command Mode
Selection
(any setting).
• Provide a Run command (F and/or R).
Speed Control
Perform the following setup to allow the system to perform Speed control from the PG input terminals:
• Set PG Point 1 Frequency ( F235 ).
• Set the PG input value ( F234 ) that represents PG Point 1 Frequency.
• Set PG Point 2 Frequency ( F237 ).
• Set the PG input value ( F236 ) that represents PG Point 2 Frequency.
Once set, as the PG input pulse count rate changes, the output frequency of the drive will vary in accordance with the above settings.
This parameter sets the PG input pulse count that represents Reference
Setpoint 1 (frequency). The range of values for this parameter is 0% to 100% of the PG input pulse count range.
Note:
Further application-specific PG settings may be performed from the following path: Program
Feedback PG Settings
PG Input Point 1 Frequency
Program
Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the speed of the PG input terminals when the PG terminal is used as the control input.
This parameter sets PG Point 1 Frequency and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of PG Point 1 Setting.
) for further information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F235
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
122 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
PG Input Point 2 Setting
Program
Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the direction and speed of the PG input terminals when the PG terminals are used as the control input.
This parameter sets the PG input signal that is associated with PG Point 2
Frequency.
This value is entered as 0% to 100% of the PG input signal range.
) for further information on this setting.
PG Input Point 2 Frequency
Program
Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to set the direction and speed of the PG input terminals when the PG terminal are used as the control input.
This parameter sets PG Point 2 Frequency and is the frequency that is associated with the setting of PG Point 2 Setting.
) for further information on this setting.
Start Frequency
Program
Special Frequency Control
The output of the drive will remain at 0.0 Hz until the programmed speed value exceeds this setting during startup. Once exceeded during startup, the output frequency of the drive will accelerate to the programmed setting.
Output frequencies below the Start Frequency will not be output from the drive during startup. However, once reaching the Start Frequency, speed values below the Start Frequency may be output from the drive.
If the setting of this parameter results in an over-current condition at startup, reduce the setting of this parameter to a value less than the rated slippage of the motor.
If zero-speed torque is required, set this parameter and F243 to 0.0 Hz.
This setting will override the setting of F244 if this setting has a higher value.
This parameter setting is used during a Jog as the Lower-Limit Frequency
Run Frequency
Program
Special Frequency Control
This parameter establishes a center frequency (Run Frequency) of a frequency band.
Parameter F242 provides a plus-or-minus value for the Run Frequency; thus,
establishing a frequency band.
During acceleration, the drive will not output a signal to the motor until the lower level of the band is reached.
During deceleration, the drive will continue to output the programmed deceleration signal to the motor until the lower level of the band is reached; at which time the output will go to 0.0 Hz.
Direct Access Number — F236
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 100
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F237
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F240
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.10
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F241
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 123
Run Frequency Hysteresis
Program
Special Frequency Control
This parameter provides a plus-or-minus value for the Run Frequency ( F241 )
setting.
End Frequency
Program
Special Frequency Control
This parameter sets the lowest frequency that the drive will recognize during deceleration before the drive goes to 0.00 Hz.
0 Hz Dead Band Signal
Program
Special Special Parameters
This parameter sets an output frequency threshold that, until the commanded frequency surpasses this setting, the ASD will output 0.00 Hz to the motor.
This setting will override the Start Frequency ( F240 ) setting if this setting has
a higher value.
DC Injection Braking Start Frequency
Program
Protection DC Braking
During deceleration this is the frequency at which DC Injection Braking will start.
DC Injection Braking
DC Injection Braking is a braking system used with 3-phase motors. Unlike conventional brakes, there is no physical contact between the rotating shaft and a stationary brake pad or drum. When braking is required, the drive outputs a
DC current that is applied to the windings of the motor to quickly brake the
motor. The braking current stops when the time entered in F252
times out.
The intensity of the DC current used while braking determines how fast the motor will come to a stop and may be set at
. The intensity setting is entered as a percentage of the full load current of the ASD.
DC Injection Braking is also used to preheat the motor or to keep the rotor from spinning freely when the motor is off by providing a pulsating DC current
into the motor at the Carrier Frequency. This feature may be enabled at F254
.
DC Injection Braking Current
Program
Protection DC Braking
This parameter sets the percentage of the rated current of the drive that will be used for DC Injection Braking. A larger load will require a higher setting.
Direct Access Number — F242
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 30.0
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F243
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 30.0
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F244
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 5.00
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F250
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 120.00
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F251
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 50
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 100
Units — %
124 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
DC Injection Braking Time
Program
Protection DC Braking
This parameter setting is used to set the on-time duration of the DC Injection
Braking.
Forward/Reverse DC Injection Braking Priority
Program
Protection DC Braking
This parameter setting determines if DC Injection Braking is to be used during a change in the direction of the motor.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Enabled
Motor Shaft Fixing Control
Program
Protection DC Braking
This parameter Enables/Disables a continuous DC injection at half of the amperage setting of
into a stopped motor. This feature is useful in preheating the motor or to keep the rotor from spinning freely.
Motor Shaft Stationary Control starts after the DC injection brake stops the motor and continues until ST – CC is opened, power is turned off, an
Emergency Off command is received, or this parameter is changed.
Enabling this feature will also require a non-zero entry at
.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Enabled
0 Hz Command Output
Program
Special Special Parameters
This parameter is used to set the go-to-zero method to be used by the ASD in the event that the ASD is commanded to go to 0 Hz.
Settings:
0 — Standard (DC Injection Braking)
1 — 0 Hz Command
Time Limit For Lower-Limit Frequency Operation
Program
Fundamental Frequency Settings
This parameter sets the time that the ASD is allowed to operate below the
Lower-Limit setting before an alarm and subsequent fault is incurred.
Direct Access Number — F252
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 1.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 20.0
Units — Seconds
Direct Access Number — F253
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F254
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F255
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Standard (DC
Injection Braking)
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F256
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 600.0
Units — Seconds
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 125
Jog Frequency
Program
Frequency Jog Settings
This parameter sets the output frequency of the drive during a Jog. Jog is the term used to describe turning the motor on for small increments of time and is used when precise positioning of motor-driven equipment is required.
The Jog function may be initiated from the EOI, remotely via the Terminal
Board, or using Communications (for more information on using
Communications for Jogging, see the Communications Manual P/N 53840).
The Jog function can be activated from zero Hz or from any frequency below the Jog Run Frequency (Jog can only increase the speed). A Jog command will not be recognized when the running frequency is above the Jog Run
Frequency setting. The Jog command has priority over other Run commands and is not limited by the Upper-Limit setting of parameter
.
Jog commands received while running for the opposite direction will follow the
programmed stopping method of F261
until reaching zero Hz and will then ramp to the programmed Jog Frequency and direction.
Direct Access Number — F260
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum —
Setting
Maximum — 20.00
Units — Hz
Jog Setup and Execution
To initiate a Jog Run from the EOI perform the following:
1. Enable the Jog function at
.
2. Set the Command Mode Selection ( F003
) to EOI Keypad.
3. Assign the Jog Run setting to a discrete input terminal (see
).
Note: Any unused discrete input terminal may be used for the Jog
Run setting.
4. Set up a Jog Run Frequency at F260 .
5. Set up a Jog Stop Pattern at F261 .
6. Set the Input Terminal Priority (
) function to Disable to receive
Jog commands from the EOI.
7. Set the Local/Remote key to Local.
8. Activate the Jog Run terminal (from step
command (F or R).
Note: Simultaneous F and R activations will perform as setup at
9. Press the Run key and the ASD will output the frequency setting of F260
for the duration of the activation.
To initiate a Jog Run from the Terminal Board perform the following:
1. Using the setup above, set the Input Terminal Priority (
) function
(from step 6 ) to Enable to receive Jog commands from the Terminal
Board using the Jog Run terminal without regard to the Local/Remote setting.
2. Use the Jog Run terminal of step
3 above to activate the Jog function.
126 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Jog Stop Pattern
Program
Frequency Jog Settings
This parameter sets the stopping method used while operating in the Jog mode.
Note:
This parameter setting is used for the Jog operation only. The
Emergency Off stopping method setting of parameter F603 has
priority over this setting and changes made here do not affect the function or setting of parameter
.
Settings:
0 — Deceleration Stop
1 — Coast Stop
2 — DC Injection Braking Stop
Panel Operation Jog Mode
Program
Frequency Jog Settings
This parameter enables the Jog command to be received from the EOI. When disabled the Jog command received from the EOI is ignored.
Jog commands may also be received from the Terminal Board. Priority as to
which is allowed to override the other is selected at F106 .
The priority selection at
enables the selected source for Jog control and disables the other. The
setting overrides this parameter setting.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Enabled
Direct Access Number — F261
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Deceleration Stop
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F262
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 127
UP/DOWN Frequency (up) Response Time
No Path — Direct Access Only
This parameter functions in conjunction with the parameter settings of
,
,
F268 , and F269 . The purpose of these settings is to setup the ASD
to allow an externally-supplied discrete input signal to control the output frequency of the ASD.
This method uses the discrete input terminal settings UP/DOWN Frequency
(up) and UP/DOWN Frequency (down) to change the ASD speed. Activation of either terminal increases or decreases the output frequency at the Accel 1 or
Decel 1 rates, respectively.
Depending on the Delay setting, the UP/DOWN Frequency (up/down) terminal may perform 1) the increase/decrease function for the duration of activation or 2) the UP/DOWN Frequency (up/down) terminal may act as a momentary contact that loads a new commanded frequency upon activation.
In either case, to activate-and-hold will continue the up or down function until reaching the Upper-Limit Frequency or the Lower-Limit Frequency, respectively. At which point further activation will be ignored.
See
Figure 29 on pg. 130 for more information on the UP/DOWN Frequency
function.
Setup Requirements
F003 — Selects the Command control source; set to Terminal Block.
F004 — Selects the Frequency Control Mode 1 control source; set to
UP/DOWN Frequency.
F207 — Selects the Frequency Control Mode 2 control source; set to
UP/DOWN Frequency if used.
Set one unused discrete input terminal to UP/DOWN Frequency (up) and one unused discrete input terminal to UP/DOWN Frequency (down).
F264 — Sets the system-response delay to the initial activation of the discrete
input terminal UP/DOWN Frequency (up). Also sets the response delay of subsequent terminal activations of the UP/DOWN Frequency (up) terminal during an activate-and-hold.
F265 —Sets the frequency increase amount for each activation of the UP/
DOWN Frequency (up) terminal activation. The rate of the frequency
increase is set at Acceleration Time 1 ( F009 ).
F266 — Sets the system-response delay to the initial activation of the discrete
input terminal UP/DOWN Frequency (down). Also sets the activation delay of subsequent terminal activations of the UP/DOWN Frequency (down) terminal during an activate-and-hold.
F267 —Sets the frequency decrease amount for each activation of the UP/
DOWN Frequency (down) terminal activation. The rate of the frequency
decrease is set at Deceleration Time 1 ( F010 ).
— At power up or after a reset, this parameter setting is used to provide a starting frequency for the UP/DOWN Frequency function.
F269 — At power down while running, and when enabled, this parameter
writes the running frequency into the
F268 location and, upon a system
restart, uses this setting as the startup frequency.
Provide a Run command (F or R). The motor will run at the
Direct Access Number — F264
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.1
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 10.0
Units — Seconds
Up/Down Frequency (up) Mode
Up/Down Frequency (down) Mode
128 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
UP/DOWN Frequency (up) Frequency Step
No Path — Direct Access Only
This parameter sets the frequency increase amount for each activation of the
UP/DOWN Frequency (up) terminal activation. The rate of the frequency increase is set at Acceleration Time 1 (
).
See
F264 for more information on this parameter.
UP/DOWN Frequency (down) Response Time
No Path — Direct Access Only
This parameter sets the system-response delay to the initial activation of the discrete input terminal UP/DOWN Frequency (down). Also sets the activation delay of subsequent terminal activations of the UP/DOWN Frequency (down) terminal during an activate-and-hold.
See
F264 for more information on this parameter.
UP/DOWN Frequency (down) Frequency Step
No Path — Direct Access Only
This parameter sets the frequency decrease amount for each activation of the
UP/DOWN Frequency (down) terminal activation. The rate of the frequency decrease is set at Deceleration Time 1 (
See
F264 for more information on this parameter.
Initial UP/DOWN Frequency
No Path — Direct Access Only
At power up or after a reset, this parameter setting is used to provide a starting frequency for the UP/DOWN Frequency function.
See
F269 for more information on this parameter setting.
Initial UP/DOWN Frequency Rewriting
No Path — Direct Access Only
At power down, and when enabled, this parameter writes the running frequency
into the F268 location and, upon a system restart, uses this setting as the startup
frequency.
Disable this parameter and set parameter F268 to the desired startup frequency
if the same starting frequency is required at each startup.
Note:
This parameter setting may be different at each startup when enabled.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Enabled (Overwrite F268 at Power Off or Reset)
Direct Access Number — F265
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.10
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F266
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.1
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 10.0
Units — Seconds
Direct Access Number — F267
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.10
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F268
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
)
Maximum — Upper Limit (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F269
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Enabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 129
Figure 29. Up/Down Frequency Operation Control Timing Diagram.
Jump Frequency 1
Program
Special Jump Frequencies
In conjunction with parameter F271 , this parameter establishes a user-defined
frequency range: the Jump Frequency and a plus-or-minus value.
During acceleration, the output frequency of the drive will hold at the lower level of the Jump Frequency range until the programmed acceleration ramp reaches the upper level of the Jump Frequency range. At which time the output frequency of the drive will accelerate to the upper level of the Jump
Frequency range and continue upward as programmed.
During deceleration, the output frequency of the drive will hold at the upper level of the Jump Frequency range until the programmed deceleration ramp reaches the lower level of the Jump Frequency range. At which time the output frequency of the drive will decelerate to the lower level of the Jump
Frequency range and continue downward as programmed.
Once set up and enabled, it is on in all control modes.
User-selected frequencies may be jumped to avoid the negative effects of mechanical resonance.
Direct Access Number — F270
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
130 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Jump Frequency 1 Bandwidth
Program
Special Jump Frequencies
This parameter establishes a plus-or-minus value for Jump Frequency 1 (see
Jump Frequency 2
Program
Special Jump Frequencies
Same as Jump Frequency 1 ( F270
) and is used when multiple frequencies are
to be jumped (see the plus-or-minus value setting at F273
). When multiple jump frequencies overlap, the system will recognize the lowest and the highest frequencies as one jump range.
Jump Frequency 2 Bandwidth
Program
Special Jump Frequencies
This parameter establishes a plus-or-minus value for Jump Frequency 2
).
Jump Frequency 3
Program
Special Jump Frequencies
Same as Jump Frequency 1 ( F270
) and is used when multiple frequencies are
to be jumped (see the plus-or-minus value setting at F275
).
When multiple jump frequencies overlap, the system will recognize the lowest and the highest frequencies as one jump range.
Jump Frequency 3 Bandwidth
Program
Special Jump Frequencies
This parameter establishes a plus-or-minus value for Jump Frequency 3
).
Preset Speed 8
Program
Frequency Preset Speeds
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1000 and is identified as Preset Speed 8. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for more information on
this parameter).
Direct Access Number — F271
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 30.00
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F272
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F273
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 30.0
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F274
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F275
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 30.0
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F287
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
)
Maximum — Upper Limit (
Units — Hz
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 131
Preset Speed 9
Program
Frequency Preset Speeds
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1001 and is identified as Preset Speed 9. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for more information on
this parameter).
Preset Speed 10
Program
Frequency Preset Speeds
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1010 and is identified as Preset Speed 10. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for more information on
this parameter).
Preset Speed 11
Program
Frequency Preset Speeds
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1011 and is identified as Preset Speed 11. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for more information on
this parameter).
Preset Speed 12
Program
Frequency Preset Speeds
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1100 and is identified as Preset Speed 12. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for more information on
this parameter).
Preset Speed 13
Program
Frequency Preset Speeds
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1101 and is identified as Preset Speed 13. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for more information on
this parameter).
Preset Speed 14
Program
Frequency Preset Speeds
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1110 and is identified as Preset Speed 14. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for more information on
this parameter).
Direct Access Number — F288
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
)
Maximum — Upper Limit (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F289
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
)
Maximum — Upper Limit (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F290
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
)
Maximum — Upper Limit (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F291
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
)
Maximum — Upper Limit (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F292
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
)
Maximum — Upper Limit (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F293
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
)
Maximum — Upper Limit (
Units — Hz
132 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Preset Speed 15
Program
Frequency Preset Speeds
This parameter assigns an output frequency to binary number 1111 and is identified as Preset Speed 15. The binary number is applied to S1 – S4 of the
Terminal Board to output the Preset Speed (see F018 for more information on
this parameter).
PWM Carrier Frequency
Program
Special Carrier Frequency
This parameter sets the frequency of the pulse width modulation signal applied to the motor.
Note:
When operating in the Vector Control mode the carrier frequency should be set to 2.2 kHz or above
.
Note:
If the PWM carrier frequency is set at 2.0 kHz or above, it cannot be decreased below 2.0 kHz while running. If the PWM carrier frequency is set at 1.9 kHz or below, it cannot be increased above
2.0 kHz while running. Either change requires that the ASD be stopped and restarted for the changes to take effect.
Auto Restart Selection
Program
Protection Retry/Restart
This parameter Enables/Disables the ability of the drive to start into a spinning motor when the ST – CC connection opens momentarily and is then closed
(Break/Make ST) or after a power interruption (momentary power failure).
Settings:
0 — Off
1 — Enabled (At Power Failure)
2 — Enabled (At Make-Break ST-CC)
3 — Enabled (At Make-Break ST-CC or Power Failure)
4 — Enabled (At Run)
Direct Access Number — F294
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
)
Maximum — Upper Limit (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F300
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 2.200
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 1.0
Maximum — (ASD-Dependent)
Units — kHz
Direct Access Number — F301
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Off
Changeable During Run — No
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 133
Regenerative Power Ridethrough Mode
Program
Protection Under-Voltage/Ridethrough
This parameter determines the motor-control response of the drive in the event of a momentary power outage or under-voltage condition.
During a Ridethrough, regenerative energy is used to maintain the control circuitry settings for the duration of the Ridethrough; it is not used to drive the motor. The motor(s) of the system are stopped and then restarted automatically if so configured.
In a multiple-motor application, there will be a requirement to synchronize the stopping and restarting of the motors as not to cause breakage in the product being processed by the motors stopping/starting at different times (e.g., wire
spools, bobbin winder for textile machines, etc.). Parameters F317 and
must be setup to synchronize motor operation as to avoid breakage in these types of applications.
Note:
If used to restart the motors, the Retry setup of F301 is required.
Note:
The Jog function will not operate while in the Synchronized
Decel/Accel mode.
Settings:
0 — Off
1 — Ridethrough On
2 — Decel Stop
3 — Synchronized ACC/DEC (TB)
4 — Synchronized ACC/DEC (TB + Power Off)
Direct Access Number — F302
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Off
Changeable During Run — Yes
Ridethrough Setup Requirements
1.
Select the Ridethrough Mode at F302 .
2.
Select the Ridethrough Time at F310 .
3.
Select the Synchronized Stop/Start Times at
Note:
F318 are not functional while operating in the Torque
or Position control modes, or for the Jog Run function ( F260 ).
4.
Set a discrete input terminal to Power Failure Synchronized Signal and activate the terminal to enable the Synchronized Accel/Decel function.
5.
Select the Ridethrough Control Level at
.
134 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Retry Selection
Program
Protection Retry/Restart
After a trip has occurred, this parameter sets the number of times that an automatic system restart is attempted for a qualified trip.
The trip conditions listed below will not initiate the automatic Retry/Restart function:
• Input Phase Loss (Input Phase Failure)
• Output Phase Loss (Output Phase Failure)
• Output Current Protection Fault
• Output Current Detector error
• Load Side Over-Current at Start
• Earth Fault (Ground Fault)
• Over-Current During Acceleration
• Arm Over-Current at start-up
• DBR Resistor Over-Current
• Low-Current
• Voltage Drop In Main Circuit
• EEPROM Data Fault (EEPROM Fault)
• Flash Memory/Gate Array/RAM-ROM Fault
• CPU Fault
• Emergency Off (EMG)
• Communication Error
• Option Fault
• Sink/Source Setting Error
• Over-Speed Error
• Over-Torque
• Key Error
• External Thermal Error
• Externally-Controlled Interrupt
See the section titled
System Setup Requirements on pg. 8
for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F303
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 00
Maximum — 10
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 135
Dynamic Braking
Program
Protection Dynamic Braking
This parameter Enables/Disables the Dynamic Braking system.
Settings:
0 — Off
1 — On with Overload Detection
2 — On without Overload Detection
Dynamic Braking uses the transistor IGBT7 to dissipate the bus voltage when required.
IGBT7 is a standard item on the 25 HP and below G9 ASD 230-volt systems and is standard on the 400 HP and below for the for the 460-volt systems.
IGBT7 is optional for all remaining systems.
Dynamic Braking
Dynamic Braking is used to prevent over-voltage faults during rapid deceleration or constant speed run on cyclic overhauling applications.
Dynamic Braking dissipates regenerated energy in the form of heat. When using a DBR use thermal protection.
The resistive load is connected across terminals PA and PB (non-polarized).
Using a low-value, high-wattage resistance as a load for the generated current, the resistive load dissipates the induced energy.
Dynamic Braking helps to slow the load quickly; it cannot act as a holding brake.
The Dynamic Braking function may be setup and enabled by connecting a braking resistor from terminal PA to PB of the drive and providing the proper
, and
See the section titled Dynamic Braking Resistor Wire/Cable Specifications on pg. 267
for more information on using the DBR system and for assistance in selecting the appropriate resistor for a given application.
Over-Voltage Limit Operation
Program
Protection Stall
This parameter enables the Over-Voltage Limit function. This feature is used to set the upper DC bus voltage threshold that, once exceeded, will cause an
Over-Voltage Stall.
An Over-Voltage Stall increases the output frequency of the drive during deceleration for a specified time in an attempt to prevent an Over-Voltage
Trip.
If the over-voltage threshold level setting of parameter
is exceeded for over 4 mS, an Over-Voltage Trip will be incurred.
Note:
This parameter setting may increase deceleration times.
Settings:
0 — Enabled (Over-Voltage Stall)
1 — Disabled
2 — Enabled (Forced Shorted Deceleration)
3 — Enabled (Forced Dynamic Braking Deceleration)
Direct Access Number — F304
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Off
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F305
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — (ASD-Dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
136 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Supply Voltage Correction
Program
Protection Base Frequency Voltage
This parameter Enables/Disables the Voltage Compensation function.
When Enabled, this function provides a constant V/f ratio during periods of input voltage fluctuations.
Settings:
0 — Disabled (Output Voltage Unlimited)
1 — Enabled (Supply Voltage Compensation)
2 — Disabled (Output Voltage Limited)
3 — Enabled (Supply Voltage Compensation w/Output Voltage Limited)
Dynamic Braking Resistance
Program
Protection Dynamic Braking
This parameter is used to input the resistive value of the Dynamic Braking
Resistor being used.
Light-duty and heavy-duty resistors vary from a few ohms to several hundred ohms. The appropriate resistance size will be typeform- and applicationspecific.
See the section titled Dynamic Braking Resistor Wire/Cable Specifications on pg. 267
for more information on using the DBR system and for assistance in selecting the appropriate resistor for a given application.
Note:
Using a resistor value that is too low may result in system damage.
Continuous Dynamic Braking Capacity
Program
Protection Dynamic Braking
This parameter is used to input the wattage of the Dynamic Braking Resistor.
See the section titled Dynamic Braking Resistor Wire/Cable Specifications on pg. 267
for more information on using the DBR system.
Note:
Using a resistor with a wattage rating that is too low may result in system damage.
Ridethrough Time
Program
Protection Retry/Restart
In the event of a momentary power outage, this parameter determines the length of the Ridethrough time.
The Ridethrough will be maintained for the number of seconds set using this parameter.
See parameter F302 for more information on the Ridethrough function.
Note:
The actual Ridethrough Time is load-dependent.
Direct Access Number — F307
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F308
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-Dependent)
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.5
Maximum — 1000.0
Units —
Direct Access Number — F309
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-Dependent)
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.01
Maximum — 600.00
Units — kW
Direct Access Number — F310
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 2.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 320.0
Units — Seconds
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 137
Forward Run/Reverse Run Disable
Program
Frequency Forward/Reverse Disable
This parameter Enables/Disables the Forward Run or Reverse Run mode.
If either direction is disabled, commands received for the disabled direction will not be recognized.
If both directions are disabled, the received direction command will determine the direction of the motor rotation.
Settings:
0 — Off
1 — Disable Reverse Run
2 — Disable Forward Run
Random Mode
Program
Protection Retry/Restart
This parameter adjusts the carrier frequency randomly. This feature is effective in minimizing the negative effects of mechanical resonance.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Enabled
Carrier Frequency Control Mode
Program
Special Carrier Frequency
This parameter provides for the automatic decrease of the carrier frequency.
Select 1 to decrease the Carrier Frequency setting as a function of an increased current requirement.
Selection 2 or 3 may also include an output voltage drop as a function of an increased current requirement. The Carrier Frequency should be set below
4 kHz.
Settings:
0 — No Decrease and No Limit
1 — Valid Decrease and No Limit
2 — No Decrease and Limit Small Pulse
4 — Valid Decrease and Limit Small Pulse
Synchronized Deceleration Time
No Path — Direct Access Only
In the event that the Ridethrough function activates in a multiple-motor application it will be necessary to manage the stopping motors synchronously as not to damage the product being processed (e.g., wire spools, bobbin winder for textile machines, etc.).
This parameter is used to minimize the product breakage during a momentary power outage. This function stops multiple machines simultaneously or makes them reach their respective command frequencies simultaneously by regulating their deceleration times.
See parameter F302 for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F311
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Off
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F312
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F316
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Valid Decrease and
No Limit
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F317
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 2.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000.0
Units — Seconds
138 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Synchronized Acceleration Time
No Path — Direct Access Only
In the event that the Ridethrough function activates in a multiple-motor application it will be necessary to manage the accelerating motors synchronously as not to damage the product being processed (e.g., wire spools, bobbin winder for textile machines, etc.).
This parameter is used to minimize the product breakage during a momentary power outage. This function orchestrates the acceleration of multiple machines simultaneously or makes them reach their respective command frequencies simultaneously by regulating their acceleration times.
See parameter F302 for more information on this setting.
Drooping Gain
Program
Feedback Drooping Control
This parameter sets the effective 100% output torque level while operating in the Drooping Control mode. This value is the upper torque limit of the motor being driven by a given ASD while operating in the Drooping Control mode.
Note:
The maximum frequency output is not limited by the setting of
F011 while operating in the Drooping Control mode.
Drooping
Drooping Control, also called Load Share, is used to share the load among two or more mechanically coupled motors. Unlike Stall, which reduces the output frequency in order to limit the load once the load reaches a preset level,
Drooping can decrease or increase the V/f setting of a motor to maintain a balance between the output torque levels of mechanically coupled motors.
Because of variances in gearboxes, sheaves, belts, motors, and since the speed of the motor is constrained by the mechanical system, one motor may experience more load than its counterpart and may become overloaded.
Drooping Control allows the overloaded motor to slow down, thus shedding load and encouraging a lightly-loaded motor to pick up the slack. The goal of
Drooping Control is to have the same torque ratios for mechanically coupled motors.
Speed at 0% Drooping Gain
Program
Feedback Drooping Control
This parameter sets the motor speed when at the 0% output torque gain while operating in the Drooping Control mode. This function determines the lowest speed that Drooping will be in effect for motors that share the same load.
Program
Feedback Drooping Control
This parameter sets the motor speed when at the 100% output torque gain while operating in the Drooping Control mode. This function determines the speed of the individual motors at the 100% Drooping Gain setting for motors that share the same load.
Direct Access Number — F318
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 2.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.10
Maximum — 6000.0
Units — Seconds
Direct Access Number — F320
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 100.0
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F321
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 320.0
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F322
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 320.0
Units — Hz
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 139
Drooping Insensitive Torque
Program
Feedback Drooping Control
This parameter defines a torque range in which the Drooping Control settings will be ignored and the programmed torque settings will be followed.
Drooping Output Filter
Program
Feedback Drooping Control
This parameter is used to set the rate of output change allowed when operating in the Drooping Control mode.
Jerky operation may be reduced by increasing this setting.
Light-Load High-Speed Operation
Program
Special Crane/Hoist Settings
This parameter enables the Light-Load High-Speed function by selecting an operating mode. The Light-Load High-Speed function accelerates the output frequency of the ASD from the programmed speed to the setting established in
This parameter may be disabled.
Enabling the Light-Load High-Speed function requires that an operating mode be selected here, and that the criteria of parameters
–
Settings:
0 — Off
1 — Auto Speed (F-Motor: Up, R-Generator:Down)
2 — Auto Speed (F-Generator: Down, R-Motor:Up)
3 — F330 Setting (F-Motor: Up, R-Generator:Down)
4 — F330 Setting (F-Generator: Down, R-Motor:Up)
Light-Load High-Speed Learning Function
Program
Special Crane/Hoist Settings
The Light-Load High-Speed function accelerates the output frequency of the
ASD from the programmed speed to the setting established in F330 and is
primarily used with Crane/Hoist functions.
During Light-Load High-Speed operation with this parameter enabled,
parameters Panel Torque Bias ( F343 ), Creep Frequency ( F346
), and the
Creep Time (
F347 ) are set to a standard set of light-load profile values.
Application-specific adjustments may be required.
Note:
This function should be setup with a light load only.
Settings:
0 — Off
1 — Forward/Reverse
2 — Forward Only
Direct Access Number — F323
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 10.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 100.0
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F324
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 200.0
Units — Radians/Second
Direct Access Number — F328
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Off
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F329
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Off
Changeable During Run — No
140 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Automatic Light-Load High-Speed Operation Frequency
Program
Special Crane/Hoist Settings
This parameter establishes the speed that the ASD will ramp to when operating in the Light-Load High-Speed mode.
Light-Load High-Speed Operation Switching Lower-Limit
Frequency
Program
Special Crane/Hoist Settings
This parameter sets an output frequency threshold that, once surpassed, allows the Light-Load High-Speed function to be used.
The Light-Load High-Speed function may be used if the frequency threshold set at this parameter and the following conditions are met:
1) Light-Load High-Speed Operation Enable is configured at F328 .
2) The output torque is less than the setting established in F335
when reaching the frequency setting here.
Light-Load High-Speed Operation Load Wait Time
Program
Special Crane/Hoist Settings
This parameter determines the length of time that the load requirement must meet the Light-Load High-Speed criteria before the Light-Load High-Speed
Enable ( F328 ) is recognized.
Once recognized, the timer setting of F333 must expire to engage the Light-
Load High-Speed function.
Light-Load High-Speed Operation Detection Time
Program
Special Crane/Hoist Settings
After the time setting of F332 times out, this parameter determines the length of
time that the Light-Load High-Speed criteria must be met until the Light-
Load High-Speed function engages.
Light-Load High-Speed Operation Heavy-Load Detection
Time
Program
Special Crane/Hoist Settings
While operating in the Light-Load High-Speed mode, this parameter determines the length of time that a load exceeding the Light-Load High-
Speed operation criteria may exist before the Light-Load High-Speed mode is terminated and normal operation resumes.
Direct Access Number — F330
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.00
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 30.00
Maximum — Upper Limit (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F331
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 40.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 30.0
Maximum — Upper Limit (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F332
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.5
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 10.0
Units — Seconds
Direct Access Number — F333
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 1.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 10.0
Units — Seconds
Direct Access Number — F334
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.5
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 10.0
Units — Seconds
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 141
Switching Load Torque During Power Running
Program
Special Crane/Hoist Settings
During power running, this parameter establishes the threshold torque level that is used to determine if the Light-Load High-Speed (
) operation may engage or remain engaged if active.
If the Light-Load High-Speed operation is terminated normal operation resumes.
Note:
Power running may be during forward, reverse, acceleration, or deceleration, but not during regeneration.
Heavy-Load Torque During Power Running
Program
Special Crane/Hoist Settings
During power running, this parameter establishes the threshold torque level that is used to determine if the Light-Load High-Speed (
) operation may engage or remain engaged if active.
If the Light-Load High-Speed operation is terminated normal operation resumes.
Heavy-Load Torque During Constant Power Running
Program
Special Crane/Hoist Settings
During constant power running, this parameter establishes the threshold torque level that is used to determine if the Light-Load High-Speed (
) operation may engage or remain engaged if active.
If the Light-Load High-Speed operation is terminated normal operation resumes.
Switching Load Torque During Regenerative Braking
Program
Special Crane/Hoist Settings
During regenerative braking, this parameter establishes the threshold torque level that is used to determine if the Light-Load High-Speed (
) operation may engage or remain engaged if active.
If the Light-Load High-Speed operation is terminated normal operation resumes.
Braking Mode Selection
Program
Torque Torque Control
This parameter is primarily used with lifting systems to allow for enough torque to be produced after receiving a Run command before releasing the brake.
Without this feature the load would drop for a period once the brake was released.
This parameter enables this function by setting the system operating mode.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Forward Direction
2 — Reverse Direction
3 — Same Direction
Direct Access Number — F335
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 50.00
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — -250.00
Maximum — +250.00
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F336
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -250.00
Maximum — +250.00
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F337
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 50.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -250.00
Maximum — +250.00
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F338
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 50.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -250.00
Maximum — +250.00
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F341
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
142 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Torque Bias Input Selection
Program
Torque Torque Control
Once enabled at parameter F302
, this parameter sets the source of the input signal that will set the torque level used to provide the Braking Mode
Selection function of parameter F302 .
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — VI/II (V/I)
2 — RR
3 — RX
4 — Panel Keypad
5 — RS485 2-Wire
6 — RS485 4-Wire
7 — Communication Option Board
8 — RX2 (AI1)
Panel Torque Bias
Program
Torque Torque Control
Once enabled at parameter F302
, this parameter establishes the torque bias
setting to which the setting of F302
will either add to or subtract from to produce the final torque value used to carry out the Braking Mode Selection
Direct Access Number — F342
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
Panel Torque Gain
Program
Torque Torque Control
Once enabled at parameter F302
, this parameter sets the sensitivity of the
torque control source selected at F302 for the Braking Mode Selection function of parameter F302 .
Release Time
Program
Torque Torque Control
Once enabled at parameter F302 , this parameter sets the time that the brake will
hold after the requirements of the Braking Mode Selection function of
Creeping Frequency
Program
Torque Torque Control
Once enabled at parameter F302
, and while running, upon receiving a Stop command this parameter sets an output frequency to be provided for the
duration of the time setting of parameter F302 .
Direct Access Number — F343
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -250.00
Maximum — +250.00
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F344
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 100.00
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F345
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.05
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 2.50
Units — Seconds
Direct Access Number — F346
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 3.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum —
Setting
Maximum — 20.0
Units — Hz
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 143
Creeping Time
Program
Torque Torque Control
Once the Creep function of
F346 is activated, this parameter determines the
duration of activation of the Creep function.
Braking Time Learning Function
Program
Torque Torque Control
This parameter is used to establish approximate settings for parameters F343
,
, and
.
Note:
Setting this parameter should be done using a light load only.
Set this parameter to Brake Signal Learning. Provide a Run command. The aforementioned parameters will receive approximate values. Applicationspecific adjustments may be required when done.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Enabled
Accel/Decel Suspend
Program
Fundamental Accel/Decel 1 Settings
To maintain a constant speed setting while running, this parameter may be used to suspend speed changes for a user-set length of time.
The Accel/Decel Suspend function is enabled by setting this parameter to either Terminal Board Input or to
–
.
Selecting Terminal Board Input at this parameter requires that a discrete input
terminal be set to Dwell Signal (see Table 5 on pg. 234 for a listing of available
settings). Upon activation of the Dwell Signal terminal the output frequency remains at the at-activation speed for the duration of the activation. When deactivated the programmed accel or decel ramp resumes.
Selecting F350 – F353 at this parameter requires that the acceleration and/or the
deceleration Suspend Frequency and Suspend Time settings be completed at
,
F352 , and F353 . Upon reaching the frequency setting of F350
(Decel), the Accel/Decel ramp will cease and the output frequency will hold at the threshold frequency setting for the time setting of
F351 for acceleration or F353 for deceleration.
Settings:
0 — Off
Settings
2 — Terminal Board Input
Direct Access Number — F347
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.10
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 2.50
Units — Seconds
Direct Access Number — F348
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F349
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Off
Changeable During Run — Yes
144 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Acceleration Suspend Frequency
Program
Fundamental Accel/Decel 1 Settings
When Enabled at
F349 , this parameter is used to set the frequency at which the
Acceleration Suspend function will activate.
During acceleration, this parameter sets the frequency at which acceleration will stop and the motor will run at the setting of this parameter for the time setting of
Acceleration Suspend Time
Program
Fundamental Accel/Decel 1 Settings
When Enabled at F349 , this parameter is used to set the duration of activation
of the Acceleration Suspend function when initiated by reaching the
Acceleration Suspend Frequency setting ( F350
).
Once this parameter times out the acceleration rate will resume from the point of suspension.
Deceleration Suspend Frequency
Program
Fundamental Accel/Decel 1 Settings
When Enabled at
F349 , this parameter is used to set the frequency at which the
Deceleration Suspend function will activate.
During deceleration, this parameter sets the frequency at which deceleration will stop and the motor will run at the setting of this parameter for the time setting of
Deceleration Suspend Time
Program
Fundamental Accel/Decel 1 Settings
When Enabled at F349 , this parameter is used to set the duration of activation
of the Deceleration Suspend function when initiated by reaching the
Deceleration Suspend Frequency setting ( F352
).
Once this parameter times out the deceleration rate will resume from the point of suspension.
Direct Access Number — F350
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F351
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 10.0
Units — Seconds
Direct Access Number — F352
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F353
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 10.0
Units — Seconds
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 145
Commercial Power/ASD Output Switching
Program
Terminal Line Power Switching
This parameter Enables/Disables the Commercial Power/ASD Output
Switching function.
When enabled, the system may be set up to discontinue using the output of the drive and to switch to the commercial power in the event that 1) a trip is incurred, 2) a user-set frequency is reached, or 3) if initiated by a discrete input terminal.
Once set up with the proper switching frequency and hold times, the system will switch to commercial power upon reaching the
frequency criterion.
Switching may also be accomplished manually by activating the discrete input terminal Commercial Power ASD Switching. Terminal activation forces the
ASD output speed to accelerate to the F355
switching frequency, resulting in the ASD-to-commercial power switching.
Deactivation of the discrete input terminal starts the hold-time counter setting
) for ASD-to-commercial power switching. Once timed out the motor resumes normal commercial power operation.
Settings:
0 — Off
1 — Switch at Signal Input and Trip
2 — Switch at Signal Input with Switching Frequency
3 — Switch at Signal Input and Trip with Switching Frequency
Switching Setup Requirements
— Enable the switching function.
— Set the switching frequency.
— (Speed) Hold -time before applying ASD output after the
switching criteria has been met.
— (Speed) Hold -time before applying commercial power after the switching criteria has been met.
— (Speed) Hold -time of applying commercial power after the switching criteria has been met.
Set a discrete input terminal to Commercial Power ASD Switching.
Set OUT1 and OUT2 to Commercial Power/ASD Switching 1 and 2, respectively.
Note:
Ensure that the switching directions are the same and that
is set to Permit All.
Note:
The OUT1 and OUT2 outputs assigned to Commercial Power/
ASD Switching Output are used to actuate the re-routing contactors.
Direct Access Number — F354
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Off
Changeable During Run — No
146 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Commercial Power/ASD Switching Frequency
Program
Terminal Line Power Switching
When enabled at F354 and with a properly configured discrete output terminal,
this parameter sets the frequency at which the At Frequency Powerline
Switching function engages.
The At Frequency Powerline Switching function commands the system to discontinue using the output of the drive and to switch to commercial power once reaching the frequency set here.
See parameter F354 for more information on this setting.
ASD-Side Switching Wait Time
Program
Terminal Line Power Switching
This parameter determines the amount of time that the drive will wait before outputting a signal to the motor once the switch-to-drive-output criteria has been met.
See parameter F354 for more information on this setting.
Commercial Power Switching Wait Time
Program
Terminal Line Power Switching
This parameter determines the amount of time that the drive will wait before allowing commercial power to be applied to the motor once the switch-tocommercial-power criteria has been met.
See parameter F354 for more information on this setting.
Commercial Power Switching Freq. Hold Time
Program
Terminal Line Power Switching
This parameter determines the amount of time that the connection to commercial power is maintained once the switch-to-drive-output criteria has been met.
See parameter F354 for more information on this setting.
PID Control Switching
Program
Feedback Feedback Settings
This parameter is used to set the PID control mode.
Selecting Process PID uses the upper and Lower-Limit settings of parameters
Selecting Speed PID uses the upper and Lower-Limit settings of parameters
Settings:
0 — PID Off
1 — Process PID
2 — Speed PID
3 — Easy Positioning PID (Not Used with the G9 ASD)
Direct Access Number — F355
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F356
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-Dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.10
Maximum — 10.00
Units — Seconds
Direct Access Number — F357
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.62
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — (ASD-Dependent)
Maximum — 10.00
Units — Seconds
Direct Access Number — F358
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 2.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.10
Maximum — 10.00
Units — Seconds
Direct Access Number — F359
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — PID Off
Changeable During Run — No
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 147
PID Feedback Signal
Program
Feedback Feedback Settings
This parameter Enables/Disables PID feedback control. When enabled, this parameter determines the source of the motor-control feedback.
Settings:
0 — PID Control Disabled
1 — VI/II (V/I)
2 — RR
3 — RX
4 — RX2 (AI1)
5 — Option V/I
6 — PG Feedback Option
Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) — A closed-loop control technique that seeks error minimization by reacting to three values: One that is proportional to the error, one that is representative of the error, and one that is representative of the rate of change of the error.
PID Feedback Delay Filter
Program
Feedback Feedback Settings
This parameter determines the delay in the ASD output response to the motor-
control feedback signal (signal source is selected at F360 ).
Direct Access Number — F360
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — PID Control
Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
PID Feedback Proportional (P) Gain
Program
Feedback Feedback Settings
This parameter determines the degree that the Proportional function affects the output signal. The larger the value entered here, the quicker the drive responds to changes in feedback.
PID Feedback Integral (I) Gain
Program
Feedback Feedback Settings
This parameter determines the degree that the Integral function affects the output signal. The smaller the value here, the more pronounced the effect of the integral function on the output signal.
PID Deviation Upper-Limit
Program
Feedback Feedback Settings
This parameter determines the maximum amount that the feedback may increase the output signal.
Direct Access Number — F361
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.1
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 25.0
Direct Access Number — F362
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.10
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.01
Maximum — 100.0
Direct Access Number — F363
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.10
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.01
Maximum — 100.00
Direct Access Number — F364
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 60.00
Units — Hz
148 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
PID Deviation Lower-Limit
Program
Feedback Feedback Settings
This parameter determines the maximum amount that the feedback may decrease the output signal.
PID Feedback Differential (D) Gain
Program
Feedback Feedback Settings
This parameter determines the degree that the Differential function affects the output signal. The larger the value entered here, the more pronounced the affect of the differential function for a given feedback signal level.
Process Upper-Limit
Program
Feedback Feedback Settings
Selecting Process PID at parameter F359 allows for this parameter setting to
function as the Upper-Limit while operating in the PID Control mode.
Process Lower-Limit
Program
Feedback Feedback Settings
Selecting Process PID at parameter F359 allows for this parameter setting to
function as the Lower-Limit while operating in the PID Control mode.
PID Control Wait Time
Program
Feedback Feedback Settings
This parameter is used to delay the start of PID control at start up. During the wait time set here, the ASD will follow the frequency control input of the process value and the feedback input will be ignored until this setting times out.
At which time the PID setup assumes control.
PID Output Upper-Limit
Program
Feedback Feedback Settings
Selecting Speed PID at parameter F359
allows for this parameter setting to function as the Upper-Limit while operating in the PID Control mode.
Direct Access Number — F365
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 60.00
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F366
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 2.55
Direct Access Number — F367
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.00
Changeable During Run — No
)
Maximum — Upper Limit (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F368
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — No
)
Maximum — Upper Limit (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F369
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 2400
Units — Seconds
Direct Access Number — F370
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.00
Changeable During Run — No
)
Maximum — Upper Limit (
Units — Hz
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 149
PID Output Lower-Limit
Program
Feedback Feedback Settings
Selecting Speed PID at parameter F359
allows for this parameter setting to function as the Lower-Limit while operating in the PID Control mode.
Process Increasing Rate
Program
Feedback Feedback Settings
This parameter is used to limit the rate that the output of the ASD may increase for a given difference in the speed reference and the PID feedback value.
Process Decreasing Rate
Program
Feedback Feedback Settings
This parameter is used to limit the rate that the output of the ASD may decrease for a given difference in the speed reference and the PID feedback value.
Number of PG Input Pulses
Program
Feedback PG Settings
This parameter is used to set the number of pulses output from a shaft-mounted encoder that is used to indicate one revolution of rotation (360°) of the motor or of the motor-driven equipment.
Number of PG Input Phases
Program
Feedback PG Settings
This parameter determines the type of information that is supplied by the phase encoder.
Settings:
1 — Single Phase
2 — Two Phase
Direct Access Number — F371
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 4.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
)
Maximum — Upper Limit (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F372
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 10.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 600.0
Units — Seconds
Direct Access Number — F373
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 10.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 600.0
Units — Seconds
Direct Access Number — F375
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-Dependent)
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 12
Maximum — 9999
Direct Access Number — F376
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — (ASD-Dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
150 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
PG Disconnection Detection
Program
Feedback PG Settings
This parameter Enables/Disables the system’s monitoring of the PG connection status when using encoders with line driver outputs.
Note:
The PG Vector Feedback Board option is required to use this feature.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Enabled with Filter
3 — Enabled (Detect Momentary Power Fail)
Simple Positioning Completion Range
Program
Feedback PG Settings
While operating in the Positioning Control mode, this parameter sets the range of accuracy for a Stop command initiated via the terminal board.
If the setting is too low the stop may be too abrupt.
Autotuning 1
Program
Motor Vector Motor Model
This parameter sets the Autotune command status.
Selecting Reset Motor Defaults for this parameter sets parameters
,
F412 , and F413 to the factory default settings.
If selecting Autotune on Run Command, Autotune Initiated by Input
Terminal, or Autotune of Detail Parameters for this parameter set the Base
Frequency, Base Frequency Voltage, and the Motor Rated Revolutions to the nameplated values of the motor to achieve the best possible Autotune precision.
Settings:
0 — Autotune Disabled
1 — Reset Motor Defaults
2 — Enable Autotune on Run Command
3 — Autotuning by Input Terminal Signal (see Table 5 on pg. 234 )
4 — Motor Constant Auto Calculation
Slip Frequency Gain
Program
Motor Vector Motor Model
This parameter provides a degree of slip compensation for a given load. A higher setting here decreases the slip allowed for a given load/ASD output ratio.
Direct Access Number — F377
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — (ASD-Dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F381
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 4000
Direct Access Number — F400
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Autotune Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F401
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 70
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 150
Units — %
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 151
Autotuning 2
Program
Motor Vector Motor Model
This parameter introduces a thermal element into the autotuning equation and is used to automatically adjust the Autotune parameter values as a function of increases in the temperature of the motor.
Settings:
0 — Off
1 — Self-Cooled Motor Tuning
2 — Forced Air Cooled Motor Tuning
Motor Rated Capacity
Program
Motor Vector Motor Model
This parameter is used to set the (nameplated) rated capacity of the motor being used.
Motor Rated Current
Program
Motor Vector Motor Model
This parameter is used to set the (nameplated) current rating of the motor being used.
Motor Rated RPM
Program
Motor Vector Motor Model
This parameter is used input the (nameplated) rated speed of the motor.
Base Frequency Voltage 1
Program
Vector Vector Motor Model
The Motor 1 Base Frequency Voltage 1 is the Motor 1 output voltage at the
). Regardless of the programmed value, the output voltage cannot be higher than the input voltage.
The actual output voltage will be influenced by the input voltage of the ASD and the Supply Voltage Correction setting (
).
Direct Access Number — F402
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Off
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F405
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 11.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 500.00
Units — kW
Direct Access Number — F406
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 20.3
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 2000.0
Units — Amps
Direct Access Number — F407
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 1730
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 100
Maximum — 60000
Units — RPM
Direct Access Number — F409
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-Dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 50.0
Maximum — 660.0
Units — Volts
152 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Motor Constant 1 (Torque Boost)
Program
Motor Vector Motor Model
This parameter sets the primary resistance of the motor. Increasing this value can prevent a drop in the torque of the motor at low speeds. Increasing this value excessively can result in nuisance overload tripping.
Motor Constant 2 (No-Load Current)
Program
Motor Vector Motor Model
This parameter is used to set the current level required to excite the motor.
Specifying a value that is too high for this parameter may result in hunting
(erratic motor operation).
Motor Constant 3 (Leak Inductance)
Program
Motor Vector Motor Model
This parameter is used to set the leakage inductance of the motor.
A larger setting here results in higher output torque at high speeds.
Motor Constant 4 (Rated Slip)
Program
Motor Vector Motor Model
This parameter is used to set the secondary resistance of the motor.
An increase in this parameter setting results in an increase of compensation for motor slip.
Exciting Strengthening Coefficient
Program
Special Special Parameters
This parameter is used to increase the magnetic flux of the motor at low-speed.
This feature is useful when increased torque at low speeds is required.
Direct Access Number — F410
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-Dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 30.0
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F411
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-Dependent)
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 10
Maximum — 90
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F412
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-Dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 200
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F413
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-Dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.01
Minimum — 25.00
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F415
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 100
Maximum — 130
Units — %
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 153
Stall Prevention Factor 1
Program
Protection Stall
This parameter is to be adjusted in the event that the motor stalls when operated above the base frequency.
If a momentary heavy load occurs the motor may stall before the load current
reaches the stall prevention level setting of F601 .
A drop in the supply voltage may cause fluctuations of the load current or may cause motor vibration. A gradual adjustment of this parameter may alleviate this condition.
Start with a setting of 85 at these parameters and gradually adjust them from there one at a time until the desired results are produced.
Adjustments to this parameter may increase the load current of the motor and subsequently warrant an adjustment at the Motor Overload Protection Level setting.
Torque Command Selection
Program
Torque Torque Control
When operating in the Torque Control mode, this parameter allows the user to select the source of the torque command signal.
Settings:
1 — VI/II (V/I)
2 — RR
3 — RX
Setting)
5 — RS485 2-Wire
6 — RS485 4-Wire
7 — Communication Option Board
8 — RX2 Option (AI1)
Tension Torque Bias Input
Program
Torque Torque Control
This parameter Enables/Disables the Tension Torque Bias input function.
This feature is enabled by selecting a Tension Torque Bias input signal source.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — VI/II (V/I)
2 — RR
3 — RX
4 — Panel Keypad (Not Used)
5 — RS485 2-Wire
6 — RS485 4-Wire
7 — Communication Option Board
8 — RX2 Option (AI1)
Direct Access Number — F416
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 10
Maximum — 250
Direct Access Number — F420
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — RX
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F423
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
154 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Load Sharing Gain Input
Program
Torque Torque Control
This parameter Enables/Disables the Load Sharing Gain input function.
This feature is enabled by selecting a Load Sharing Gain input signal source.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — VI/II (V/I)
2 — RR
3 — RX
4 — Panel Keypad
5 — RS485 2-Wire
6 — RS485 4-Wire
7 — Communication Option Board
8 — RX2 Option (AI1)
Forward Speed Limit Input
Program
Torque Torque Speed Limiting
Direct Access Number — F424
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
This parameter Enables/Disables the Forward Speed Limit Input control function. When enabled and operating in the Torque Control mode, the forward speed limit is controlled by the input selected here.
If Setting is selected, the value set at
F426 is used as the Forward Speed Limit
input.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — VI/II (V/I)
2 — RR
3 — RX
Setting
Forward Speed Limit Level
Program
Torque Torque Control
This parameter provides a value to be used as the Forward Speed Limit setting if
Setting is selected at
Direct Access Number — F425
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F426
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 80.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Upper Limit (
Units — Hz
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 155
Reverse Speed Limit Input
Program
Torque Torque Control
This parameter Enables/Disables the Reverse Speed Limit Input control function. When enabled and operating in the Torque Control mode, the reverse speed limit is controlled by the terminal selected here. If Setting is selected, the
value set at F428 is used as the Reverse Speed Limit input.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — VI/II (V/I)
2 — RR
3 — RX
Reverse Speed Limit Input Level
Program
Torque Torque Control
This parameter provides a value to be used as the Reverse Speed Limit setting if Setting is selected at
.
Direct Access Number — F427
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F428
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 80.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Upper Limit (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F430
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
Speed Limit (torque=0) Center Value Reference
Program
Torque Torque Speed Limiting
The system has the ability to limit the amount that the speed may vary as a function of a changing load while operating in the Torque Control mode. This parameter sets the input terminal that will be used to control the allowable speed variance.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — VI/II (V/I)
2 — RR
3 — RX
Setting
Speed Limit (torque=0) Center Value
Program
Torque Torque Speed Limiting
The system has the ability to limit the amount that the speed may vary as a function of a changing load while operating in the Torque Control mode. This parameter sets the targeted speed. The plus-or-minus value (range) for this
.
Direct Access Number — F431
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
156 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Speed Limit (torque=0) Band
Program
Torque Torque Speed Limiting
The system has the ability to limit the amount that the speed may vary as a function of a changing load while operating in the Torque Control mode. This parameter sets a plus-or-minus value (range) for the Speed Limit Torque
Rotation in Specified Direction ONLY
Program
Torque Torque Speed Limiting
This parameter Enables/Disables the Forward Run or Reverse Run mode.
If either direction is disabled, commands received for the disabled direction will not be recognized.
If both directions are disabled, the received direction command will determine the direction of the motor rotation.
Settings
0 — Disabled
1 — Enabled
Power Running Torque Limit 1
Program
Torque Torque Limit Settings
This parameter determines the source of the control signal for the positive torque limit setting.
If Setting is selected, the value set at
is used as the Power Running
Torque Limit 1 input.
Settings:
1 — VI/II (V/I)
2 — RR
3 — RX
(Setting)
Power Running Torque Limit 1 Level
Program
Torque Torque Limit Settings
This parameter provides a value for the Power Running Torque Limit 1 setting if
F441 Setting is selected at parameter F440
.
This value provides the positive torque Upper-Limit for the 1 motor.
Direct Access Number — F432
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F435
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F440
Parameter Type — Selection List
Setting
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F441
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 250.0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.0 (Disabled)
Units — %
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 157
Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 1
Program
Torque Torque Limit Settings
This parameter determines the source of the Regenerative Torque Limit control signal.
If Setting is selected, the value set at
is used for this parameter.
Settings:
1 — VI/II (V/I)
2 — RR
3 — RX
Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 1 Level
Program
Torque Torque Limit Settings
This parameter provides a value to be used as the Regeneration Torque Limit
1 if
F443 Setting is selected at parameter F442 .
Set this parameter to 250% to disable this function.
Power Running Torque Limit 2 Level
Program
Torque Manual Torque Limit Settings
This parameter is used to set the positive torque Upper-Limit for the 2 motor profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or when a single motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles.
Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 2 Level
Program
Torque Manual Torque Limit Settings
This parameter is used to set the negative torque Upper-Limit for the 2 motor profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or when a single motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles.
Power Running Torque Limit 3 Level
Program
Torque Manual Torque Limit Settings
This parameter is used to set the positive torque Upper-Limit for the 3 motor profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or when a single motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles.
Direct Access Number — F442
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default —
Setting
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F443
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 250.0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 249.9
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F444
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 250.0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.0 (Disabled)
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F445
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 250.0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.0 (Disabled)
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F446
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 250.0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.0 (Disabled)
Units — %
158 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 3 Level
Program
Torque Manual Torque Limit Settings
This parameter is used to set the negative torque Upper-Limit for the 3 motor profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or when a single motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles.
Power Running Torque Limit 4 Level
Program
Torque Manual Torque Limit Settings
This parameter is used to set the positive torque Upper-Limit for the 4 motor profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or when a single motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles.
Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 4 Level
Program
Torque Manual Torque Limit Settings
This parameter is used to set the negative torque Upper-Limit for the 4 motor profile when multiple motors are controlled by a single drive or when a single motor is to be controlled by multiple profiles.
Accel/Decel Operation After Torque Limit
Program
Torque Torque Limit Settings
In a Crane/Hoist application that is operating using a mechanical brake, this parameter is used to minimize the delay between the brake release and the output torque reaching a level that can sustain the load.
This setting may reference time or the operating speed of the motor.
Settings:
0 — In Sync with Accel/Decel
1 — In Sync with Minimum Time
Power Running Stall Continuous Trip Detection Time
Program
Protection Stall
This parameter is used to extend the Over-Voltage Stall (
Current Stall (
) time settings.
Direct Access Number — F447
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 250.0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.0 (Disabled)
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F448
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 250.0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.0 (Disabled)
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F449
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 250.0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.0 (Disabled)
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F451
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — In Sync with Accel/
Decel
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F452
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 1.0
Units — Seconds
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 159
Stall Prevention During Regeneration
Program
Protection Stall
This function of this parameter is to disable the Over-Voltage Stall (
the Over-Current Stall (
) function during regeneration only.
Application-specific conditions may occur that warrant disabling the Stall function during regeneration.
Settings:
0 — Disabled (Stall During Regenerative Braking)
1 — Enabled (No Stall During Regenerative Braking)
Current Control Proportional Gain
Program
Feedback PG Settings
This parameter sets the sensitivity of the drive when monitoring the output current to control speed.
The larger the value entered here, the more sensitive the drive is to changes in the received feedback.
Speed Loop Proportional Gain
Program
Feedback PG Settings
During closed-loop operation, this parameter sets the response sensitivity of the drive when monitoring the output speed for control.
The larger the value entered here, the larger the change in the output speed for a given received feedback signal.
Speed Loop Stabilization Coefficient
Program
Feedback PG Settings
During closed-loop operation, this parameter sets the response sensitivity of the drive when monitoring the output speed for control.
The larger the value entered here, the quicker the response to changes in the received feedback.
Load Moment of Inertia 1
Program
Feedback PG Settings
This parameter is used for calculating accel/decel torque when compensating for load inertia while operating in the Drooping Control mode.
Second Speed Loop Proportional Gain
Program
Feedback PG Settings
During closed-loop operation, this parameter sets the sensitivity of the drive when monitoring the output speed for control.
The larger the value entered here, the more sensitive the drive is to changes in the received feedback.
Direct Access Number — F453
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Enabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F458
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-Dependent)
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 100.0
Direct Access Number — F460
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-Dependent)
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 9999
Direct Access Number — F461
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 9999
Direct Access Number — F462
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 35
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 100
Direct Access Number — F463
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-Dependent)
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 9999
160 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Second Speed Loop Stabilization Coefficient
Program
Feedback PG Settings
During closed-loop operation, this parameter sets the response sensitivity of the drive when monitoring the output speed for control.
The larger the value entered here, the quicker the response to changes in the received feedback.
Load Moment of Inertia 2
Program
Feedback PG Settings
This parameter is used for calculating accel/decel torque when compensating for load inertia while operating in the Drooping Control mode.
Speed PID Switching Frequency
Program
Feedback Feedback Settings
While running, this parameter establishes the threshold speed setting that is used to determine if PID control may engage or remain engaged if active.
VI/II (V/I) Input Bias
Program
Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to fine-tune the bias of the V/I input terminals.
Note:
See note on
for more information on the V/I terminal.
This setting may be used to ensure that the zero level of the input source (pot, pressure transducer, flow meter, etc.) is also the zero level setting of the ASD system.
This is accomplished by setting the input source to zero and adjusting this setting to provide an output of zero from the ASD.
VI/II (V/I) Input Gain
Program
Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to fine tune the gain of the V/I input terminals.
Note:
See note on
for more information on the V/I terminal.
This setting may be used to ensure that the 100% level of the input source (pot, pressure transducer, flow meter, etc.) is also the 100% level setting of the ASD system.
This is accomplished by setting the input source to 100% and adjusting this setting to provide an output of 100% from the ASD.
Direct Access Number — F464
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 1
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 9999
Direct Access Number — F465
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 35
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 100
Direct Access Number — F466
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F470
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 127
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 255
Direct Access Number — F471
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 129
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 255
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 161
RR Input Bias
Program
Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to fine tune the bias of the RR input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode.
This setting may be used to ensure that the zero level of the input source (pot, pressure transducer, flow meter, etc.) is also the zero level setting of the ASD system.
This is accomplished by setting the input source to zero and adjusting this setting to provide an output of zero from the ASD.
RR Input Gain
Program
Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to fine tune the gain of the RR input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode.
This setting may be used to ensure that the 100% level of the input source (pot, pressure transducer, flow meter, etc.) is also the 100% level setting of the ASD system.
This is accomplished by setting the input source to 100% and adjusting this setting to provide an output of 100% from the ASD.
RX Input Bias
Program
Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to fine tune the bias of the RX input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode.
This setting may be used to ensure that the zero level of the input source (pot, pressure transducer, flow meter, etc.) is also the zero level setting of the ASD system.
This is accomplished by setting the input source to zero and adjusting this setting to provide an output of zero from the ASD.
RX Input Gain
Program
Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to fine tune the gain of the RX input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed Control mode or the Torque Control mode.
This setting may be used to ensure that the 100% level of the input source (pot, pressure transducer, flow meter, etc.) is also the 100% level setting of the ASD system.
This is accomplished by setting the input source to 100% and adjusting this setting to provide an output of 100% from the ASD.
Direct Access Number — F472
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 128
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 255
Direct Access Number — F473
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 154
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 255
Direct Access Number — F474
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 127
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 255
Direct Access Number — F475
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 127
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 255
162 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
RX2 (AI1) Input Bias
Program
Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to fine tune the bias of the RX2 (AI1) input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control mode or the Torque Control mode.
This setting may be used to ensure that the zero level of the input source (pot, pressure transducer, flow meter, etc.) is also the zero level setting of the ASD system.
This is accomplished by setting the input source to zero and adjusting this setting to provide a zero output from the ASD.
RX2 (AI1) Input Gain
Program
Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to fine tune the gain of the RX2 (AI1) input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control mode or the Torque Control mode.
This setting may be used to ensure that the 100% level of the input source (pot, pressure transducer, flow meter, etc.) is also the 100% level setting of the ASD system.
This is accomplished by setting the input source to 100% and adjusting this setting to provide an output of 100% from the ASD.
AI2 (Option V/I) Input Bias
Program
Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to fine tune the bias of the Optional AI2 input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control mode or the Torque Control mode.
This setting may be used to ensure that the zero level of the input source (pot, pressure transducer, flow meter, etc.) is also the zero level setting of the ASD system.
This is accomplished by setting the input source to zero and adjusting this setting to provide a zero output from the ASD.
AI2 (Option V/I) Input Gain
Program
Frequency Speed Reference Setpoints
This parameter is used to fine tune the gain of the Optional AI2 input terminal when this terminal is used as the control input while operating in the Speed
Control mode or the Torque Control mode.
This setting may be used to ensure that the 100% level of the input source (pot, pressure transducer, flow meter, etc.) is also the 100% level setting of the ASD system.
This is accomplished by setting the input source to 100% and adjusting this setting to provide an output of 100% from the ASD.
Direct Access Number — F476
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 128
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 255
Direct Access Number — F477
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 128
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 255
Direct Access Number — F478
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 128
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 255
Direct Access Number — F479
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 128
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 255
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 163
Permanent Magnet (PM) Motor Constant 1
Program
Motor PM Motor
This parameter is used with synchronous motor applications only.
Contact the Toshiba Customer Support Center for information on this parameter.
Permanent Magnet (PM) Motor Constant 2
Program
Motor PM Motor
This parameter is used with synchronous motor applications only.
Contact the Toshiba Customer Support Center for information on this parameter.
Acceleration Time 2
Program
Special Acc/Dec 1 – 4 Settings
This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the output of the ASD to go from 0.0 Hz to the Maximum Frequency for the 2 Acceleration profile. The
Accel/Decel pattern may be set using F502
. The minimum Accel/Decel time may be set using
.
This setting is also used to determine the acceleration rate of the UP/DOWN
Frequency Functions.
Note:
An acceleration time shorter than that which the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads.
Automatic Accel/Decel, Stall, and Ridethrough settings may lengthen the acceleration times.
Deceleration Time 2
Program
Fundamental Accel/Decel 1 Settings
This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the output of the ASD to go from the Maximum Frequency to 0.0 Hz for the 2 Deceleration profile. The
Accel/Decel pattern may be set using F502
. The minimum Accel/Decel time may be set using
.
This setting is also used to determine the deceleration rate of the UP/DOWN
Frequency Functions.
Note:
A deceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads. Automatic
Accel/Decel, Stall, and Ridethrough settings may lengthen the deceleration times.
Direct Access Number — F498
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-Dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 100
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F499
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-Dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 100
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F500
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-Dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000.0
Units — Seconds
Direct Access Number — F501
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-Dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000
Units — Seconds
164 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Acc/Dec Pattern 1
Program
Special Accel/Decel 1 – 4 Settings
This parameter enables a user-selected preprogrammed output profile that controls the acceleration and deceleration pattern for the 1 Accel/Decel parameter.
Settings:
0 — Linear
1 — S-Pattern 1
2 — S-Pattern 2
The figures below provide a profile of the available accel/decel patterns.
Direct Access Number — F502
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Linear
Changeable During Run — Yes
Linear acceleration and deceleration is the default pattern and is used on most applications.
S-pattern 1 is used for applications that require quick acceleration and deceleration. This setting is also popular for applications that require shock absorption at the start of acceleration or deceleration.
S-pattern 2 decreases the rate of change above the base frequency for acceleration and deceleration.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 165
Acc/Dec Pattern 2
Program
Special Accel/Decel 1 – 4 Settings
This parameter enables a user-selected preprogrammed output profile that controls the acceleration and deceleration pattern for the 2 Accel/Decel parameter.
Settings:
0 — Linear
1 — S-Pattern 1
2 — S-Pattern 2
Direct Access Number — F503
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Linear
Changeable During Run — Yes
166 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Acc/Dec Pattern 1 – 4
Program
Special Acc/Dec Special
Four Acceleration times and four Deceleration times may be set up and run individually. Accel/Decel Time 1 – 4 may be selected using this parameter setting or switched via threshold frequencies, or by discrete input terminal.
This parameter is used to select one of the four configured accel/decel profiles to be used.
Settings:
1 — Acc/Dec 1
2 — Acc/Dec 2
3 — Acc/Dec 3
4 — Acc/Dec 4
Each Accel/Decel selection is comprised of an Acceleration Time,
Deceleration Time, and a Pattern selection. Selection 1, 2, and 3 have a
Switching Frequency setting. The Switching Frequency is used as a threshold frequency that, once reached, the ASD switches to the next Acc/Dec selection.
Switching Frequency settings are used during acceleration and deceleration. A switching frequency setting is not required for Acc/Dec 4.
Acc/Dec 1 is set up using parameters
(Dec Time),
(Pattern), and
(Switching Frequency).
Acc/Dec 2 is set up using parameters
(Dec Time),
(Pattern), and
(Switching Frequency).
Acc/Dec 3 is set up using parameters
(Pattern), and
(Switching Frequency).
Acc/Dec 4 is set up using parameters F514 (Acc Time), and
This parameter ( F504 ) is used to manually select Acc/Dec 1 – 4.
To switch using the Terminal Board, assign the functions Acc/Dec Switching
1 and Acc/Dec Switching 2 to two discrete input terminals. Activation combinations of the two terminals result in the Acc/Dec 1 – 4 selections as
.
shows the setup requirements and the resulting output frequency response when using Switching Frequency settings to control the Acc/Dec response of the ASD output.
While operating using S-Pattern 1 the system performance may be further enhanced by the adjustment of parameters
–
for upper and lower Acc/Dec limit adjustments. These settings are used to extend or shorten the upper or lower Acc/Dec curve.
Table 4 .
Using combinations of discrete terminal activations Accel/Decel profiles 1–4 may be selected.
Acc/Dec Switching Truth
A/D SW 1 A/D SW 2 Acc/Dec # Out
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1 — Accel time 1 (
setting)
2 — Accel time 2 (
setting)
3 — Accel time 3 (
setting)
4 — Accel time 4 (
setting)
5 — Decel time 4 (
setting)
6 — Decel time 3 (
7 — Decel time 2 (
setting)
8 — Decel time 1 (
setting)
1
2
3
4
1 = Discrete terminal activation.
Figure 30 . Using Acc/Dec Switching.
Note:
If operating from the Local mode, press Esc from the Frequency
Command screen to access this parameter.
Accel/Decel Switching Frequency 1
Program
Special Accel/Decel Special
Direct Access Number — F504
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 1
Changeable During Run — Yes
This parameter sets the frequency at which the acceleration control is switched from the Accel 1 profile to the Accel 2 profile during a multiple-acceleration profile configuration.
Direct Access Number — F505
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 167
S-Pattern Acceleration Lower-Limit Adjustment
Program
Special Accel/Decel Special
During an S-Pattern 1 or 2 sequence, this parameter setting modifies the acceleration rate for the lower part of the acceleration curve by the percentage set here.
This function is commonly used with transportation and lifting applications.
See parameter F502 on pg. 165 for more information on this setting.
S-Pattern Acceleration Upper-Limit Adjustment
Program
Special Accel/Decel Special
During an S-Pattern 1 or 2 sequence, this parameter setting modifies the acceleration rate for the upper part of the acceleration curve by the percentage set here.
This function is commonly used with transportation and lifting applications.
See parameter F502 on pg. 165 for more information on this setting.
S-Pattern Deceleration Lower-Limit Adjustment
Program
Special Accel/Decel Special
During an S-Pattern 1 or 2 sequence, this parameter setting modifies the deceleration rate for the lower part of the deceleration curve by the percentage set here.
This function is commonly used with transportation and lifting applications.
See parameter F502 on pg. 165 for more information on this setting.
S-Pattern Deceleration Upper-Limit Adjustment
Program
Special Accel/Decel Special
During an S-Pattern 1 or 2 sequence, this parameter setting modifies the deceleration rate for the upper part of the deceleration curve by the percentage set here.
This function is commonly used with transportation and lifting applications.
See parameter F502 on pg. 165 for more information on this setting.
Acceleration Time 3
Program
Special Accel/Decel 1 – 4 Settings
This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the output of the ASD to go from 0.0 Hz to the Maximum Frequency for the 3 Acceleration profile. The
Accel/Decel pattern may be set using F502
. The minimum Accel/Decel time may be set using
.
Note:
An acceleration time shorter than that which the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads.
Automatic Accel/Decel, Stall, and Ridethrough settings may lengthen the acceleration times.
Direct Access Number — F506
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 10
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 50
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F507
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 10
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 50
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F508
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 10
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 50
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F509
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 10
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 50
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F510
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-Dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000
Units — Seconds
168 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Deceleration Time 3
Program
Special Accel/Decel 1 – 4 Settings
This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the output of the ASD to go from the Maximum Frequency to 0.0 Hz for the 3 Deceleration profile.
The Accel/Decel pattern may be set using
. The minimum Accel/Decel
Note:
A deceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads. Automatic
Accel/Decel, Stall, and Ridethrough settings may lengthen the deceleration times.
Acceleration/Deceleration Pattern 3
Program
Special Accel/Decel 1 – 4 Settings
This parameter enables a user-selected preprogrammed output profile that controls the acceleration and deceleration pattern for the 3 Accel/Decel parameter.
Settings:
0 — Linear
1 — S-Pattern 1
2 — S-Pattern 2
Acceleration/Deceleration Switching Frequency 2
Program
Special Accel/Decel Special
This parameter sets the frequency at which the acceleration control is switched from the Accel 2 profile to the Accel 3 profile during a multiple-acceleration profile configuration.
Acceleration Time 4
Program
Special Accel/Decel 1 – 4 Settings
This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the output of the ASD to go from 0.0 Hz to the Maximum Frequency for the 4 Acceleration profile. The
Accel/Decel pattern may be set using F502
. The minimum Accel/Decel time may be set using
.
Note:
An acceleration time shorter than that which the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads.
Automatic Accel/Decel, Stall, and Ridethrough settings may lengthen the acceleration times.
Direct Access Number — F511
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-Dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000
Units — Seconds
Direct Access Number — F512
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Linear
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F513
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F514
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-Dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000
Units — Seconds
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 169
Deceleration Time 4
Program
Special Accel/Decel 1 – 4 Settings
This parameter specifies the time in seconds for the output of the ASD to go from the Maximum Frequency to 0.0 Hz for the 4 Deceleration profile. The
Accel/Decel pattern may be set using F502
. The minimum Accel/Decel time may be set using
.
Note:
A deceleration time shorter than the load will allow may cause nuisance tripping and mechanical stress to loads. Automatic
Accel/Decel, Stall, and Ridethrough settings may lengthen the deceleration times.
Acceleration/Deceleration Pattern 4
Program
Special Accel/Decel 1 – 4 Settings
This parameter enables a user-selected preprogrammed output profile that controls the acceleration and deceleration pattern for the 4 Accel/Decel parameter.
Settings:
0 — Linear
1 — S-Pattern 1
2 — S-Pattern 2
Acceleration/Deceleration Switching Frequency 3
Program
Special Accel/Decel Special
This parameter sets the frequency at which the acceleration control is switched from the Accel 3 profile to the Accel 4 profile during a multiple-acceleration profile configuration.
Direct Access Number — F515
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-Dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000
Units — Seconds
Direct Access Number — F516
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Linear
Changeable During Run — Yes
Pattern Operation Selection
Program
Pattern Run Pattern Run
Pattern Run operation is enabled by selecting Seconds or Minutes as a unit of measure for the Operation Time setting for the selected Preset Speeds.
See Parameter
F523 for more information on Selections and Group Speeds
setup.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Enabled (Seconds)
2 — Enabled (Minutes)
Pattern Operation Mode
Program
Pattern Run Pattern Run
This parameter sets the start condition of subsequent Pattern Runs after the initial Pattern Run has been terminated or has completed its programming.
Settings:
0 — Reset After Stop
1 — Continue After Stop
Direct Access Number — F517
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F520
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F521
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Reset After Stop
Changeable During Run — No
170 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Pattern 1 Repeat
Program
Pattern Run Pattern Run
This parameter sets the number of times to repeat the Pattern Group 1.
Settings:
1 = Once Then Stop
2 – 254 = Number of Repeats
255 = Infinite (Forever)
Direct Access Number — F522
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 255 (Infinite)
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 255 (Infinite)
Units — Repetitions
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 171
172
Pattern Group 1 Selection 1
Program
Pattern Run Speeds
Groups of configured Preset Speeds may be selected and run from this screen.
The execution of grouped Preset Speeds in this manner is called a Pattern
Run.
One to eight user-selected Preset Speeds may be run sequentially for a user-set number of repetitions. The group of user-selected Preset Speeds is called a
Pattern Group. The Pattern Run function executes the user-set Pattern
Group.
Pattern Group 1 is comprised of up to 8 Selections with each Selection being
1 of 15 possible Preset Speed settings. Skip may be selected to ignore a
Selection.
This parameter allows the user to choose one configured Preset Speed that is to
be used as Selection 1 (of 8) for Pattern Group 1. See F018
for information on configuring the individual Preset Speeds. Parameters
setup for subsequent Selections 2 – 8.
One Preset Speed number (1 – 15) or Skip is selected for Selection 1 ( F523
).
The number of times to repeat Pattern Group 1 is selected at
. Set this value to 255 to run forever.
–
if more Preset Speed entries are required.
Pattern Run Setup (for Pattern Group 1)
1.
From Program
Pattern Run Speeds, select the Preset Speeds to be used as the Pattern Group 1 set of Selections. Select a speed from the 1 –
15 configured presets; 1 speed number per Selection. Set any unused Selec-
tions to Skip.
2.
From Program
Pattern Run Pattern Run Pattern Operation
Selection, enable the Pattern Run mode of operation by selecting Seconds or Minutes as the unit of measure for the Operation Time setting.
3.
From Program
Pattern Run Operation Time, set the run-time for each Preset Speed selected in step
.
4.
Configure two unused discrete input terminals for Pattern Operation
Group 1 and Pattern Operation Trigger Signal.
Note:
Activation of the Pattern Operation Group 1 discrete input terminal is required to enable Pattern Group 1 for use.
Activation of the Pattern Operation Trigger Signal discrete input terminal starts the Pattern Group 1 pattern run.
5.
From Program
Pattern Run Pattern Run Pattern 1 Repeat, set to the number of times that Pattern Group 1 is to be run. Set to 255 to run forever.
6.
From Program
Pattern Run Pattern Run Pattern Operation
Mode, set the end-of-pattern command to Reset or Continue.
7.
From the Remote mode (Local/Remote light is off), initiate a Run command (i.e., F and/or R terminal On).
8.
Connect the Pattern Operation Group 1 input terminal to CC.
9.
Connect the Pattern Operation Trigger Signal input terminal to CC and the Pattern Run will start and continue as programmed.
10. Open the Pattern Operation Trigger Signal connection to CC to stop the
Pattern Run before its conclusion if required.
Direct Access Number — F523
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Skip
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — Skip
Maximum — 15
Units — Preset Speed Number
Pattern Group 1
Selection
F523 F524 F525 F526 F527 F528 F529 F530
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Skip Skip Skip Skip Skip Skip Skip Skip
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Pattern Group 1 Selection 2
Program
Pattern Run Speeds
This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as the number 2 Selection to be included in Pattern Group 1.
Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection.
Setting
0 — Skip
1 – 15 Preset Speed Number
See
F523 for more information on this parameter.
Pattern Group 1 Selection 3
Program
Pattern Run Speeds
This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as the number 3 Selection to be included in Pattern Group 1.
Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection.
Setting
0 — Skip
1 – 15 Preset Speed Number
See
F523 for more information on this parameter.
Pattern Group 1 Selection 4
Program
Pattern Run Speeds
This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as the number 4 Selection to be included in Pattern Group 1.
Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection.
Setting
0 — Skip
1 – 15 Preset Speed Number
See
F523 for more information on this parameter.
Pattern Group 1 Selection 5
Program
Pattern Run Speeds
This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as the number 5 Selection to be included in Pattern Group 1.
Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection.
Setting
0 — Skip
1 – 15 Preset Speed Number
See
F523 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F524
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Skip
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F525
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Skip
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F526
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Skip
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F527
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Skip
Changeable During Run — No
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 173
Pattern Group 1 Selection 6
Program
Pattern Run Speeds
This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as the number 6 Selection to be included in Pattern Group 1.
Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection.
Setting
0 — Skip
1 – 15 Preset Speed Number
See
F523 for more information on this parameter.
Pattern Group 1 Selection 7
Program
Pattern Run Speeds
This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as the number 7 Selection to be included in Pattern Group 1.
Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection.
Setting
0 — Skip
1 – 15 Preset Speed Number
See
F523 for more information on this parameter.
Pattern Group 1 Selection 8
Program
Pattern Run Speeds
This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as the number 8 Selection to be included in Pattern Group 1.
Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection.
Setting
0 — Skip
1 – 15 Preset Speed Number
See
F523 for more information on this parameter.
Pattern 2 Repeat
Program
Pattern Run Pattern Run
This parameter sets the number of times to repeat the Pattern Group 2.
Direct Access Number — F528
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Skip
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F529
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Skip
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F530
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — Skip
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F531
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 255 (Infinite)
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 255 (Infinite)
Units — Repetitions
174 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Pattern Group 2 Selection 1
Program
Pattern Run Speeds
This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as the number 1 selection to be included in the Group 2 Selection.
Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection.
Setting
0 — Skip
1 – 15 Preset Speed Number
See
F523 for more information on this parameter.
Pattern Group 2 Selection 2
Program
Pattern Run Speeds
This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as the number 2 selection to be included in the Group 2 Selection.
Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection.
Setting
0 — Skip
1 – 15 Preset Speed Number
See
F523 for more information on this parameter.
Pattern Group 2 Selection 3
Program
Pattern Run Speeds
This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as the number 3 selection to be included in the Group 2 Selection.
Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection.
Setting
0 — Skip
1 – 15 Preset Speed Number
See
F523 for more information on this parameter.
Pattern Group 2 Selection 4
Program
Pattern Run Speeds
This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as the number 4 selection to be included in the Group 2 Selection.
Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection.
Setting
0 — Skip
1 – 15 Preset Speed Number
See
F523 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F532
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Skip
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F533
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Skip
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F534
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Skip
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F535
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Skip
Changeable During Run — No
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 175
Pattern Group 2 Selection 5
Program
Pattern Run Speeds
This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as the number 5 selection to be included in the Group 2 Selection.
Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection.
Setting
0 — Skip
1 – 15 Preset Speed Number
See
F523 for more information on this parameter.
Pattern Group 2 Selection 6
Program
Pattern Run Speeds
This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as the number 6 selection to be included in the Group 2 Selection.
Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection.
Setting
0 — Skip
1 – 15 Preset Speed Number
See
F523 for more information on this parameter.
Pattern Group 2 Selection 7
Program
Pattern Run Speeds
This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as the number 7 selection to be included in the Group 2 Selection.
Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection.
Setting
0 — Skip
1 – 15 Preset Speed Number
See
F523 for more information on this parameter.
Pattern Group 2 Selection 8
Program
Pattern Run Speeds
This parameter allows the user to select 1 of 15 configured Preset Speeds as the number 8 selection to be included in the Group 2 Selection.
Skip may be selected to ignore this Selection.
Setting
0 — Skip
1 – 15 Preset Speed Number
See
F523 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F536
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Skip
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F537
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Skip
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F538
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Skip
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F539
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Skip
Changeable During Run — No
176 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Speed 1 Operation Time
Program
Pattern Run Operation Time
This parameter sets the run-time for Preset Speed 1.
This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non-Group Speeds.
If the Auto-Restart function is activated, the search time required for the Auto-
Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting; resulting in a shorter run time.
Speed 2 Operation Time
Program
Pattern Run Operation Time
This parameter sets the run-time for Preset Speed 2.
This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non-Group Speeds.
If the Auto-Restart function is activated, the search time required for the Auto-
Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting; resulting in a shorter run time.
Speed 3 Operation Time
Program
Pattern Run Operation Time
This parameter sets the run-time for Preset Speed 3.
This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non-Group Speeds.
If the Auto-Restart function is activated, the search time required for the Auto-
Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting; resulting in a shorter run time.
Speed 4 Operation Time
Program
Pattern Run Operation Time
This parameter sets the run-time for Preset Speed 4.
This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non-Group Speeds.
If the Auto-Restart function is activated, the search time required for the Auto-
Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting; resulting in a shorter run time.
Speed 5 Operation Time
Program
Pattern Run Operation Time
This parameter sets the run-time for Preset Speed 5.
This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non-Group Speeds.
If the Auto-Restart function is activated, the search time required for the Auto-
Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting; resulting in a shorter run time.
Speed 6 Operation Time
Program
Pattern Run Operation Time
This parameter sets the run-time for Preset Speed 6.
This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non-Group Speeds.
If the Auto-Restart function is activated, the search time required for the Auto-
Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting; resulting in a shorter run time.
Direct Access Number — F540
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000.0
Units —
Direct Access Number — F541
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000.0
Units —
Direct Access Number — F542
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000.0
Units —
Direct Access Number — F543
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000.0
Units —
Direct Access Number — F544
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000.0
Units —
Direct Access Number — F545
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000.0
Units —
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 177
Speed 7 Operation Time
Program
Pattern Run Operation Time
This parameter sets the run-time for Preset Speed 7.
This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non-Group Speeds.
If the Auto-Restart function is activated, the search time required for the Auto-
Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting; resulting in a shorter run time.
Speed 8 Operation Time
Program
Pattern Run Operation Time
This parameter sets the run-time for Preset Speed 8.
This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non-Group Speeds.
If the Auto-Restart function is activated, the search time required for the Auto-
Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting; resulting in a shorter run time.
Speed 9 Operation Time
Program
Pattern Run Operation Time
This parameter sets the run-time for Preset Speed 9
This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non-Group Speeds.
If the Auto-Restart function is activated, the search time required for the Auto-
Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting; resulting in a shorter run time.
Speed 10 Operation Time
Program
Pattern Run Operation Time
This parameter sets the run-time for Preset Speed 10
This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non-Group Speeds.
If the Auto-Restart function is activated, the search time required for the Auto-
Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting; resulting in a shorter run time.
Speed 11 Operation Time
Program
Pattern Run Operation Time
This parameter sets the run-time for Preset Speed 11
This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non-Group Speeds.
If the Auto-Restart function is activated, the search time required for the Auto-
Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting; resulting in a shorter run time.
Speed 12 Operation Time
Program
Pattern Run Operation Time
This parameter sets the run-time for Preset Speed 12
This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non-Group Speeds.
If the Auto-Restart function is activated, the search time required for the Auto-
Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting; resulting in a shorter run time.
Direct Access Number — F546
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000.0
Units —
Direct Access Number — F547
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000.0
Units —
Direct Access Number — F548
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000.0
Units —
Direct Access Number — F549
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000.0
Units —
Direct Access Number — F550
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000.0
Units —
Direct Access Number — F551
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000.0
Units —
178 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Speed 13 Operation Time
Program
Pattern Run Operation Time
This parameter sets the run-time for Preset Speed 13.
This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non-Group Speeds.
If the Auto-Restart function is activated, the search time required for the Auto-
Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting; resulting in a shorter run time.
Speed 14 Operation Time
Program
Pattern Run Operation Time
This parameter sets the run-time for Preset Speed 14.
This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non-Group Speeds.
If the Auto-Restart function is activated, the search time required for the Auto-
Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting; resulting in a shorter run time.
Speed 15 Operation Time
Program
Pattern Run Operation Time
This parameter sets the run-time for Preset Speed 15.
This time is effective when used with Group Speeds and non-Group Speeds.
If the Auto-Restart function is activated, the search time required for the Auto-
Restart function will be subtracted from the Operation Time setting; resulting in a shorter run time.
Preset Speed Operation Mode
Program
Pattern Run Operation Mode
This parameter is used to set the Preset Speed operating mode.
Select Disabled at this parameter to use the speed command only for Preset
Speed operation.
Select Enabled at this parameter to apply the control settings of F561 –
to the associated Preset Speed while operating in the Preset Speed mode.
Settings:
0 — Disabled (Preset Speed Only)
1 — Enabled (Full Preset Speed Mode)
Direct Access Number — F552
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000.0
Units —
Direct Access Number — F553
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000.0
Units —
Direct Access Number — F554
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 6000.0
Units —
Direct Access Number — F560
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 179
Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode
Program
Pattern Run Operation Mode
This parameter is enabled at F560
and is used to set the speed, torque, and direction of Preset Speed 1.
This screen is comprised of 4 fields and are labeled as follows: Direction, Acc/
Dec Group, V/f Group, and Torque Limit Group. Scroll to the field of interest and press the scroll knob (Enter). Using the scroll knob, set the value and press the scroll knob (Enter).
are used to set the functions listed here for Preset
Speeds 2 – 15.
When using communications write the appropriate byte to location
as indicated below.
Settings:
0 — Forward Run
1 — Reverse Run
2 — Accel/Decel Switching 1
4 — Accel/Decel Switching 2
8 — V/f Switching Signal 1
16 — V/f Switching Signal 2
32 — Torque Limit Switching Signal 1
64 — Torque Limit Switching Signal 2
Direct Access Number — F561
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward Run
Changeable During Run — No
Writing the following data to location F561 via communications results in:
Forward Run, A/D SW 2, V/f SW 3, Torque Lim SW 4.
Torque Limit
Switch 2
1 1
64 32
V/f Switch
1 0
16 8
A/D Switch
0
4
1
2
F/R
0
1
00=T-Lim 1
01=T-Lim 2
10=T-Lim 3
11=T-Lim 4
00=V/f 1
01=V/f 2
10=V/f 3
11=V/f 4
Preset Speed 2 Operation Mode
Program
Pattern Run Operation Mode
Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode (see
00=A/D 1
01=A/D 2
10=A/D 3
11=A/D 4
0=F
1=R
Preset Speed 3 Operation Mode
Program
Pattern Run Operation Mode
Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode (see
Direct Access Number — F562
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward Run
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F563
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward Run
Changeable During Run — No
180 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Preset Speed 4 Operation Mode
Program
Pattern Run Operation Mode
Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode (see
Preset Speed 5 Operation Mode
Program
Pattern Run Operation Mode
Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode (see
Preset Speed 6 Operation Mode
Program
Pattern Run Operation Mode
Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode (see
Preset Speed 7 Operation Mode
Program
Pattern Run Operation Mode
Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode (see
Preset Speed 8 Operation Mode
Program
Pattern Run Operation Mode
Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode (see
Preset Speed 9 Operation Mode
Program
Pattern Run Operation Mode
Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode (see
Preset Speed 10 Operation Mode
Program
Pattern Run Operation Mode
Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode (see
Preset Speed 11 Operation Mode
Program
Pattern Run Operation Mode
Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode (see
Preset Speed 12 Operation Mode
Program
Pattern Run Operation Mode
Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode (see
Preset Speed 13 Operation Mode
Program
Pattern Run Operation Mode
Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode (see
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Direct Access Number — F564
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward Run
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F565
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward Run
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F566
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward Run
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F567
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward Run
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F568
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward Run
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F569
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward Run
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F570
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward Run
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F571
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward Run
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F572
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward Run
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F573
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward Run
Changeable During Run — No
181
Preset Speed 14 Operation Mode
Program
Pattern Run Operation Mode
Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode (see
Preset Speed 15 Operation Mode
Program
Pattern Run Operation Mode
Same as Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode (see
Motor Overload Protection Level 1
Program
Fundamental Motor Set 1
This parameter specifies the motor overload current level for Motor Set 1. This value is entered as either a percentage of the full load rating of the ASD or as a percentage of the FLA of the motor.
The unit of measurement for this parameter may be set to A/V (Amps) or it may be set as a percentage of the ASD rating. The nameplated FLA of the motor may be entered directly when Amps is selected as the unit of measurement (see
F701 to change the display unit).
Motor Overload Protection Level 1 settings will be displayed in Amps if the
EOI display units are set to A/V rather than %.
Stall Prevention Level
Program
Protection Stall
This parameter specifies the output current level at which the output frequency is reduced in an attempt to prevent a trip. The over-current level is entered as a percentage of the maximum rating of the drive.
Note:
The Motor Overload Protection parameter must enabled at F017
to use this feature.
Retain Trip Record at Power Down
Program
Protection Trip Settings
This parameter Enables/Disables the Trip Record Retention setting. When enabled, this feature logs the trip event and retains the trip information when the system powers down. The trip information may be viewed from the (Program
Utilities Trip History screen or the Monitor screen.
When disabled, the trip information will be cleared when the system powers down.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Enabled
Direct Access Number — F574
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward Run
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F575
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Forward Run
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F600
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 10
Maximum — 100.0
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F601
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-Dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 10
Maximum — 165
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F602
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
182 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Emergency Off
Emergency Off Mode Settings
Program
Protection Emergency Off Settings
This parameter determines the method used to stop the motor in the event that an Emergency Off command is received and the system is configured to use this feature.
This setting may also be associated with the FL terminals to allow the FL relay to change states when an EOFF condition occurs by setting the FL terminal to
).
Note:
A supplemental emergency stopping system should be used with the ASD. Emergency stopping should not be a task of the ASD alone.
Settings:
0 — Coast Stop
1 — Deceleration Stop
2 — DC Injection Braking Stop
3 — Deceleration Stop (Decel 4 setting;
)
Emergency Off DC Injection Application Time
Program
Protection Emergency Off Settings
When DC Injection is selected at
this parameter determines the time that the DC Injection Braking is applied to the motor.
Direct Access Number — F603
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Coast Stop
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F604
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 1.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 20.0
Units — Seconds
Direct Access Number — F605
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
ASD Output Phase Failure Detection
Program
Protection Phase Loss
This parameter Enables/Disables the monitoring of each phase of the 3-phase output signal (U, V, or W) of the ASD. If either line is missing, inactive, or not of the specified level for one second or more, the ASD incurs a trip.
Note:
Autotune checks for phase failures regardless of this setting.
Settings:
0 — Disabled (No Detection)
1 — Enabled (Run at Startup and Retry)
2 — Enabled (Every Run Command and Retry)
3 — Enabled (During Run)
4 — Enabled (At Startup And During Run)
5 — Enabled (Detects an ALL-PHASE Failure ONLY - Will Not Trip,
Restarts At Reconnect)
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 183
Overload Reduction Starting Frequency
Program
Protection Overload
This parameter is primarily used with V/f motors. It is used to reduce the starting frequency at which the Overload Reduction function begins and is useful during extremely low-speed motor operation.
During very low-speed operation the cooling efficiency of the motor decreases.
Lowering the start frequency of the Overload Reduction function aides in minimizing the generated heat and precluding an Overload trip.
This function is useful in loads such as fans, pumps, and blowers that have the square reduction torque characteristic.
Set parameter
F607 to the desired Overload Time Limit.
Motor 150% Overload Time Limit
Program
Protection Overload
This parameter establishes a time that the motor may operate at 150% of its rated current before tripping. This setting applies the time/150% reference to the individual settings of each motor (e.g., this setting references 150% of the
F600 setting for the 1 motor).
The unit will trip sooner than the time entered here if the overload is greater than 150%.
ASD Input Phase Failure Detection
Program
Protection Phase Loss
This parameter enables the 3-phase input power phase loss detection feature. A loss of either input phase (R, S, or T) results in a trip.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Enabled
Low-Current Detection Current Hysteresis Width
Program
Protection Low-Current Settings
During a momentary low-current condition, this parameter provides a current threshold level to which the low-current condition must return within the time setting of
F612 or a Low-Current Trip will be incurred.
Direct Access Number — F606
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 6.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 30.00
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F607
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 300
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 10
Maximum — 2400
Units — Seconds
Direct Access Number — F608
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Enabled
Changeable During Run — No
Low-Current Trip
Program
Protection Low-Current Settings
This parameter Enables/Disables the low-current trip feature.
When enabled, the drive will trip on a low-current fault if the output current of
the drive falls below the level defined at F611 and remains there for the time set at F612 .
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Enabled
Direct Access Number — F609
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 10
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 20
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F610
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
184 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Low-Current Detection Threshold
Program
Protection Low-Current Settings
With the Low-Current Trip (
F610 ) parameter enabled, this function sets the
low-current trip threshold.
The threshold value is entered as a percentage of the maximum rating of the drive.
Low-Current Trip Threshold Time
Program
Protection Low-Current Settings
With the Low-Current Trip (
F610 ) parameter enabled, this function sets the
time that the low-current condition must exist to cause a trip.
Short Circuit Detection At Start
Program
Protection Special Protection Parameters
This parameter determines when the system will perform an Output Short
Circuit test.
Note:
Selection 3 is recommended for high-speed motor applications.
Because of the low impedance of high-speed motors the standard-pulse setting may result in a motor malfunction.
Settings:
0 — Every Start (Standard Pulse)
1 — Power On or Reset (Standard Pulse)
2 — Every Start (Short Pulse)
3 — Power On or Reset (Short Pulse)
Over-Torque Trip
Program
Protection Over-Torque Parameters
This parameter Enables/Disables the Over-Torque Tripping function.
When enabled, the ASD trips if an output torque value greater than the setting of
F616 or F617 exists for a time longer than the setting of F618
.
When disabled, the ASD does not trip due to over-torque conditions.
Note:
A discrete output terminal may be activated when an over-torque
alarm occurs if so configured (see
).
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Enabled
Direct Access Number — F611
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 100
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F612
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 255
Units — Seconds
Direct Access Number — F613
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Every Start (standard pulse)
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F615
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 185
Over-Torque Detection Level (Positive Torque)
Program
Protection Over-Torque Parameters
This parameter sets the torque threshold level that is used as a setpoint for overtorque tripping during positive torque. This setting is a percentage of the maximum rated torque of the drive.
This function is enabled at F615
.
Over-Torque Detection Level (Negative Torque)
Program
Protection Over-Torque Parameters
This parameter sets the torque threshold level that is used as a setpoint for overtorque tripping during negative torque (regen). This setting is a percentage of the maximum rated torque of the drive.
This function is enabled at F615
.
Over-Torque Detection Time
Program
Protection Over-Torque Parameters
This parameter sets the amount of time that the over-torque condition may
exceed the tripping threshold level set at F616
and
before a trip occurs.
This function is enabled at F615
.
Over-Torque Detection Hysteresis
Program
Protection Over-Torque Parameters
During a momentary over-torque condition, this parameter provides a torque threshold level to which the over-torque condition must return within the time setting of
F618 or an Over-Torque Trip will be incurred.
Cooling Fan Control
Program
Protection Special Protection Parameters
This parameter sets the cooling fan run-time command.
Settings:
0 — Automatic
1 — Always On
Cumulative Operation Time Alarm
Program
Protection Special Protection Parameters
This parameter sets a run-time value that, once exceeded, closes a discrete output contact. The output signal may be used to control external equipment or used to engage a brake.
Associate the Total-Operation-Hours Alarm setting of
discrete output contactor.
Note:
The time displayed is 1/10th of the actual time (0.1 hr. = 1.0 hr.).
Direct Access Number — F616
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 200.00
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.00
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F617
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 200.00
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.00
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F618
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.50
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 10.0
Units — Seconds
Direct Access Number — F619
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 10.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 100.00
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F620
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Automatic
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F621
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 610.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 999.9
Units — Hours (X 10)
186 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Abnormal Speed Detection Time
Program
Protection Abnormal Speed Settings
This parameter sets the time that an overspeed condition must exist to cause a trip.
This parameter functions in conjunction with the settings of F623 and F624
.
Over-Speed Detection Frequency Upper Band
Program
Protection Abnormal Speed Settings
This parameter sets the upper level of the Base Frequency range that, once exceeded, will cause an Over-Speed Detected alert.
This parameter functions in conjunction with the settings of F622 and F624
.
Over-Speed Detection Frequency Lower Band
Program
Protection Abnormal Speed Settings
This parameter sets the lower level of the Base Frequency range that, once the output speed falls below this setting, will cause a Speed Drop Detected alert.
This parameter functions in conjunction with the settings of F622 and F623
.
Over-Voltage Limit Operation Level
Program
Protection Stall
This parameter sets the upper DC bus voltage threshold that, once exceeded, will cause an Over-Voltage Stall. An Over-Voltage Stall increases the output frequency of the drive during deceleration for a specified time in an attempt to prevent an Over-Voltage Trip.
If the over-voltage condition persists for over 4 mS, an Over-Voltage Trip will be incurred.
This parameter is enabled at F305
.
Note:
This parameter setting may increase deceleration times.
Under-Voltage Trip
Program
Protection Under-Voltage/Ridethrough
This parameter Enables/Disables the Under-Voltage Trip function.
With this parameter Enabled, the ASD will trip if the under-voltage condition persists for a time greater than the
A user-selected contact may be actuated if so configured.
If Disabled the ASD will stop and not trip; the FL contact is not activated.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Enabled
Direct Access Number — F622
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.01
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.01
Maximum — 100.00
Units — Seconds
Direct Access Number — F623
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0 (Disabled)
Maximum — 30.00
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F624
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00 (Disabled)
Maximum — 30.00
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F626
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-Dependent)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 100
Maximum — 150
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F627
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 187
Under-Voltage Trip Detection Time
Program
Protection Under-Voltage/Ridethrough
This parameter sets the time that the under-voltage condition must exist to cause an Under-Voltage Trip.
This parameter is enabled at F627
.
Regenerative Power Ridethrough Control Level
Program
Protection Under-Voltage/Ridethrough
This parameter is activated during regeneration. It is used to set the low end of the DC bus voltage threshold that, once the bus voltage drops below this
setting, activates the setting of F302 (Ridethrough Mode).
Activation may be the result of a momentary power loss or an excessive load on the bus voltage.
During a Ridethrough, regenerative energy is used to maintain the control circuitry settings for the duration of the Ridethrough; it is not used to drive the motor.
The motor(s) of the system are stopped and then restarted automatically or may continue seamlessly if so configured.
See
F302 for more information on this parameter.
Note:
This parameter setting may increase deceleration times.
Brake Answer Wait Time
Program
Protection Special Protection Parameters
This parameter is used in conjunction with the discrete input terminal setting
Brake Answerback Input (see
Table 5 on pg. 234 for more information on this
feature).
After activating the discrete input terminal Braking Request, the setting of this parameter starts a count-down timer in which 1) a Brake Answerback Input response must be received or 2) the brake must release before the timer expires.
Should this timer setting expire before the Brake Answerback Input is returned or the brake releases, a Brake Fault (E-11) is incurred. Otherwise, the brake releases and normal motor operations resume.
ASD Overload
Program
Protection Overload
This parameter is used to protect the ASD from an over-current condition. The standard overload rating of the G9 ASD is 150% operation for 60 seconds.
This setting allows for the overload protection to be switched from the standard overload detection means (Thermal Detection and Overload) to thermal detection only.
Direct Access Number — F628
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.03
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.01
Maximum — 10.00
Units — Seconds
Direct Access Number — F629
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — (ASD-Dependent)
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 55
Maximum — 100
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F630
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0 (Disabled)
Maximum — 10.0
Units — Seconds
Direct Access Number — F631
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Thermal Detection +
Overload
Changeable During Run — No
Settings:
0 — Thermal Detection + Overload
1 — Thermal Detection Only
The Thermal Detection Only selection is used when multiple devices are
installed horizontally as described on pg. 15 .
188 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
VI/II (V/I) Analog Input Broken Wire Detection Level
Program
Terminal Input Special Functions
This parameter is enabled by providing a non-zero value here. This function monitors the V/I input signal and if the V/I input signal falls below the level specified here and remains there for a period of 0.3 seconds or more a trip will be incurred (E-18).
This value is entered as 0% to 100% of the V/I input signal range.
Annual Average Ambient Temperature
Program
Special Special Parameters
This parameter is used in conjunction with a discrete output terminal setting to notify the operator of the remaining useful life of critical components of the
ASD system.
With a discrete output terminal set to Part Replacement Alarm (see Table 8 on pg. 239
) and the calculation derived from the parameter setting, maintenance scheduling may be enhanced.
Settings:
1 — Under 10° C (50° F)
2 — Under 20° C (68° F)
3 — Under 30° C (86° F)
4 — Under 40° C (104° F)
5 — Under 50° C (122° F)
6 — Under 60° C (140° F)
Rush Relay Current Activation Time
Program
Special Special Parameters Rush Relay Current
Activation Time
At system startup, this parameter sets a time-delay for the start of the Rush
Relay activation in an attempt to allow the DC bus voltage to reach the normal operating level before outputting a signal to the motor.
Direct Access Number — F633
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 100
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F634
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Under 30°
Changeable During Run — No
PTC1 Thermal Selection
Program
Special Special Parameters PTC1 Thermal Selection
This parameter Enables/Disables the optional external thermal detection circuit of the Expansion IO Card Option 1. A thermistor is connected from TH1+ to
TH1- of TB3 on the Expansion IO Card Option 1.
Should the thermistor resistance reading fall below 50
because of an overtemperature condition or exceed 3000
because of an open circuit an External
Thermal Fault (OH2) will be incurred.
Note:
While this parameter is Enabled, the system cannot be restarted until the thermistor value recovers to the level of 1.8k
from an
over-temperature condition. An Auto-Restart will not be initiated subsequent to an External Thermal Trip (OH2). A manual restart will be required in the event of an OH2 trip.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Detect Disconnect
Direct Access Number — F635
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 2.5
Units — Seconds
Direct Access Number — F637
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 189
PTC2 Thermal Selection
Program
Special Special Parameters PTC2 Thermal Selection
This parameter Enables/Disables the optional external thermal detection circuit of the Expansion IO Card Option 2. A thermistor is connected from TH1+ to
TH1- of TB4 on the Expansion IO Card Option 2.
Should the thermistor resistance reading fall below 50
because of an overtemperature condition or exceed 3000
because of an open circuit an External
Thermal Fault (OH2) will be incurred.
Note:
While this parameter is Enabled, the system cannot be restarted until the thermistor value recovers to the level of 1.8k
from an
over-temperature condition. An Auto-Restart will not be initiated subsequent to an External Thermal Trip (OH2). A manual restart will be required in the event of an OH2 trip.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Detect Disconnect
Braking Resistance Overload Time (10x rated torque)
Program
Protection Dynamic Braking
This parameter sets the time that the braking resistor is allowed to sustain and overload condition before a trip is incurred.
This feature is useful for applications that have a fluctuating load or for loads that require a long deceleration time.
Step-Out Current Detection Level
Program
Motor PM Motor
This parameter is used with synchronous motor applications only.
Contact the Toshiba Customer Support Center for information on this parameter.
Step-Out Current Detection Time
Program
Motor PM Motor
This parameter is used with synchronous motor applications only.
Contact the Toshiba Customer Support Center for information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F638
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F639
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 5.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 600.0
Units — Seconds
Direct Access Number — F640
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 10
Maximum — 150
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F641
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 25.0
Units — Seconds
190 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Adding Input Selection
Program
Feedback Override Control
This parameter Enables/Disables the feature that allows for the external adjustment of the Output Frequency.
Selecting either of the input methods listed enables this feature. The selected input is used as a modifier of the programmed Output Frequency.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — VI/II (V/I)
2 — RR
3 — RX
4 — Panel Keypad
5 — RS485 2-Wire
6 — RS485 4-Wire
7 — Communication Option Board
8 — RX2 Option (AI1)
9 — Option V/I
10 — UP/DOWN Frequency (Terminal Board)
11 — Pulse Input (Option)
12 — Pulse Input (Motor CPU)
13 — Binary/BCD Input (Option)
Multiplying Input Selection
Program
Feedback Override Control
This parameter Enables/Disables the feature that allows for the external adjustment of the commanded frequency.
Selecting either of the input methods listed enables this feature. The selected input is used as a multiplier of the commanded frequency.
If Setting (
F729 ) is selected, the % value entered at parameter F729 is used as
the multiplier of the commanded frequency.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — VI/II (V/I)
2 — RR
3 — RX
5 — RX2 Option (AI1)
Direct Access Number — F660
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F661
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 191
AM
Selection of OUT Terminal
Program
Terminal Analog Output Terminals
This parameter is used to enable the OUT1 and OUT2 output terminals, or the
FP output terminal by selecting Logic Output or Pulse Train Output, respectively.
Note:
The Logic output and the Pulse Train output may not be used simultaneously.
If Logic Output is selected the OUT1 and OUT2 (O1A/O1B and O2A/O2B) output contacts of the Terminal Board are enabled to function as described in
The OUT1 and OUT2 terminals may be used simultaneously and they may be assigned different functions.
If Pulse Train Output is selected the FP output terminal of the Terminal
Board is enabled to function as configured in F676 and F677
.
Settings:
0 — Logic Output
1 — Pulse Train Output
AM Output Terminal Function
Program
Terminal Analog Output Terminals
This parameter is used to set the output function of the AM analog output terminal. The AM analog output terminal produces an output current that is proportional to the magnitude of the function assigned to this terminal. The available assignments for this output terminal are listed in
.
Note:
To read current at this terminal connect a 100 – 500
resistor from the AM (+) terminal through the series Ammeter to the CC
(-) terminal.
AM Terminal Setup Parameters
— Set AM Function
— Calibrate AM Terminal
— Output Response Polarity Selection
— Set Zero Level
AM Output Terminal Adjustment
Program
Terminal Analog Output Terminals
This parameter is used to calibrate the AM analog output.
To calibrate the AM analog output, connect an ammeter as described at
With the drive is running at a known value (e.g., output frequency), adjust this
parameter until the associated function of parameter F670 produces the desired
DC level output at the AM output terminal.
See
F670 for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F669
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Pulse Train Output
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F670
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Output Current
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F671
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 512
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 1280
192 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
MON1 Terminal Meter Selection
Program
Terminal Analog Output Terminals
Direct Access Number — F672
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Output Voltage
Changeable During Run — Yes
This parameter is used to set the output function of the MON1 analog output
terminal. The available assignments for this output terminal are listed in Table 6 on pg. 237
.
The MON1 analog output terminal produces an output voltage or current that is proportional to the magnitude of the function assigned to this terminal.
Note:
The Expansion IO Card Option 2 option board (P/N ETB004Z) is required to use this terminal.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 2 Instruction Manual (P/N 58686) for more information on the function of this terminal.
MON1 Terminal Setup Parameters
— MON1 Output Function
— MON1 Terminal Meter Adjustment
— MON1 Voltage/Current Output Switching
— MON1 Output Gradient Characteristic
— MON1 Bias Adjustment Set Zero Level
MON1 Terminal Adjustment
Program
Terminal Analog Output Terminals
This parameter is used to set the gain of the MON1 output terminal and is used
in conjunction with the settings of parameter F672
.
for more information on this setting.
MON2 Terminal Meter Selection
Program
Terminal Analog Output Terminals
This parameter is used to set the output function of the MON2 analog output
terminal. The available assignments for this output terminal are listed in Table 6 on pg. 237
.
The MON2 analog output terminal produces an output voltage or current that is proportional to the magnitude of the function assigned to this terminal.
Note:
The Expansion IO Card Option 2 option board (P/N ETB004Z) is required to use this terminal.
See the Expansion IO Card Option 2 Instruction Manual (P/N 58686) for more information on the function of this terminal.
MON2 Terminal Setup Parameters
— MON2 Output Function
— MON2 Terminal Meter Adjustment
— MON2 Voltage/Current Output Switching
— MON2 Output Gradient Characteristic
— MON2 Bias Adjustment Set Zero Level
Direct Access Number — F673
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 512
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 1280
Direct Access Number — F674
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Output Frequency
Changeable During Run — Yes
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 193
FP
MON2 Terminal Adjustment
Program
Terminal Analog Output Terminals
This parameter is used to set the gain of the MON2 output terminal and is used
in conjunction with the settings of parameter F674
.
for more information on this setting.
Pulse Output Function (FP)
Program
Terminal Analog Output Terminals
This parameter sets the functionality of the FP output terminal to any one of the
user-selectable functions listed in Table 8 on pg. 239 and is enabled at
.
As the assigned function changes in magnitude or frequency, the pulse count of the FP output terminal pulse train changes in direct proportion to changes in the assigned function.
Note:
The duty cycle of the output pulse train remains at 65 ±5.0 µS.
This parameter is used in conjunction with parameter
.
Pulse Output Frequency (FP)
Program
Terminal Analog Output Terminals
This parameter scales the FP output terminal by setting the pulses-per-second output signal of the FP terminal.
See
F676 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F675
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 512
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 1
Maximum — 1280
Direct Access Number — F676
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Output Frequency
Changeable During Run — Yes
FM Voltage/Current Output Switching
Program
Terminal Analog Output Terminals
This parameter is used to select the type of output signal provided at the FM terminal (i.e., voltage or current).
The output voltage and current range is 0 – 10 VDC and 0 – 20 mA, respectively.
See
F005 for more information on this setting.
Settings:
0 — 0 – 10 V
1 — 0 – 20 mA
FM Output Gradient Characteristic
Program
Terminal Analog Output Terminals
This parameter sets the output response polarity of the FM output terminal. The
FM output terminal response may be set to respond inversely (-) or directly (+) to the input signal.
See
F005 for more information on this setting.
Settings:
0 — Minus (Negative Gradient)
1 — Plus (Positive Gradient)
Direct Access Number — F677
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 3.84
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 1.00
Maximum — 43.20
Units — Pulses/Second
Direct Access Number — F681
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0–10V
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F682
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Plus
Changeable During Run — Yes
194 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
FM Bias Adjustment
Program
Terminal Analog Output Terminals
This parameter setting is used to ensure that a zero-level input signal produces a zero-level output at the FM terminal.
to zero and then set this parameter to zero for proper operation.
See
F005 for more information on this setting.
AM Output Gradient Characteristic
Program
Terminal Analog Output Terminals
This parameter sets the output response polarity of the AM output terminal.
The AM output terminal response may be set to respond inversely (-) or directly (+) to the input signal.
See
F670 for more information on this setting.
Settings:
0 — Minus (Negative Gradient)
1 — Plus (Positive Gradient)
AM Bias Adjustment
Program
Terminal Analog Output Terminals
This parameter setting is used to ensure that a zero-level input signal produces a zero-level output at the AM terminal.
Set the function set at F670 to zero and then set this parameter to zero for
proper operation.
See
F670 for more information on this setting.
MON 1 Voltage/Current Output Switching
Program
Terminal Analog Output Terminals
This parameter is used to set the output signal type of the MON1 output terminal.
Settings
0 — -10 V – +10 V
1 — 0 – 10 V
2 — 0 – 20 mA
MON 1 Output Gradient Characteristic
Program
Terminal Analog Output Terminals
This parameter sets the output response polarity of the MON1 output terminal.
The MON1 output terminal response may be set to respond inversely (-) or directly (+) to the input signal.
for more information on this setting.
Settings:
0 — Minus (Negative Gradient)
1 — Plus (Positive Gradient)
Direct Access Number — F683
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -10.0
Maximum — +100.0
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F685
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Plus
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F686
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -10.0
Maximum — +100.0
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F688
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 – 10V
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F689
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Plus
Changeable During Run — Yes
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 195
MON 1 Bias Adjustment
Program
Terminal Analog Output Terminals
This parameter setting is used to ensure that a zero-level input signal produces a zero-level output at the MON1 terminal.
Set the assigned function of parameter F672
to zero and then set this parameter to a zero output.
for more information on this setting.
MON 2 Voltage/Current Output Switching
Program
Terminal Analog Output Terminals
This parameter is used to set the output signal type of the MON2 output terminal.
for more information on this setting.
Settings
0 — -10 V – +10 V
1 — 0 – 10 V
2 — 0 – 20 mA
MON 2 Output Gradient Characteristic
Program
Terminal Analog Output Terminals
This parameter sets the output response polarity of the MON2 output terminal.
The MON2 output terminal response may be set to respond inversely (-) or directly (+) to the input signal.
for more information on this setting.
Settings:
0 — Minus (Negative Gradient)
1 — Plus (Positive Gradient)
MON 2 Bias Adjustment
Program
Terminal Analog Output Terminals
This parameter setting is used to ensure that a zero-level input signal produces a zero-level output at the MON2 terminal.
Set the assigned function of parameter F674
to zero and then set this parameter to a zero output.
for more information on this setting.
Parameter Write Lockout
Program
Utilities Prohibition
This parameter Enables/Disables the Run and Stop keys.
Settings:
0 — Enabled
1 — Disabled
Direct Access Number — F690
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -10.0
Maximum — 100.0
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F691
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 – 10V
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F692
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Plus
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F693
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -10.0
Maximum — 100.0
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F700
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Enabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
196 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Display Units for Voltage and Current
Program
Utilities Display Parameters
This parameter sets the unit of measurement for current and voltage values displayed on the EOI.
Settings:
0 — %
1 — A/V
Display Unit Multiplication Factor
Program
Utilities Display Parameters
This parameter provides a multiplier for the displayed speed value shown on the front panel display of the ASD.
This parameter may be used to display the rate that a commodity is being processed by the driven load in process units (i.e., units/time).
Example: An output frequency of 100 Hz would be displayed as 50 Hz if using a multiplier of 0.5 for this parameter.
Note:
PID frequency-limiting parameters are not affected by this
Display Unit Selection
Program
Utilities Display Parameters
This parameter is used in conjunction with F702
to set the method in which the frequency is displayed on the front panel.
The multiplier setting of F702
will be applied to the display of all frequencies if
All Frequencies are selected at this parameter.
The multiplier setting of
will be applied to parameters
, and
F368 ONLY if PID Process Data is selected at this parameter.
Settings:
0 — All Frequencies
1 — PID Process Data
Display Gradient Characteristic
Program
Utilities Display Parameters
The ASD-displayed response to output speed changes will be displayed as directly proportional or inversely proportional as a function of this parameter setting.
Selecting Negative Gradient displays an increased output speed as going more negative.
Selecting Positive Gradient displays an increased output speed as going more positive.
Settings:
0 — Minus (Negative Gradient)
1 — Plus (Positive Gradient)
Direct Access Number — F701
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — %
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F702
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00 (OFF)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 200.00
Direct Access Number — F703
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — All Frequencies
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F705
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Plus
Changeable During Run — Yes
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 197
Display Bias
Program
Utilities Display Parameters
In conjunction with the setting of
, this parameter sets the bias of the front panel speed display.
The frequency entered here will be multiplied by the setting of F702 and then
displayed as the zero value on the front panel display.
Change Step Selection 1
Program
Utilities Display Parameters
In conjunction with the parameter setting of F708 , this parameter sets the
amount that the output speed will increase or decrease for each speed command change entered from the front panel using the Rotary Encoder.
Direct Access Number — F706
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F707
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F708
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 255
Change Step Selection 2
Program
Utilities Display Parameters
The parameter is used to modify the degree that the setting of
affects the output speed changes that are input from the front panel using the Rotary
Encoder.
Selecting a zero value here disables this parameter and the resulting non-zero value of parameter setting
is output from the ASD.
Selecting a non-zero value here provides a dividend that will be used in the following equation resulting in the actual output frequency applied to the motor.
OutputFrequencyDisplayed
=
InternallyCommandedFrequency
F707
Operation Command Clear Selection When ST Off
Program
Special Operation Panel Parameters
Upon deactivation of the ST terminal while operating in the Local mode, the
ASD output to the motor will cease — this parameter setting is used to allow for the reactivation of the motor without user intervention upon the reactivation of the ST terminal.
Upon reactivation of the ST terminal in this condition the ASD will resume the
Run condition and the motor will start (1 — Retain Run Command).
This feature may be Disabled and the Run command must be re-initiated by the user for ASD operation (0 — Clear Panel Run Command).
Direct Access Number — F719
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default —
Retain Panel Run
Command
Changeable During Run — Yes
DANGER
WHEN ENABLED THE ASD WILL RESUME THE RUN CONDITION
WHEN THE ST TERMINAL IS REACTIVATED.
Settings:
0 — Clear Panel Run Command
1 — Retain Panel Run Command
198 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Panel Stop Pattern
Program
Special Operation Panel Parameters
While operating in the Local mode this parameter determines the method used to stop the motor when the stop command is issued via the EOI.
The Decel Stop setting enables the Dynamic Braking system that is setup at
F304 or the DC Injection Braking system that is setup at
The Coast Stop setting allows the motor to stop at the rate allowed by the inertia of the load.
Settings:
0 — Deceleration Stop
1 — Coast Stop
Note:
The Stop Pattern setting has no effect on the Emergency Off settings of
. This parameter may also be accessed by pressing the ESC key from the Frequency Command screen.
Panel Torque Command
Program
Special Operation Panel Parameters
This function is not used with the G9 ASD.
The Torque Command selection is performed at F420 .
Panel Tension Torque Bias
Program
Special Operation Panel Parameters
This function is not used with the G9 ASD.
The Tension Torque Bias selection is performed at F423 .
Panel Load Sharing Gain
Program
Special Operation Panel Parameters
This function is not used with the G9 ASD.
The Load Sharing Gain selection is performed at
Panel Override Multiplication Gain
Program
Special Operation Panel Parameters
This parameter provides a value to be used in the event that Setting (
) is selected for the Frequency Override Multiplying Input (
).
Direct Access Number — F721
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Deceleration Stop
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F725
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -250.00
Maximum — +250.00
Direct Access Number — F727
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -250.00
Maximum — +250.00
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F728
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 250.00
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F729
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — -100.00
Maximum — 100.00
Units — %
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 199
Panel Frequency Lockout
Program
Special Operation Panel Parameters
This parameter is model-specific and has no function on the G9 ASD system.
Settings:
0 — Unlocked
1 — Locked
Panel Emergency Off Lockout
Program
Special Operation Panel Parameters
This parameter is model-specific and has no function on the G9 ASD system.
Settings:
0 — Unlocked
1 — Locked
Panel Reset Lockout
Program
Special Operation Panel Parameters
This parameter is model-specific and has no function on the G9 ASD system.
Settings:
0 — Unlocked
1 — Locked
Command Mode/Frequency Mode Change Lockout
Program
Utilities Prohibition
This parameter is model-specific and has no function on the G9 ASD system.
Settings:
0 — Unlocked
1 — Locked
Lockout All Keys
Program
Utilities Prohibition
This parameter is model-specific and has no function on the G9 ASD system.
Settings:
0 — Unlocked
1 — Locked
Direct Access Number — F730
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unlocked
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F734
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unlocked
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F735
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unlocked
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F736
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Locked
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F737
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unlocked
Changeable During Run — Yes
200 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Trace Selection
Program
Utilities Trace
In conjunction with parameter F741 –
, this parameter is used to monitor and store 4 ASD output waveform data points. The data may be read and stored as a function of a trip (At Trip) or it may be initiated by the activation of a discrete terminal activation (At Trigger).
Set a discrete input terminal to Trace Back Trigger Signal and activate the terminal to initiate the At Trigger read/store function.
lists the items that may be selected for the data read/store function along with the associated communication number for each selection.
The duration of the read/store cycle for the selected items is set at parameter
To acquire and store the data a communications device and a PC are required.
The G9 ASD supports the following communications protocols: RS485
(MODBUS-RTU) Toshiba Protocol, USB Toshiba Protocol, CC-Link,
ProfiBus, and DeviceNet (Refer to the manual of each protocol type for more information).
Trace data may be viewed graphically via Program
Utilities View Trace
Data.
Settings:
0 — None (Disabled)
1 — At Trip
2 — At Trigger
Trace Cycle
Program
Utilities Trace
This parameter sets the record time for the Trace Data events selected at F742
See
F740 for more information on this parameter setting.
Settings:
0 — 4 mS
1 — 20 mS
2 — 100 mS
3 — 1 Second
4 — 10 Seconds
Trace Data 1
Program
Utilities Trace Data 1
This parameter is used to select the Trace Data 1 item from
to be read and stored in accordance with the setup of parameters
and
See
F740 for more information on this parameter setting.
Trace Data 2
Program
Utilities Trace Data 2
This parameter is used to select the Trace Data 2 item from
to be read and stored in accordance with the setup of parameters
and
See
F740 for more information on this parameter setting.
Direct Access Number — F740
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — At Trip
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F741
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 100 mS
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F742
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Output Frequency
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F743
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Freq. Reference
Changeable During Run — Yes
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 201
Trace Data 3
Program
Utilities Trace Data 3
This parameter is used to select the Trace Data 3 item from
to be read and stored in accordance with the setup of parameters
and
See
F740 for more information on this parameter setting.
Trace Data 4
Program
Utilities Trace Data 4
This parameter is used to select the Trace Data 4 item from
to be read and stored in accordance with the setup of parameters
and
See
F740 for more information on this parameter setting.
RS485 2-Wire Baud Rate
Program
Communications Communication Settings
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by establishing the Baud Rate of the communications link.
The communications network includes other ASDs and Host/Control computers that monitor the status of the ASD(s), transfers commands, and loads or modifies the parameter settings of the ASD.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (off then on) for the changes to take effect.
Settings:
0 — 9600
1 — 19200
2 — 38400
RS485 2- and 4-Wire Parity
Program
Communications Communication Settings
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by establishing the Parity setting of the communications link.
The communications network includes other ASDs and Host/Control computers that monitor the status of the ASD(s), transfers commands, and loads or modifies the parameter settings of the ASD.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (off then on) for the changes to take effect.
Settings:
0 — No Parity
1 — Even Parity
2 — Odd Parity
Direct Access Number — F744
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Output Current
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F745
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — DC Voltage
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F800
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 19200
Changeable During Run — Yes
Units — bps
Direct Access Number — F801
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Even Parity
Changeable During Run — Yes
202 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
ASD Number
Program
Communications Communication Settings
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by assigning an identification (ID) number to each ASD in the communications network.
The communications network includes other ASDs and Host/Control computers that monitor the status of the ASD(s), transfers commands, and loads or modifies the parameter settings of the ASD.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (off then on) for the changes to take effect.
Communications Time Out Time
Program
Communications Communication Settings
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by setting the time that no activity may exist over the communications link before the link is severed (Time Out).
The communications network includes other ASDs and Host/Control computers that monitor the status of the ASD(s), transfers commands, and loads or modifies the parameter settings of the ASD.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (off then on) for the changes to take effect.
RS485 2- and 4-Wire Communications Time-Out Action
Program
Communications Communication Settings
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by determining the action to be taken in the event of a time-out (Time-Out Action).
The communications network includes other ASDs and Host/Control computers that monitor the status of the ASD(s), transfers commands, and loads or modifies the parameter settings of the drive.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (off then on) for the changes to take effect.
Settings:
(Settings Are For 2-Wire/4-Wire)
0 — No Action/No Action
1 — Alarm/No Action
2 — Trip/No Action
3 — No Action/Alarm
4 — Alarm/Alarm
5 — Trip/Alarm
6 — No Action/Trip
7 — Alarm/Trip
8 — Trip/Trip
Direct Access Number — F802
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 247
Direct Access Number — F803
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0 (Off)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0 (Off)
Maximum — 100
Units — Seconds
Direct Access Number — F804
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Trip/Trip
Changeable During Run — Yes
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 203
RS485 2-Wire Send Wait Time
Program
Communications Communication Settings
This parameter sets the RS485 2-Wire response delay time.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (off then on) for the changes to take effect.
RS485 2-Wire ASD-to-ASD Communications
Program
Communications Communication Settings
The function of this parameter is 2-fold:
1) In a Master/Follower configuration and while communicating via RS485
2-Wire, this parameter sets the ASD as the Master or the Follower.
2) This parameter determines the function of the ASD while operating as the
Master or the Follower. If operating as the Master ASD, an output parameter of the Master ASD is used to control the Follower ASDs and is set here. If operating as a Follower ASD, the ASD response if an error is incurred is set here.
Note:
Select a Follower function here if
is configured as a Master
Output controller for any other ASD in the system. Otherwise, an
EOI failure will result.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (off then on) for the changes to take effect.
Settings:
0 — Follower (Decel Stop If Error Detected)
1 — Follower (Continues Operation If Error Detected)
2 — Follower (Emergency Off If Error Detected)
3 — Master (Frequency Command)
4 — Master (Output Frequency)
5 — Master (Torque Reference)
6 — Master (Torque Command)
RS485 2-Wire Protocol Selection
Program
Communications Communication Reference Adjust
This parameter sets the RS485 2-Wire communications protocol.
Settings:
0 — Toshiba
1 — Modbus
Direct Access Number — F805
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 2.00
Units — Seconds
Direct Access Number — F806
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Follower (Decel Stop)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F807
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Toshiba
Changeable During Run — Yes
204 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Frequency Point Selection
Program
Communications Communication Reference Adjust
This parameter is used to set the communications reference for scaling.
See
— F814 for more information on this setting.
Note:
Scaling the communications signal is not required for all applications.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (off then on) for the changes to take effect.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — RS485 (2-Wire — NOT USED)
2 — RS485 4-Wire
3 — Communication Card
Point 1 Setting
Program
Communications Communication Reference Adjust
When enabled at F810 , this parameter is used to allow the user to set the gain
and bias of the speed control input to the drive when the speed control signal is
received via the source selected at F810 .
Gain and Bias Settings
When operating in the Speed Control mode and using one of the control sources from Settings above, the settings that determine the gain and bias properties of the input signal are:
• Communications Reference Speed Setpoint 1 (frequency) ( F812 ),
• the communications input signal value that represents Communications
Reference Speed Setpoint 1 (frequency): F811 ,
• Communications Reference Speed Setpoint 2 (frequency) (
), and
• the communications input signal value that represents Communications
Reference Speed Setpoint 2 (frequency): F813
.
Once set, as the input signal value changes, the output frequency of the drive will vary in accordance with the above settings.
This parameter sets the Communications Reference input value that represents
Communications Reference Speed Setpoint 1 (frequency). This value is entered as 0 to 100% of the Communications Reference input value range.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (off then on) for the changes to take effect.
Point 1 Frequency
Program
Communications Communication Reference Adjust
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the Communications
Reference speed control input.
See
for more information on this setting.
This parameter sets Communications Reference Speed Setpoint 1.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (off then on) for the changes to take effect.
Direct Access Number — F810
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F811
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 100
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F812
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 205
Point 2 Setting
Program
Communications Communication Reference Adjust
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the Communications
Reference speed control input.
See
for more information on this setting.
This parameter sets the Communications Reference input value that represents
Communications Reference Speed Setpoint 2 (frequency). This value is entered as 0 to 100% of the Communications Reference input value range.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (off then on) for the changes to take effect.
Point 2 Frequency
Program
Communications Communication Reference Adjust
This parameter is used to set the gain and bias of the Communications
Reference speed control input.
See
for more information on this setting.
This parameter sets the Communications Reference Speed Setpoint 2.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (off then on) for the changes to take effect.
RS485 Baud Rate
Program
Communications Communication Settings
This parameter sets the RS485 baud rate.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (off then on) for the changes to take effect.
Settings:
0 — 9600 bps
1 — 19200 bps
2 — 38400 bps
RS485 Send Wait Time
Program
Communications Communication Settings
This parameter sets the RS485 response delay time.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (off then on) for the changes to take effect.
Direct Access Number — F813
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 100
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 100
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F814
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 60.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — Max. Freq. (
Units — Hz
Direct Access Number — F820
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 19200
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F825
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 2.00
Units — Seconds
206 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
RS485 ASD-to-ASD Communications
Program
Communications Communication Settings
The function of this parameter is 2-fold:
1) In a Master/Follower configuration and while communicating via RS485
4-Wire, this parameter sets the ASD as the Master or the Follower.
2) This parameter determines the function of the ASD while operating as the
Master or the Follower. If operating as the Master ASD, an output parameter of the Master ASD is used to control the Follower ASDs and is set here. If operating as a Follower ASD, the ASD response if an error is incurred is set here.
Note:
Select a Follower function here if
Master Output controller for any other ASD in the system.
Otherwise, an EOI failure will result.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (off then on) for the changes to take effect.
Settings:
0 — Follower (Decel Stop If Error Detected)
1 — Follower (Continues Operation If Error Detected)
2 — Follower (Emergency Off If Error Detected)
3 — Master (Frequency Command)
4 — Master (Output Frequency)
5 — Master (Torque Reference)
6 — Master (Output Torque)
RS485 Protocol Selection (TSB/ModBus)
Program
Communications Communication Settings
This parameter sets the communications protocol for ASD-to-ASD communications.
Settings:
0 — Toshiba
1 — Modbus
Communications Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 1
Program
Communications Communication Settings
While using the DeviceNet/Profibus communications protocol, this parameter allows the user to select the read and write information communicated between the ASD and the Host.
Read information may include the ASD fault status, ASD speed, ASD MAC
ID, etc. Write information may include Enable/Disable DeviceNet commands,
Forward run, ACC/DEC command, etc.
See the DeviceNet Option Instruction Manual (P/N 58683) for more information on this parameter.
Settings:
0 – 7
Direct Access Number — F826
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Follower (Decel Stop)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F829
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Toshiba
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F830
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0
Changeable During Run — Yes
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 207
Communications Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 2
Program
Communications Communication Settings
While using the DeviceNet/Profibus communications protocol, parameters
F831 – F836 allow the user to select the ASD memory location that holds the
Command/Frequency/Monitoring instructions to be applied to the ASD for
Communications Option Settings 2 – 7, respectively.
See the DeviceNet Option Instruction Manual (P/N 58683) for more information on this parameter.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — FA06 (ALCAN Command 1)
2 — FA23 (ALCAN Command 2)
3 — FA07 (ALCAN Frequency Command, 0.01 Hz)
4 — FA33 (Torque Command, 0.01%)
5 — FA50 (Terminal Output)
6 — FA51 (Analog Output Data from Comm. [FM])
7 — FA52 (Analog Output Data from Comm. [AM])
8 — F601 (Stall Prevention Level, %)
9 — F441 (Power Running Torque Limit 1 Level, 0.01%)
10 —
F443 (Regen. Braking Torque Limit 1 Level, 0.01%)
(Speed Loop Proportional Gain)
12 —
F461 (Speed Loop Stabilization Coefficient)
Communications Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 3
Program
Communications Communication Settings
Same as F831 . See F831 for information on this parameter
Communications Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 4
Program
Communications Communication Settings
Same as F831 . See F831 for information on this parameter
Communications Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 5
Program
Communications Communication Settings
Same as F831 . See F831 for information on this parameter
Communications Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 6
Program
Communications Communication Settings
Same as F831 . See F831 for information on this parameter
Communications Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 7
Program
Communications Communication Settings
Same as F831 . See F831 for information on this parameter
Direct Access Number — F831
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0000h
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F832
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0000h
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F833
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0000h
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F834
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0000h
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F835
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0000h
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F836
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0000h
Changeable During Run — Yes
208 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Communications Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 8
Program
Communications Communication Settings
While using the DeviceNet/Profibus communications protocol, parameters
F846 allow the user to select the ASD memory location that holds the
Command/Frequency/Monitoring instructions to be applied to the ASD for
Communications Option Settings 8 – 13, respectively.
See the DeviceNet Option Instruction Manual (P/N 58683) for more information on this parameter.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — FD01 (ASD Status 1)
2 — FD00 (Output Frequency, 0.01 Hz)
3 — FD03 (Output Current, 0.01%)
4 — FD05 (Output Voltage, 0.01%)
5 — FC91 (ASD Alarm)
6 — FD22 (PID Feedback Value, 0.01 Hz)
7 — FD06 (Input Terminal Status)
8 — FD07 (Output Terminal Status)
9 — FE36 (VI/II [V/I])
10 — FE35 (RR Input)
11 — FE37 (RX Input)
12 — FD04 (Input Voltage [DC Detection], 0.01%)
13 — FD16 (Real-time Speed Feedback
14 — FD18 (Torque, 0.01%)
15 — FE60 (My Monitor)
16 — FE61 (My Monitor)
17 — FE62 (My Monitor)
18 — FE63 (My Monitor)
19 — F880 (Free Notes)
20 — FD29 (Input Power, 0.01 kW)
21 — FD30 (Output Power, 0.01 kW)
22 — FE14 (Cumulative Operation Time, 0.01=1 Hour)
23 — FE40 (FM Terminal Output Monitor)
24 — FE41 (AM Terminal Output Monitor)
Communications Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 9
Program
Communications Communication Settings
Same as F841 . See F841 for information on this parameter
Communications Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 10
Program
Communications Communication Settings
Same as F841 . See F841 for information on this parameter
Communications Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 11
Program
Communications Communication Settings
Same as F841 . See F841 for information on this parameter
Direct Access Number — F841
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0000h
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F842
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0000h
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F843
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0000h
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F844
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0000h
Changeable During Run — Yes
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 209
Communications Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 12
Program
Communications Communication Settings
Same as F841 . See F841 for information on this parameter
Communications Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting 13
Program
Communications Communication Settings
Same as F841 . See F841 for information on this parameter
Disconnection Detection Extended Time
Program
Communications Communication Settings
This parameter is used to set the length of time that no communications activity may exist before the communications link is disconnected.
ASD Operation at Disconnect
Program
Communications Communication Settings
This parameter is used to set the G9 ASD action to be carried out in the event of the loss of communications.
Settings:
0 — Stop and Terminate Communication
1 — Do Nothing (Continue Programmed Operation)
2 — Deceleration Stop
3 — Coast Stop
4 — Emergency Off
5 — Preset Speed (Setting of
)
Preset Speed Operation Selection
Program
Communications Communication Settings
This parameter is used in conjunction with parameter
.
This parameter setting is used to set the Preset Speed selection to be used if
Preset Speed is selected at parameter F851
.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 – 15 — Preset Speed Number
Communications Option Station Address Monitor
Program
Communications Communication Settings
This parameter is used in the setup of the communications network by reading the Media Access Code (MAC) address of the ASD that is connected to a node of the communications system.
The MAC Address is set via DIP switches of the optional device.
See the DeviceNet Option Instruction Manual (P/N 58683) for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F845
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0000h
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F846
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0000h
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F850
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 100.0
Units — Seconds
Direct Access Number — F851
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Stop,
Communication Release
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F852
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F853
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 255
210 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Communications Option Speed Switch Monitor DeviceNet/
CC-Link
Program
Communications Communication Settings
This parameter is used in the setup of the communications network by reading the hardware-specific settings of the option card being used with the ASD.
If using the DEV002Z Devicenet card, this parameter reads the hardware switch SW300 setting of the Devicenet card. SW300 sets the baud rate and the
MAC address of the option card that is connected to a node of the communications system.
See the DeviceNet Option Instruction Manual (P/N 58683) for more information on this parameter or see the Instruction manual for the option being used with the G9 ASD.
Block Write Data 1
Program
Communications Communication Settings
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by establishing the type of data to be written to the ASD of the communications link.
The communications network includes other ASDs and Host/Control computers that monitor the status of the ASD(s), transfers commands, and loads or modifies the parameter settings of the ASD.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (off then on) for the changes to take effect.
Settings:
0 — None
1 — FA00 (Command 1)
2 — FA20 (Command 2)
3 — FA01 (Frequency)
4 — FA50 (TB output)
5 — FA51 (Analog Output)
Block Write Data 2
Program
Communications Communication Settings
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by establishing the type of data to be written to the ASD of the communications link.
The communications network includes other ASDs and Host/Control computers that monitor the status of the ASD(s), transfers commands, and loads or modifies the parameter settings of the ASD.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (off then on) for the changes to take effect.
Settings:
0 — None
1 — FA00 (Command 1)
2 — FA20 (Command 2)
3 — FA01 (Frequency)
4 — FA50 (TB output)
5 — FA51 (Analog Output)
Direct Access Number — F854
Parameter Type — Hardware Selectable
Factory Default — Option-Specific
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 255
Direct Access Number — F870
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — None
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F871
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — None
Changeable During Run — Yes
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 211
Block Read Data 1
Program
Communications Communication Settings
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by establishing the type of data to be read from the ASD using the communications link.
The communications network includes other ASDs and Host/Control computers that monitor the status of the ASD(s), transfers commands, and loads or modifies the parameter settings of the ASD.
Changes made to this parameter require that the power be cycled (off then on) for the changes to take effect.
Settings:
0 — None
1 — Status Information
2 — Output Frequency
3 — Output Current
4 — Output Voltage
5 — Alarm Information
6 — PID Feedback Value
7 — Input Terminal Status
8 — Output Terminal Status
9 — VI/II (V/I)
10 — RR
11 — RX
12 — DC Voltage
13 — PG Feedback
14 — Torque
15 — My Monitor 1
16 — My Monitor 2
17 — My Monitor 3
18 — My Monitor 4
19 — Free Memo
Block Read Data 2
Program
Communications Communication Settings
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by establishing the type of data to be read from the ASD of the communications link.
See parameter F875 for more information on this setting.
Block Read Data 3
Program
Communications Communication Settings
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by establishing the type of data to be read from the ASD of the communications link.
See parameter F875 for more information on this setting.
Direct Access Number — F875
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (None)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F876
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — None
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F877
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — None
Changeable During Run — Yes
212 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Block Read Data 4
Program
Communications Communication Settings
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by establishing the type of data to be read from the ASD of the communications link.
See parameter F875 for more information on this setting.
Block Read Data 5
Program
Communications Communication Settings
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by establishing the type of data to be read from the ASD of the communications link.
See parameter F875 for more information on this setting.
Free Notes
Program
Communications Communication Settings
This is an unused parameter that has allocated memory space.
The space may be used at the discretion of the user.This space may be used to store information or a note to be transferred using communications.
Network Option Reset Settings
Program
Communications Communication Settings
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the communications network by establishing the targets of a Reset command received via the communications link.
Settings:
0 — Reset ASD only
1 — Reset Option Board and ASD
Input Function Target 1
Program
My Function My Function Unit 1
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 1 terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target
1 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
,
, or
.
See
F977 for more information on this parameter.
Input Function Command 1
Program
My Function My Function Unit 1
This parameter is used to assign a user-selected logical operator to two userselected Input Function Target variables, enable a counter/timer function, or perform a hold/reset function.
Table 11 on pg. 243 lists the available selections. Their use and selection
requirements are described in an example at F977
.
Direct Access Number — F878
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — None
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F879
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — None
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F880
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 65534
Direct Access Number — F899
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Reset ASD only
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F900
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F901
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (NOP)
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 213
Input Function Target 2
Program
My Function My Function Unit 1
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 2 terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target
2 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
,
, or
.
See
F977 for more information on this parameter.
Input Function Command 2
Program
My Function My Function Unit 1
This parameter is used to assign a user-selected logical operator to two userselected Input Function Target variables, enable a counter/timer function, or perform a hold/reset function.
Table 11 on pg. 243 lists the available selections. Their use and selection
requirements are described in an example at F977
.
Input Function Target 3
Program
My Function My Function Unit 1
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 3 terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target
3 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
,
, or
.
See
F977 for more information on this parameter.
Output Function Assigned
Program
My Function My Function Unit 1
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the Output Function Assigned terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Output Function
Assigned data location to one of the functions listed in the Input Setting field of
.
Settings:
0 – 3099
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N E6581335) and F977 for more
information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F902
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F903
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (NOP)
Direct Access Number — F904
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F905
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
214 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Input Function Target 1
Program
My Function My Function Unit 2
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 1 terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target
1 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
,
, or
.
See
F977 for more information on this parameter.
Input Function Command 1
Program
My Function My Function Unit 2
This parameter is used to assign a user-selected logical operator to two userselected Input Function Target variables, enable a counter/timer function, or perform a hold/reset function.
Table 11 on pg. 243 lists the available selections. Their use and selection
requirements are described in an example at F977
.
Input Function Target 2
Program
My Function My Function Unit 2
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 2 terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target
2 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
,
, or
.
See
F977 for more information on this parameter.
Input Function Command 2
Program
My Function My Function Unit 2
This parameter is used to assign a user-selected logical operator to two userselected Input Function Target variables, enable a counter/timer function, or perform a hold/reset function.
Table 11 on pg. 243 lists the available selections. Their use and selection
requirements are described in an example at F977
.
Input Function Target 3
Program
My Function My Function Unit 2
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 3 terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target
3 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
,
, or
.
See
F977 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F906
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F907
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (NOP)
Direct Access Number — F908
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F909
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (NOP)
Direct Access Number — F910
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 215
Output Function Assigned
Program
My Function My Function Unit 2
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the Output Function Assigned terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Output Function
Assigned data location to one of the functions listed in the Input Setting field of
.
Settings:
0 – 3099
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N E6581335) and F977 for more
information on this parameter.
Input Function Target 1
Program
My Function My Function Unit 3
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 1 terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target
1 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
,
, or
.
See
F977 for more information on this parameter.
Input Function Command 1
Program
My Function My Function Unit 3
This parameter is used to assign a user-selected logical operator to two userselected Input Function Target variables, enable a counter/timer function, or perform a hold/reset function.
Table 11 on pg. 243 lists the available selections. Their use and selection
requirements are described in an example at F977
.
Input Function Target 2
Program
My Function My Function Unit 3
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 2 terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target
2 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
,
, or
.
See
F977 for more information on this parameter.
Input Function Command 2
Program
My Function My Function Unit 3
This parameter is used to assign a user-selected logical operator to two userselected Input Function Target variables, enable a counter/timer function, or perform a hold/reset function.
Table 11 on pg. 243 lists the available selections. Their use and selection
requirements are described in an example at F977
.
Direct Access Number — F911
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F912
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F913
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (NOP)
Direct Access Number — F914
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F915
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (NOP)
216 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Input Function Target 3
Program
My Function My Function Unit 3
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 3 terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target
3 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
,
, or
.
See
for more information on this parameter.
Output Function Assigned
Program
My Function My Function Unit 3
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the Output Function Assigned terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Output Function
Assigned data location to one of the functions listed in the Input Setting field of
.
Settings:
0 – 3099
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N E6581335) and F977 for more
information on this parameter.
My Function Percent Data 1
Program
My Function My Function Data
This parameter is used to set the trigger threshold level of the analog signal of the My Function Percent Data 1.
The analog signal is selected using the Input Setting number from Table 8 on pg. 239
.
Once the assigned output value reaches the threshold setting of this parameter the output value is transferred to My Function Out 1.
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N E6581335) and F977 for more
information on this parameter.
My Function Percent Data 2
Program
My Function My Function Data
This parameter is used to set the trigger threshold level of the analog signal of the My Function Percent Data 2.
The analog signal is selected using the Input Setting number from Table 8 on pg. 239
.
Direct Access Number — F916
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F917
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F918
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 200.00
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F919
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 200.00
Units — %
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 217
My Function Percent Data 3
Program
My Function My Function Data
This parameter is used to set the trigger threshold level of the analog signal of the My Function Percent Data 3.
The analog signal is selected using the Input Setting number from Table 8 on pg. 239
.
My Function Percent Data 4
Program
My Function My Function Data
This parameter is used to set the trigger threshold level of the analog signal of the My Function Percent Data 4.
The analog signal is selected using the Input Setting number from Table 8 on pg. 239
.
My Function Percent Data 5
Program
My Function My Function Data
This parameter is used to set the trigger threshold level of the analog signal of the My Function Percent Data 5.
The analog signal is selected using the Input Setting number from Table 8 on pg. 239
.
My Function Frequency Data 1
Program
My Function My Function Data
This parameter is used to set the trigger threshold level of the analog signal of the My Function Frequency Data 1.
The analog signal is selected using the Input Setting number from Table 8 on pg. 239
.
My Function Frequency Data 2
Program
My Function My Function Data
This parameter is used to set the trigger threshold level of the analog signal of the My Function Frequency Data 2.
The analog signal is selected using the Input Setting number from Table 8 on pg. 239
.
My Function Frequency Data 3
Program
My Function My Function Data
This parameter is used to set the trigger threshold level of the analog signal of the My Function Frequency Data 3.
The analog signal is selected using the Input Setting number from Table 8 on pg. 239
.
Direct Access Number — F920
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 200.00
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F921
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 200.00
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F922
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 200.00
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F923
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 200.00
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F924
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 200.00
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F925
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 200.00
Units — %
218 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
My Function Frequency Data 4
Program
My Function My Function Data
This parameter is used to set the trigger threshold level of the analog signal of the My Function Frequency Data 4.
The analog signal is selected using the Input Setting number from Table 8 on pg. 239
.
My Function Frequency Data 5
Program
My Function My Function Data
This parameter is used to set the trigger threshold level of the analog signal of the My Function Frequency Data 5.
The analog signal is selected using the Input Setting number from Table 8 on pg. 239
.
My Function Time Data 1
Program
My Function My Function Data
This parameter is used to set the response delay of the My Function Time
Data 1 terminal.
The applied discrete input signal must be present at the input terminal of the
G9 ASD for the time setting here for a system response.
Discrete terminal input activation that does not equal or exceed this setting will be ignored.
My Function Time Data 2
Program
My Function My Function Data
This parameter is used to set the response delay of the My Function Time
Data 2 terminal.
The applied discrete input signal must be present at the input terminal of the
G9 ASD for the time setting here for a system response.
Discrete terminal input activation that does not equal or exceed this setting will be ignored.
My Function Time Data 3
Program
My Function My Function Data
This parameter is used to set the response delay of the My Function Time
Data 3 terminal.
The applied discrete input signal must be present at the input terminal of the
G9 ASD for the time setting here for a system response.
Discrete terminal input activation that does not equal or exceed this setting will be ignored.
Direct Access Number — F926
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 200.00
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F927
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.00
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.00
Maximum — 200.00
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F928
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.01
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.01
Maximum — 600.00
Units — Seconds
Direct Access Number — F929
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.01
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.01
Maximum — 600.00
Units — Seconds
Direct Access Number — F930
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.01
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.01
Maximum — 600.00
Units — Seconds
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 219
My Function Time Data 4
Program
My Function My Function Data
This parameter is used to set the response delay of the My Function Time
Data 4 terminal.
The applied discrete input signal must be present at the input terminal of the
G9 ASD for the time setting here for a system response.
Discrete terminal input activation that does not equal or exceed this setting will be ignored.
My Function Time Data 5
Program
My Function My Function Data
This parameter is used to set the response delay of the My Function Time
Data 5 terminal.
The applied discrete input signal must be present at the input terminal of the
G9 ASD for the time setting here for a system response.
Discrete terminal input activation that does not equal or exceed this setting will be ignored.
My Function Count Data 1
Program
My Function My Function Data
This parameter is used to set the pulse-count threshold value used to trigger the discrete output COUNT1 (ON Timer).
COUNT1 (ON Timer) outputs a 1 upon reaching the threshold setting of this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F931
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.01
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.01
Maximum — 600.00
Units — Seconds
Direct Access Number — F932
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0.01
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0.01
Maximum — 600.00
Units — Seconds
My Function Count Data 2
Program
My Function My Function Data
This parameter is used to set the pulse-count threshold value used to trigger the discrete output COUNT2 (ON Timer).
COUNT2 (ON Timer) outputs a 1 upon reaching the threshold setting at this parameter.
Input Function Target 1
Program
My Function My Function Unit 4
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 1 terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target
1 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
,
, or
.
See
F977 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F933
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 9999
Units — Pulses
Direct Access Number — F934
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 0
Changeable During Run — Yes
Minimum — 0
Maximum — 9999
Units — Pulses
Direct Access Number — F935
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
220 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Input Function Command 1
Program
My Function My Function Unit 4
This parameter is used to assign a user-selected logical operator to two userselected Input Function Target variables, enable a counter/timer function, or perform a hold/reset function.
Table 11 on pg. 243 lists the available selections. Their use and selection
requirements are described in an example at F977
.
Input Function Target 2
Program
My Function My Function Unit 4
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 2 terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target
2 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
,
, or
.
See
F977 for more information on this parameter.
Input Function Command 2
Program
My Function My Function Unit 4
This parameter is used to assign a user-selected logical operator to two userselected Input Function Target variables, enable a counter/timer function, or perform a hold/reset function.
Table 11 on pg. 243 lists the available selections. Their use and selection
requirements are described in an example at F977
.
Input Function Target 3
Program
My Function My Function Unit 4
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 3 terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target
3 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
,
, or
.
See
F977 for more information on this parameter.
Output Function Assigned
Program
My Function My Function Unit 4
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the Output Function Assigned terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Output Function
Assigned data location to one of the functions listed in the Input Setting field of
.
Settings:
0 – 3099
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N E6581335) and F977 for more
information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F936
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (NOP)
Direct Access Number — F937
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F938
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (NOP)
Direct Access Number — F939
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F940
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 221
Input Function Target 1
Program
My Function My Function Unit 5
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 1 terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target
1 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
,
, or
.
See
F977 for more information on this parameter.
Input Function Command 1
Program
My Function My Function Unit 5
This parameter is used to assign a user-selected logical operator to two userselected Input Function Target variables, enable a counter/timer function, or perform a hold/reset function.
Table 11 on pg. 243 lists the available selections. Their use and selection
requirements are described in an example at F977
.
Input Function Target 2
Program
My Function My Function Unit 5
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 2 terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target
2 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
,
, or
.
See
F977 for more information on this parameter.
Input Function Command 2
Program
My Function My Function Unit 5
This parameter is used to assign a user-selected logical operator to two userselected Input Function Target variables, enable a counter/timer function, or perform a hold/reset function.
Table 11 on pg. 243 lists the available selections. Their use and selection
requirements are described in an example at F977
.
Input Function Target 3
Program
My Function My Function Unit 5
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 3 terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target
3 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
,
, or
.
See
F977 for more information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F941
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F942
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (NOP)
Direct Access Number — F943
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F944
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (NOP)
Direct Access Number — F945
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
222 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Output Function Assigned
Program
My Function My Function Unit 5
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the Output Function Assigned terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Output Function
Assigned data location to one of the functions listed in the Input Setting field of
.
Settings:
0 – 3099
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N E6581335) and F977 for more
information on this parameter.
Input Function Target 1
Program
My Function My Function Unit 6
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 1 terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target
1 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
,
, or
.
See
F977 for more information on this parameter.
Input Function Command 1
Program
My Function My Function Unit 6
This parameter is used to assign a user-selected logical operator to two userselected Input Function Target variables, enable a counter/timer function, or perform a hold/reset function.
Table 11 on pg. 243 lists the available selections. Their use and selection
requirements are described in an example at F977
.
Input Function Target 2
Program
My Function My Function Unit 6
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 2 terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target
2 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
,
, or
.
See
F977 for more information on this parameter.
Input Function Command 2
Program
My Function My Function Unit 6
This parameter is used to assign a user-selected logical operator to two userselected Input Function Target variables, enable a counter/timer function, or perform a hold/reset function.
Table 11 on pg. 243 lists the available selections. Their use and selection
requirements are described in an example at F977
.
Direct Access Number — F946
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F947
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F948
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (NOP)
Direct Access Number — F949
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F950
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (NOP)
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 223
Input Function Target 3
Program
My Function My Function Unit 6
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 3 terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target
3 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
,
, or
.
See
F977 for more information on this parameter.
Output Function Assigned
Program
My Function My Function Unit 6
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the Output Function Assigned terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Output Function
Assigned data location to one of the functions listed in the Input Setting field of
.
Settings:
0 – 3099
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N E6581335) and F977 for more
information on this parameter.
Input Function Target 1
Program
My Function My Function Unit 7
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 1 terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target
1 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
,
, or
.
See
F977 for more information on this parameter.
Input Function Command 1
Program
My Function My Function Unit 7
This parameter is used to assign a user-selected logical operator to two userselected Input Function Target variables, enable a counter/timer function, or perform a hold/reset function.
Table 11 on pg. 243 lists the available selections. Their use and selection
requirements are described in an example at F977
.
Direct Access Number — F951
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F952
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F953
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F954
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (NOP)
224 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Input Function Target 2
Program
My Function My Function Unit 7
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 2 terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target
2 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
,
, or
.
See
F977 for more information on this parameter.
Input Function Command 2
Program
My Function My Function Unit 7
This parameter is used to assign a user-selected logical operator to two userselected Input Function Target variables, enable a counter/timer function, or perform a hold/reset function.
Table 11 on pg. 243 lists the available selections. Their use and selection
requirements are described in an example at F977
.
Input Function Target 3
Program
My Function My Function Unit 7
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Input Function Target 3 terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Input Function Target
3 terminal to any one of the user-selectable functions listed in
,
, or
.
See
F977 for more information on this parameter.
Output Function Assigned
Program
My Function My Function Unit 7
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the Output Function Assigned terminal.
This setting assigns the function of the programmable Output Function
Assigned data location to one of the functions listed in the Input Setting field of
.
Settings:
0 – 3099
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N E6581335) and F977 for more
information on this parameter.
Direct Access Number — F955
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F956
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (NOP)
Direct Access Number — F957
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F958
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 225
Analog Input Function Target 11
Program
My Function My Function Analog
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Analog Input Function
Target 11 terminal.
The function selected at
may be adjusted using the input analog control signal selected here.
Settings:
0 — Disabled (None)
1 — VI/II (V/I)
2 — RR
3 — RX
4 — Optional RX2+, RX2-
5 — Optional V/I
Analog Function Assigned Object 11
Program
My Function My Function Analog
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality to which the adjustment of
is applied.
Settings:
0 — Disabled (None)
1 — Acceleration Rate
2 — Upper-Limit Frequency
3 — Acceleration Multiplication Factor
4 — Deceleration Multiplication Factor
5 — Manual Torque Boost
6 — Over-Current Stall ( F601 )
7 — Thermal Protection (
)
8 — Speed Loop Proportional Gain ( F460 )
)
10 — PID Proportional Gain (
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N E6581335) for a complete description of the setup requirements and operational information of the Analog
Function Assigned Object parameter.
Analog Input Function Target 21
Program
My Function My Function Analog
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality of the programmable Analog Input Function
Target 21 terminal.
The function selected at
may be adjusted using the input analog control signal selected here.
Settings:
0 — Disabled (None)
1 — VI/II (V/I)
2 — RR
3 — RX
4 — Optional RX2+, RX2-
5 — Optional V/I
Direct Access Number — F959
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F961
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F962
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
226 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Analog Function Assigned Object 21
Program
My Function My Function Analog
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by selecting the functionality to which the adjustment of
is applied.
Settings:
0 — Disabled (None)
1 — Acceleration Rate
2 — Upper-Limit Frequency
3 — Acceleration Multiplication Factor
4 — Deceleration Multiplication Factor
5 — Manual Torque Boost
6 — Over-Current Stall ( F601 )
7 — Thermal Protection (
)
8 — Speed Loop Proportional Gain ( F460 )
)
10 — PID Proportional Gain (
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N E6581335) for a complete description of the setup requirements and operational information of the Analog
Function Assigned Object parameter.
Monitor Output Function 11
Program
My Function My Function Monitor
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by establishing the function that is to be recorded and output as the Peak,
Minimum, or Normal (Avg.) value as selected at parameter Proportional.
Select the Monitor Display Input Setting number from
to output the corresponding function.
Use the Communication Number if operating using communications.
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N E6581335) for a complete description of the setup requirements and operational information of the
Monitor Output Function parameter.
Monitor Output Function Command 11
Program
My Function My Function Monitor
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by allowing the user to select the Peak, Minimum, or Normal (Avg.) value of the
parameter F965 selection to be recorded and output as a monitored function.
Settings:
0 — Normal
1 — Peak
2 — Minimum
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N E6581335) for a complete description of the setup requirements and operational information of the
Monitor Output Function parameter.
Direct Access Number — F964
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 0 (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F965
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 2000
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F966
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Normal
Changeable During Run — Yes
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 227
Monitor Output Function 21
Program
My Function My Function Monitor
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by establishing the function that is to be recorded and output as the Peak,
Minimum, or Normal (Avg.) value as selected at parameter
Select the Monitor Display Input Setting number from
to output the corresponding function.
Use the Communication Number if operating using communications.
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N E6581335) for a complete description of the setup requirements and operational information of the
Monitor Output Function parameter.
Monitor Output Function Command 21
Program
My Function My Function Monitor
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by allowing the user to select the Peak, Minimum, or Normal (Avg.) value of the
parameter F967 selection to be recorded and output as a monitored function.
Settings:
0 — Normal
1 — Peak
2 — Minimum
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N E6581335) for a complete description of the setup requirements and operational information of the
Monitor Output Function parameter.
Monitor Output Function 31
Program
My Function My Function Monitor
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by establishing the function that is to be recorded and output as the Peak,
Minimum, or Normal (Avg.) value as selected at parameter
Select the Monitor Display Input Setting number from
to output the corresponding function.
Use the Communication Number if operating using communications.
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N E6581335) for a complete description of the setup requirements and operational information of the
Monitor Output Function parameter.
Direct Access Number — F967
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 2000
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F968
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Normal
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F969
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 2000
Changeable During Run — Yes
228 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Monitor Output Function Command 31
Program
My Function My Function Monitor
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by allowing the user to select the Peak, Minimum, or Normal (Avg.) value of the
parameter F969 selection to be recorded and output as a monitored function.
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N E6581335) for a complete description of the setup requirements and operational information of the
Monitor Output Function parameter.
Settings:
0 — Normal
1 — Peak
2 — Minimum
Monitor Output Function 41
Program
My Function My Function Monitor
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by establishing the function that is to be recorded and output as the Peak,
Minimum, or Normal (Avg.) value as selected at parameter
Select the Monitor Display Input Setting number from
to output the corresponding function.
Use the Communication Number if operating using communications.
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N E6581335) for a complete description of the setup requirements and operational information of the
Monitor Output Function parameter.
Monitor Output Function Command 41
Program
My Function My Function Monitor
This parameter plays a role in the setup of the My Function feature by allowing the user to select the Peak, Minimum, or Normal (Avg.) value of the
parameter F971 selection to be recorded and output as a monitored function.
Settings:
0 — Normal
1 — Peak
2 — Minimum
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N E6581335) for a complete description of the setup requirements and operational information of the
Monitor Output Function parameter.
Direct Access Number — F970
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Normal
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F971
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — 2000
Changeable During Run — Yes
Direct Access Number — F972
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Normal
Changeable During Run — Yes
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 229
Virtual Input Terminal 1 Selection
Program
Terminal Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the Virtual Input Terminal 1.
As a virtual terminal, it exists only in memory and is considered to always be in its True (connected to CC) state.
It is often practical to assign a function to this terminal that the user desires to be maintained regardless of external conditions or operations.
This parameter sets the programmable Virtual Input Terminal 1 terminal to
one of the functions listed in Table 5 on pg. 234 .
In addition, the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
Virtual Input Terminal 2 Selection
Program
Terminal Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the Virtual Input Terminal 2.
As a virtual terminal, it exists only in memory and is considered to always be in its True (connected to CC) state.
It is often practical to assign a function to this terminal that the user desires to be maintained regardless of external conditions or operations.
This parameter sets the programmable Virtual Input Terminal 2 terminal to
one of the functions listed in Table 5 on pg. 234 .
In addition, the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
Virtual Input Terminal 3 Selection
Program
Terminal Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the Virtual Input Terminal 3.
As a virtual terminal, it exists only in memory and is considered to always be in its True (connected to CC) state.
It is often practical to assign a function to this terminal that the user desires to be maintained regardless of external conditions or operations.
This parameter sets the programmable Virtual Input Terminal 3 terminal to
one of the functions listed in Table 5 on pg. 234 .
In addition, the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
Virtual Input Terminal 4 Selection
Program
Terminal Input Terminals
This parameter is used to set the functionality of the Virtual Input Terminal 4.
As a virtual terminal, it exists only in memory and is considered to always be in its True (connected to CC) state.
It is often practical to assign a function to this terminal that the user desires to be maintained regardless of external conditions or operations.
This parameter sets the programmable Virtual Input Terminal 4 terminal to
one of the functions listed in Table 5 on pg. 234 .
In addition, the input terminal must be specified as Normally Open or
Normally Closed.
Direct Access Number — F973
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F974
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F975
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F976
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Unassigned
Changeable During Run — No
230 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
My Function Selection
Program
My Function
This parameter Enables/Disables the configured My Function feature of the
G9 ASD.
Settings:
0 — None (Disabled)
1 — My Function with Terminal Board Signal (discrete terminal activation)
2 — My Function Always On
My Function
The My Function feature is configured using the settings of
to
and is used to enhance the programmability of the G9 ASD by performing two programmable functions: 1) the Combined Terminal Function, and 2) Logic
Operations.
Combined Terminal Function
Assigning more than one function to a discrete input terminal provides two advantages: it effectively expands the number of input terminals, and reduces the number of cables required to support the input/output functions (e.g., assigning ST and F to one terminal). Using Virtual Terminals 1 – 4
–
) are required to use this function.
In the example below, the ST terminal assignment and the F terminal assignment will be combined as one terminal to illustrate this feature. However,
any two of the discrete input terminal assignments listed in Table 5 on pg. 234
may be combined in this manner.
Setup (example)
1.
Disable the My Function parameter at
to prevent the system from starting upon completion of the setup.
2.
Assign the ST function to the S1 terminal (
).
3.
Assign the F function to Virtual Input Terminal 1 (
).
4.
Set Input Function Target 1 to 5 (
F900 ). This setting assigns S1 as the
control input terminal.
5.
Set Output Function Assigned to 21 ( F905 ). This setting is a command
selection (S1) to Virtual Input Terminal 1, activating both.
6.
Enable the My Function parameter at F977 by selecting My Function
Always On or selecting My Function With TB Signal.
If set to My Function Always On, the combination of ST and F are always On (both are connected to CC only during the S1 activation).
If set to My Function With TB Signal, set a discrete input terminal to My
Function Run Signal and connect it to CC to enable My Function.
Connect S1 to CC to activate the ST+F function. A disconnection at either terminal will terminate the My Function programming (discrete input terminal My Function Run Signal is Anded with discrete input terminal
S1).
Connect S1 to CC and the F-to-CC
+
the ST-to-CC functions will be carried out using only S1.
With the aforementioned setup completed, provide a Frequency Command
) and the motor will run at the commanded frequency.
Direct Access Number — F977
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — None (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — No
DANGER
This parameter must always be set to
None at the start of the My Function setup and remain set to None until all of the My Function parameter settings have been confirmed as being correct.
If enabled for normal operation using settings 1 or 2, the motor may start and engage the driven equipment unexpectedly upon receiving a Run signal during the My Function setup.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 231
Combined Terminal Function (Cont.)
Output terminals may also be combined to produce one output response to
multiple conditions using the computational operators of Table 11 on pg. 243 .
Assigning more than one function to a discrete output terminal provides two advantages: it effectively expands the number of input terminals, and reduces the number of cables required to support the input/output functions (e.g., assigning Low-Speed Detection and Low-Current Detection to one output
terminal). Using Virtual Terminals 1 – 4 ( F973 – F976
) are required to use this function.
In the example below, the Low-Speed Signal (detection) terminal assignment and the Low-Current Detection terminal assignment will be combined as one terminal output to illustrate this feature. However, any two of the discrete
output terminal assignments may listed in Table 8 on pg. 239 may be combined
in this manner.
Setup (example)
1.
Disable the My Function parameter at
to prevent the system from starting upon completion of the setup.
2.
From Program
Direct Access Unknown Numbers, select Enabled.
3.
Set the OUT1 terminal (
) to My Function Output 1 (222).
4.
Set Input Function Target 1 (
F900 ) to 1004 (Low-Speed Signal
detection). See Table 8 on pg. 239 for a complete listing of available
settings.
5.
Set Input Function Target 2 (
F902 ) to 1026 (Low-Current Alarm). See
Table 8 on pg. 239 for a complete listing of available settings.
6.
Set Input Function Command 1 (
This setting assigns an operator to the Input Function Target 1 and the Input Function
Target 2 settings.
7.
Set Output Function Assigned ( F905
) to 1222.
This setting will transfer the results of the logical AND to My Function Output 1 (OUT1).
8.
Enable the My Function parameter at F977 by selecting My Function
Always On.
With the aforementioned setup completed in the example, once the Low-Speed
Signal AND the Low-Current Alarm are active, the OUT1 terminal is activated for the duration of the Low-Speed/Low-Current condition.
See the My Function Instruction Manual (P/N E6581335) for a complete description of the setup requirements and operational information of the My
Function parameter.
Direct Access Number — F977
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — None (Disabled)
Changeable During Run — No
DANGER
This parameter must always be set to
None at the start of the My Function setup and remain set to None until all of the My Function parameter settings have been confirmed as being correct.
If enabled for normal operation using settings 1 or 2, the motor may start and engage the driven equipment unexpectedly upon receiving a Run signal during the My Function setup.
232 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Traverse Selection
Program
Special Traverse
This parameter setting is used in the setup of the Traverse control mode of operation and is used in conjunction with the discrete terminal activation of the
Traverse Permission Signal.
This parameter is used to enable the Traverse function. The Traverse function
is activated via the discrete input terminal (see Table 5 on pg. 234
).
See the Traverse Control Instruction Manual (P/N 58693) for more information on this feature.
Settings:
0 — Disabled
1 — Enabled
Traverse Acceleration Time
Program
Special Traverse
This parameter setting is used in the setup of the Traverse control mode of operation. This setting establishes the acceleration rate used during the
Traverse function.
See the Traverse Control Instruction Manual (P/N 58693) for more information on this feature.
Traverse Deceleration Time
Program
Special Traverse
This parameter setting is used in the setup of the Traverse control mode of operation. This setting establishes the deceleration rate used during the
Traverse function.
See the Traverse Control Instruction Manual (P/N 58693) for more information on this feature.
Traverse Step
Program
Special Traverse
This parameter setting is used in the setup of the Traverse control mode of operation. This setting is used as a multiplier to establish the amount that the frequency is increased or decreased while using the Traverse function.
See the Traverse Control Instruction Manual (P/N 58693) for more information on this feature.
Traverse Jump Step
Program
Special Traverse
This parameter setting is used in the setup of the Traverse control mode of operation. This setting is used as a multiplier to establish the amount that the frequency is increased or decreased while using the Traverse function when a short burst of rapid speed change is required.
See the Traverse Control Instruction Manual (P/N 58693) for more information on this feature.
Direct Access Number — F980
Parameter Type — Selection List
Factory Default — Disabled
Changeable During Run — No
Direct Access Number — F981
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 25.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 120.0
Units — Seconds
Direct Access Number — F982
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 25.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.1
Maximum — 120.0
Units — Seconds
Direct Access Number — F983
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 10.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 25.0
Units — %
Direct Access Number — F984
Parameter Type — Numerical
Factory Default — 10.0
Changeable During Run — No
Minimum — 0.0
Maximum — 50.0
Units — %
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 233
Table 5. Discrete Input Terminal Assignment Selections And Descriptions.
Sel. No.
NO NC
Terminal Selection Descriptions
0 1 Unassigned — No operation.
2 3 Forward — Provides a Forward run command.
4 5 Reverse — Provides a Reverse run command.
6 7 Standby — Enables the Forward and Reverse operation commands.
8 9 Reset — Resets the device and any active faults.
10 11
Preset Speed 1 — Preset Speed 1 is used as the LSB of the 4-bit nibble that is used to select a Preset Speed.
12 13 Preset Speed 2 — Preset Speed 2 is used as the second bit of the 4-bit nibble that is used to select a Preset Speed.
14 15 Preset Speed 3 — Preset Speed 3 is used as the third bit of the 4-bit nibble that is used to select a Preset Speed.
16 17 Preset Speed 4 — Preset Speed 4 is used as the MSB of the 4-bit nibble that is used to select a Preset Speed.
18 19
Jog Run — This terminal activates a Jog for the duration of the activation. The Jog settings may be configured at
20
22
21
23
Emergency Off — Terminates the output signal from the drive and may apply a brake if so configured. The braking
method may be selected at F603
.
DC Braking — Upon activation the drive outputs a DC current that is injected into the windings of the motor to quickly brake the motor.
Accel/Decel Switching 1/Accel/Decel Switching 2 — Activating combinations of discrete input terminals
Accel/Decel Switching 1 and 2 allow for the selection of Accel/Decel profiles 1 – 4 as shown below.
24 25
See
for more information on this terminal setting.
A/D SW Terminal
#1 #2
A/D Profile Selection
The settings of the A/D selections 1 – 4 are performed at
/
,
, respectively.
26 27
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1=Terminal Activated
3
4
1
2
Accel/Decel profiles are comprised of the Accel/
Decel settings, Pattern, and Switching
Frequency.
28 29
30 31
V/f Switching 1/V/f Switching 2 — Activating combinations of discrete input terminals V/f Switching 1 and 2 allow for the selection of a V/f switching profile as listed below.
V/f Switching Terminal
#1 #2
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1=Terminal Activated
V/f Selection
1
2
3
4
The 1–4 settings of the V/f Switching selections
are performed at parameters F170
–
.
Note:
NO/NC = Normally Open/Normally Closed.
234 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Table 5. (Continued) Discrete Input Terminal Assignment Selections And Descriptions.
Sel. No.
NO NC
32 33
34 35
Terminal Selection Descriptions
Torque Limit Switching 1/Torque Limit Switching 2 — Activating combinations of discrete input terminals
Torque Limit Switching 1 and 2 allow for the selection of a torque limit switching profile as listed below.
Torque Limit
Switching Terminal
#1 #2
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1=Terminal Activated
Torque Limit Selection
1
2
3
4
The 1–4 settings of the torque limit switching
selections are performed at parameters F440 –
.
36 37 PID Off — Turns off PID control.
38 39 Pattern Operation Group 1 — Initiates the Pattern 1 Pattern Run.
40 41 Pattern Operation Group 2 — Initiates the Pattern 2 Pattern Run.
42 43
Pattern Operation Continuation — Initiates a continuation of the last Pattern Run from its stopping point.
44 45
Pattern Operation Trigger — Initiates the first Preset Speed of a Pattern Run and initiates each subsequent enabled Preset Speed with continued activations.
46 47
External Over-Heat — Causes an Over-Heat Trip (OH).
48
54
49
55
Local Priority (cancels serial priority) — Overrides any serial control and returns the Command and Frequency
control to the settings of F003 and F004 .
50 51
Hold (3-Wire Stop) — Decelerates the motor to a stop.
52 53 PID Differentiation/Integration Clear — Clears the PID value.
PID Forward/Reverse Switching — Toggles the gradient characteristic of the feedback response of the VI/II (V/I) terminal during PID-controlled operation.
56 57 Forced Continuous Operation — Ignore PID control settings for the duration of activation.
58 59 Specified Speed Operation — Runs speed as commanded by the Frequency Mode setting.
60
62
64
61
63
65
Dwell Signal — Used in conjunction with the Acceleration/Deceleration Suspend function (
Accel/Decel function for the duration of the activation.
Power Failure Synchronized Signal — Activates the Synchronized Accel/Decel function of the Regenerative
Power Ridethrough feature. See F302
for more information on this terminal setting.
My Function Run — Activates the configured My Function feature. See
for more information on this parameter.
66 67 Autotuning Signal — Initiates the Autotune function. Set
to Autotuning by Input Terminal Signal.
68 69
Speed Gain Switching — Toggles the ASD operating mode from and to Speed Control and Torque Control.
Speed Control operation references parameter settings
and
. Torque Control operation references parameter settings
and
.
70 71 Servo Lock — Holds the motor at 0 Hz until a Run command is received.
72 73
Simple Positioning — While operating in the Positioning Control mode, activation initiates the Stop command.
See
for more information on this terminal setting.
74 75 kWH Display Clear — Clears the kWH meter display.
76 77
Trace Back Trigger— Initiates the data Read/Store function of the Trace Selection parameter. See
for more information on this feature.
78 79 Light-Load High-Speed Disable — Terminates the Light-Load High-Speed operation.
Note:
NO/NC = Normally Open/Normally Closed.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 235
Table 5. (Continued) Discrete Input Terminal Assignment Selections And Descriptions.
Sel. No.
NO NC
Terminal Selection Descriptions
86
88
90
92
87
89
91
93
Binary Write — Writes the status of the discrete input terminals to the control board during binary input speed control.
UP/DOWN Frequency (up) — Increases the speed of the motor for the duration of activation until reaching the
UP/DOWN Frequency (down) — Decreases the speed of the motor for the duration of activation until reaching the
Lower-Limit setting or decreases the speed of the motor in steps (see
F264 for more information on this feature).
UP/DOWN Frequency (clear) — While operating in the Up/Down Frequency speed control mode this terminal initiates a 0 Hz output command. If operating with an activated UP/DOWN Frequency (up or down) terminal, the
output goes to the Lower-Limit ( F013 ) setting.
98 99
104 105
Forward/Reverse — This setting operates in conjunction with another terminal being set to the Run/Stop function.
When configured to Run (Run/Stop to CC), the make or break of this connection to CC changes the direction of the motor.
100 101 Run/Stop — This terminal enables the motor to run when activated and disables the motor when deactivated.
Commercial Power/ASD Switching — Initiates the ASD-to-Commercial Power switching function.
102 103
See parameter F354 for more information on this feature.
Frequency Reference Priority Switching — Toggles frequency control to and from the settings of
106 107 VI/II (V/I) Terminal Priority — Assigns Speed control to the V/I Terminal and overrides the
setting.
108 109
setting.
110 111 Edit Enable — Allows for the override of the lockout parameter setting ( F700
) allowing for parameter editing.
112 113 Control Switching — Toggles the system to and from the speed control and the torque control modes.
122 123
124 125
Fast Deceleration — Using dynamic braking (if enabled and supported), stops the motor at the fastest rate allowed by the load.
Preliminary Excitation — Applies an excitation current to the motor (holds shaft stationary) for the duration of the activation.
Brake Request — Initiates the brake release command. This setting requires that another discrete input terminal be set to Brake Answerback Input to complete the brake release command and to convey the status of the braking system to the user or to a dependent subsystem.
126 127
130 131
Once the braking release function is initiated, the Trouble Internal Timer begins to count down (Trouble Internal
). Should the count-down timer expire before the brake releases or before the Brake
Answerback Input is returned, fault E-11 will occur. Otherwise, the brake releases the motor and normal motor operations resume.
The Braking Release function is primarily used at startup; but, may be used when the brake is applied while the motor is running.
Brake Answerback Input — This setting is required when the Braking Request function is used. The function of this input terminal is to receive the returned status of the braking system. The returned status is either Released or Not
Released.
If Released is returned within the time setting of F630 , normal system function resumes.
134 135
If Not Released is returned or if the
time setting times out before either signal is returned, then fault E-11 occurs.
The returned signal may also be used to notify the user or control a dependent subsystem.
Traverse Permission Signal — Enables/Disables the Traverse function. See parameter
on this feature.
Note:
NO/NC = Normally Open/Normally Closed.
236 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Output
Frequency
Output
Current
Table 6. Output Terminal Assignments For The FP, AM, FM, MON1, and MON2 Output Terminals.
Output Meter Terminal Assignments and Display Item Selections
Selection/
Comm Number
14
15
16
17
9
11
12
13
5
6
3
4
7
8
0
1
2
25
26
27
28
29
18
19
23
24
Terminal Assignment
Name
Output Frequency
Frequency Reference
Output Current
DC Bus Voltage
Output Voltage
Compensated Frequency
Speed Feedback (Realtime)
Speed Feedback (1 Sec Filter)
Torque
Torque Command
Torque Current
Excitation Current
PID Feedback Value
Motor Overload Ratio
ASD Overload Ratio
DBR Overload Ratio
DBR Load Ratio
Input Power
Output Power
Option V/I Input
RR Input
VI/II (V/I) Input
RX Input
RX2 Option (AI1) Input
FM Output
AM Output
Selection/
Comm Number
52
53
54
55
48
49
50
51
33
34
35
45
46
47
30
31
32
61
62
63
64
56
58
59
60
Terminal Assignment Name
100% Meter Adjust Value
Data from Communications
185% Meter Adjust Value
250% Meter Adjust Value
Input Watt Hour
Output Watt Hour
Gain Display
My Function Monitor 1 Without Sign
My Function Monitor 2 Without Sign
My Function Monitor 3 With Sign
My Function Monitor 4 With Sign (FP End)
Signed Output Frequency
Signed Frequency Reference (*Before PI)
Signed Compensated Frequency
Signed Speed Feedback (Realtime)
Signed Speed Feedback (1 Sec Filter)
Signed Torque
Signed Torque Command
Signed Torque Current
Signed PID Feedback Value
Signed RX Input
Signed RX2 Option (AI1) Input
Signed 100% Meter Adjust Value
Signed 185% Meter Adjust Value
Signed 250% Meter Adjust Value
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 237
Selection/Comm
Number
12
13
14
15
16
10
11
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
Table 7. My Function Input Function Target Selections.
Terminal Assignment
(physical terminals or memory locations where virtual/internal)
LI4
LI5
LI6
LI7
LI8
S4
LI1
LI2
LI3
Unassigned
Forward
Reverse
Standby
Reset
S1
S2
S3
Selection/Comm
Number
29
30
31
32
25
26
27
28
21
22
23
24
17
18
19
20
Terminal Assignment
(physical terminals or memory locations where virtual/internal)
B12
B13
B14
B15
Virtual Input Terminal 1
Virtual Input Terminal 2
Virtual Input Terminal 3
Virtual Input Terminal 4
Internal Terminal 1
Internal Terminal 2
Internal Terminal 3
Internal Terminal 4
Internal Terminal 5
Internal Terminal 6
Internal Terminal 7
Internal Terminal 8
238 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Table 8. Output Terminal assignments, My Function Input Setting (Input Function Target) assignments, and
Parameter/Input Setting numbers for the FLA/B/C, O1A/O1B (OUT1), O2A/O2B (OUT2), OUT3–OUT6, and
R1–R4 terminals.
Input
Setting
1000
1044
1046
1048
1050
1052
1054
1032
1034
1036
1038
1040
1042
1020
1022
1024
1026
1028
1030
1002
1004
1006
1008
1010
1012
1014
1016
1018
1070
1072
1074
1076
1078
1080
1082
1084
1056
1058
1060
1062
1064
1068
Discrete Output Terminal Assignment Selections
Param.
Setting
0
Function
Lower-Limit Frequency
Input
Setting
1086
2
4
6
Upper-Limit Frequency
Low-Speed Signal
Acceleration/Deceleration Completion
8
10
Speed Reach Signal
Failure FL (All trips)
12 Failure FL (Except EF, OCL, EPHO, OL2)
14 Over-Current (OC) Alarm
16 ASD Overload (OL1) Alarm
18 Motor Overload (OL2) Alarm
26
28
30
20 Over-Heat Alarm
22 Over-Voltage Alarm
24 Main Circuit (MOFF) Under-Voltage Alarm
Low-Current Alarm
Over-Torque Alarm
DBR Overload Alarm
38
40
42
32 Emergency Off Active
34 Retry Active
36 Pattern Operation Switching Output
1120
1122
1124
PID Deviation Limit
Run/Stop
1126
1128
Serious Failure (OCA, OCL, EF, Phase Failure, etc.) 1130
44
46
48
Light Failure (OL, OC1, 2, 3, OP)
Commercial Power/ASD Switching Output 1
Commercial Power/ASD Switching Output 2
50 Cooling Fan ON/OFF
52 Jogging Operation Active (Jog Run Active)
54 Panel/Terminal Board Operation Switching
1132
1134
1222
1224
1226
1228
1106
1108
1110
1112
1114
1118
1088
1090
1092
1094
1096
1098
1100
1102
1104
56 Cumulative Run-Time Alarm 1230
58 ProfiBus/DeviceNet/CC-Link Communication Error 1232
60 Forward/Reverse Switching 1234
62 Ready for Operation 1
64 Ready for Operation 2
68 Brake Release (BR)
1236
1238
1240
70
72
74
Alarm Status Active
Forward Speed Limit (torque control)
Reverse Speed Limit (torque control)
76 ASD Healthy Output
78 RS485 Communication Error
80 Error Code Output 1
82 Error Code Output 2
84 Error Code Output 3
1242
1244
1246
1248
1250
1252
1254
Param.
Setting
Function
86 Error Code Output 4
88 Error Code Output 5
90 Error Code Output 6
92 Specified Data Output 1
94 Specified Data Output 2
96 Specified Data Output 3
98 Specified Data Output 4
100 Specified Data Output 5
102 Specified Data Output 6
104 Specified Data Output 7
106 Light-Load
108 Heavy-Load
110 Positive Torque Limit
112 Negative Torque Limit
114 External Rush Suppression Relay Activated
118 Completion of Stop Positioning
120 L-STOP
122 Power Failure Synchronized Operation
124 Traverse in Progress
126 Traverse Deceleration Active
128 Part Replacement Alarm
130 Over-Torque Alarm
132 Frequency Command ½ Selection
134 Failure FL (Except Emergency Off)
222 My Function Output 1
224 My Function Output 2
226 My Function Output 3
228 My Function Output 4
230 My Function Output 5
232 My Function Output 6
234 My Function Output 7
236 My Function Output 8
238 My Function Output 9
240 My Function Output 10
242 My Function Output 11
244 My Function Output 12
246 My Function Output 13
248 My Function Output 14
250 My Function Output 15
252 My Function Output 16
254 Always OFF
Note:
Only positive logic is available for the listed parameters.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 239
Table 9. Trace Back Data Selections.
Selection Number Comm. Number
0
1
FD00
FD02
27
28
29
30
23
24
25
26
16
17
18
19
12
13
14
15
31
32
33
34
35
45
8
9
11
5
6
7
2
3
4
46
47
48
49
FD03
FD04
FD05
FD15
FD16
FD17
FD18
FD19
FD20
FE39
FE35
FE36
FE37
FE38
FE40
FE41
FE51
FD21
FD22
FD23
FD24
FD25
FD28
FD29
FD30
FA51
FE50
FE67
FE76
FE77
0006/0671
FE60
FE61
FE62
FE63
Trace (Monitor) Function
Output Frequency
Frequency Reference
Output Current
DC Bus Voltage
Output Voltage
Compensated Frequency
Speed Feedback (Realtime)
Speed Feedback (1 Sec Filter)
Torque
Torque Command
Torque Current
Excitation Current
PID Feedback Value
Motor Overload Ratio
ASD Overload Ratio
DBR Overload Ratio
DBR Load Ratio
Input Power
Output Power
V/I Option (AI2)
RR Input
VI/II (V/I) Input
RX Input
RX2 Option (AI1)
FM Output
AM Output
Signed 100% Meter Adjust Value
Communication Data
Signed 185% Meter Adjust Value
Signed 250% Meter Adjust Value
Input Watt-Hour
Output Watt-Hour
FM/AM Gain Display
My Function Monitor 1 (Unsigned Value)
My Function Monitor 2 (Unsigned Value)
My Function Monitor 3 (Signed Value)
My Function Monitor 4 (Signed Value)
240
Resolution/Unit
0.01 Hz
0.01 Hz
1
1
1
1
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01 Hz
0.01 Hz
0.01 Hz
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
1%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
1%
0.01%
0.01%
1%
0.01%
0.01 Hz
0.01%
0.01%
1%
1%
0.01 kW
0.01 kW
N/A
1%
1%
0.01 kWh
0.01 kWh
1
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Table 10. Input Function Target selections and the associated Communications Number.
Input Setting/Communication Number
FM/AM/FP
Input
Setting
Comm.
Number
Monitor
Display Input
Setting
Comm.
Number
Function
2018
2019
2020
2021
2022
2023
2024
2025
2000
2002
2003
2004
2005
2015
2016
2017
FD00
FD02
FD03
FD04
FD05
FD15
FD16
FD17
FD18
FD19
FD20
FD21
FD22
FD23
FD24
FD25
3000
3002
3003
3004
3005
3015
3016
3017
3018
3019
3020
3021
3022
3023
3024
3025
FE00
FE02
FE03
FE04
FE05
FE15
FE16
FE17
FE18
FE19
FE20
FE21
FE22
FE23
FE24
FE25
Output Frequency
Frequency Reference
Output Current
DC Bus Voltage
Output Voltage
Compensated Frequency
Speed Feedback (Realtime) (See Note 1)
Speed Feedback (1 Sec Filter) (See Note 1)
Torque (See Note 2)
Torque Command (See Note 2)
Torque Current (See Note 2)
Excitation Current
PID Feedback Value
Motor Overload Ratio
ASD Overload Ratio
DBR Overload Ratio
2028
2029
2030
FD28
FD29
FD30
3028
3029
3030
3031
FE28
FE29
FE30
FE31
DBR Load Ratio
Input Power
Output Power
Pattern Operation Group Number
3032
3033
FE32
FE33
Pattern Operation Cycles Remaining
Pattern Operation Preset Speed Number
2050
2051
FD50
FD51
3034
3035
3036
3037
3038
3039
3040
3041
FE34
FE35
FE36
FE37
FE38
FE39
FE40
FE41
Pattern Operation Preset Speed Time Remaining
Light-Load High-Speed Load Torque Monitor 1
Light-Load High-Speed Load Torque Monitor 2
RR Input
VI/II (V/I) Input
RX Input (See Note 2)
RX2 Option (AI1) Input (See Note 2)
RX2 Option (AI1) Input
FM Output
AM Output
Note 1: If no PG feedback is used an estimated speed value is displayed.
Resolution/Unit
1
1
1%
1%
0.01%
1%
1%
1%
1%
0.01 kW
0.01 kW
0.1
1
1
0.1
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01 Hz
0.01%
0.01%
1%
0.01 Hz
0.01 Hz
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01 Hz
0.01 Hz
0.01 Hz
Note 2: My Function cannot process negative values — A negative value is processed by My Function as an absolute value.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 241
Table 10. (Continued) Input Function Target selections and the associated Communications Number.
Input Setting/Communication Number
FM/AM/FP
Input
Setting
Comm.
Number
Monitor
Display Input
Setting
Comm.
Number
3050
3051
3052
3060
3061
3062
3063
FE50
FE51
FE52
FE60
FE61
FE62
FE63
3066
3067
3076
3077
3084
FE66
FE67
FE76
FE77
FE84
Function
Communication Data Output 2
Communication Data Output 1
Communication Data Output 3
My Function Monitor 1 (Output of Unsigned Value)
My Function Monitor 2 (Output of Unsigned Value)
My Function Monitor 3 (Output of Signed Value)
My Function Monitor 4 (Output of Signed Value)
Expansion I/O Card 1 CPU Version
Expansion I/O Card 2 CPU Version
Integral Input Power
Integral Output Power
16-Bit BIN/BCD Input Value
Resolution/Unit
0.01 kW
0.01 kW
1
242 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
15
16
17
18
19
20
Table 11. My Function Operator selections.
My Function Computational Selections
Input
Function
Command
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
10
11
12
13
14
Function Name
NOP (No Operation)
ST
STN
AND
EQ
NE
GT
ANDN
OR
ORN
GE
LT
LE
ASUB
ON (Timer)
OFF (Timer)
COUNT1 (Timer)
COUNT2 (Timer)
HOLD
SET
RESET
Function Description
Disables the My Function feature.
Execute data read/transfer.
Execute inverted data read/transfer.
Logical product of A AND B.
Logical product of A AND B.
Logical sum of A OR B.
Logical sum of A OR B.
Compares data — Outputs 1 if Equal; 0 if not Equal.
Compares data — Outputs 0 if Equal; 1 if not Equal.
Compares data — Outputs 1 if A>B; 0 if A
B.
Compares data — Outputs 1 if A
B; 0 if A
B.
Compares data — Outputs 1 if A
B; 0 if A
B.
Compares data — Outputs 1 if A
B; 0 if A>B.
Outputs absolute difference between A and B — |A–B|
Enables the On response time delay settings of My Function Time Data 1 – 5
(
–
Enables the Off response time delay settings of My Function Time Data 1 – 5
(
–
Outputs a 1 upon reaching the pulse count setting of
.
Outputs a 1 upon reaching the pulse count setting of
.
Outputs the peak output value since powering up or since the last reset.
Sets data.
Resets data.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 243
Alarms, Trips, and Troubleshooting
Alarms and Trips
This section lists the available user-notification codes of the EOI display and provides information that assists the user in the event that a Fault is incurred. The User Notification codes are displayed as an indication that a system function or system condition is active (i.e., ATN, DB, and DBON). The code is displayed on the EOI for the duration of the activation.
If a user setting or a ASD parameter has been exceeded, or if a data transfer function produces an unexpected result, a condition that is referred to as a Fault is incurred.
An Alarm is an indication that a Fault is imminent if existing operating conditions continue unchanged.
An Alarm may be associated with an output terminal to notify the operator of the condition remotely, close a contact, or engage a brake. At the least, an Alarm will cause an alarm code to appear on the EOI
In the event that the condition that caused the Alarm does not return to its normal operating level within a specified time, the ASD Faults and a Trip is incurred (Fault and Trip are sometimes used interchangeably).
A Trip is a safety feature (the result of a Fault) that disables the ASD system and removes the 3-phase power to the motor in the event that a subsystem of the ASD is malfunctioning, or one or more of the variables listed below exceeds its normal range (time and/or magnitude).
• Current,
• Voltage,
• Speed,
• Temperature,
• Torque, or
• Load.
See
for a listing of the potential Trips and the associated probable causes.
The operating conditions at the time of the trip may be used to help determine the cause of the trip. Listed below are operating conditions that may be used to assist the operator in correcting the problem or that the
ASD operator should be prepared to discuss when contacting the Toshiba Customer Support Center for assistance.
• What trip information is displayed?
• Is this a new installation?
• Has the system ever worked properly and what are the recent modifications (if any)?
• What is the ASD and Motor size?
• What is the CPU version and revision level?
• What is the EOI version?
• Does the ASD trip when accelerating, running, decelerating, or when not running?
• Does the ASD reach the commanded frequency?
• Does the ASD trip without the motor attached?
• Does ASD trip with an unloaded motor?
244 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
User Notification Codes
LED
Atn dbOn
The User Notification codes appear in the top right corner of the Frequency Command screen while the associated function is active.
User Notification codes notify the user of active functions that are usually only momentary under normal conditions and are active for the duration of activation only. User notification events are not error conditions and only convey active system functions to the user.
Table 12
. User Notification Codes.
Function Description
Autotune Active Indicates that the Autotune function is active.
DC Braking
This code conveys the DC Injection function being carried out. The display shows db when braking and shows dbOn when the motor shaft stationary function is being carried out.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 245
Alarms
LED
Screen
CM1
CM2
E
MOFF
OC
*OH
lists the alarm codes that may be displayed during operation of the ASD. Each alarm code is accompanied by a description and a possible cause. In the event that the source of the malfunction cannot be determined, contact your Toshiba Sales Representative for further information on the condition and for an appropriate course of action.
The Alarms are listed in the top-down order that they are checked for activation. Only the first to be detected will be displayed on the Frequency Command screen.
Table 13. G9 ASD Alarms.
LCD
Screen
Comm1 Error
Comm2 Error
Description Possible Causes
Emergency Off
Main
Under-Voltage
Over-Current
Over-Heat
OJ
Timer
* Reset ignored if active.
Internal communications error.
• Improperly programmed ASD.
External communications error.
• Improper communications settings.
• Improperly connected cables.
Output signal from the ASD is terminated and a brake may be applied if so configured.
• Stop-Reset pressed twice at the EOI.
• EOFF command received remotely.
• ASD reset required.
• Low 3-phase utility voltage.
Under-voltage condition at the
3-phase AC input to the ASD.
ASD output current greater than
setting.
• Defective IGBT (U, V, or W).
• ASD output to the motor is connected incorrectly.
• ASD output phase-to-phase short.
• The ASD is starting into a spinning motor.
• Motor/machine jammed.
• Mechanical brake engaged while the ASD is starting or while running.
• Accel/Decel time is too short.
• Voltage Boost setting is too high.
• Load fluctuations.
• ASD operating at an elevated temperature.
ASD ambient temperature excessive.
Run-time counter exceeded.
• ASD is operating at an elevated temperature.
• ASD is too close to heat-generating equipment.
• Cooling fan vent is obstructed (see Mounting the ASD on pg. 15
).
• Cooling fan is inoperative.
• Internal thermistor is disconnected.
• Type Reset required; select Clear Run Timer.
246 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
LED
Screen
LCD
Screen
Description Possible Causes
*OLI
OLM
*OLR
ASD Overload
Motor Overload
Resistor
Overload
Load requirement in excess of the capability of the ASD.
Load requirement in excess of the capability of the motor.
Excessive current at the
Dynamic Braking Resistor.
• The carrier frequency is too high.
• An excessive load.
• Acceleration time is too short.
• DC damping rate is set too high.
• The motor is starting into a spinning load after a momentary power failure.
• The ASD is improperly matched to the application.
• V/f parameter improperly set.
• Motor is locked.
• Continuous operation at low speed.
• The load is in excess of what the motor can deliver.
• Deceleration time is too short.
• DBR configuration improperly set.
*OP
OT
Over-Voltage
Over-Torque
DC bus voltage exceeds specifications.
• ASD attempting to start into a spinning motor after a momentary power loss.
• Incoming utility power is above the specified range.
• Decel time is too short.
• Voltage spikes at the 3-phase input; install inductive filter.
• DBR required.
• DBR resistance value is too high.
• DBR function is turned off.
• Over-Voltage Stall feature is turned off.
• System is regenerating.
• Load instability.
• Disable the Ridethrough function ( F302
).
Torque requirement in excess of
the setting of F616 or F617 for a
time longer than the setting of
.
• ASD is not correctly matched to the application.
•
F616 or F617 setting is too low.
• Obstructed load.
*POFF
PtSt
UC
Control
Under-Voltage
Reference Point Two speed-reference frequency setpoint values are too close to each other.
Under-Current
* Reset ignored if active.
Under-voltage condition at the 5,
15, or the 24 VDC supply.
• Defective Control board.
• Excessive load on power supply.
• Low input voltage.
• Two speed reference frequency setpoints are too close to each other (increase the difference).
With the Low-Current Trip
(
output current of the ASD is
below the level defined at F611
and remains there for a time longer than the setting of
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 247
E-11
E-12
E-13
E-17
E-18
E-19
E-20
E-21
E-22
E-23
E-24
Trips/Faults
A Trip is a ASD response to a Fault (though Fault and Trip are sometimes used interchangeably). A
Trip is a safety feature that disables the ASD system in the event that a subsystem of the ASD is malfunctioning or a parameter setting has been exceeded.
Listed in Table 14 are the Faults that may result in a Trip and the possible causes. When a Trip is
incurred the LCD shows the Fault screen and the LED Screen displays the active Fault code.
LED Screen
E
E-10
LCD Screen
Table 14. G9 ASD Fault Listing.
Possible Causes
Emergency Off • Emergency Off command received via EOI or remotely.
Sink/Source Setting Error • Improperly positioned Sink/Source jumper on the Terminal board or on an option device (see J100 at the Terminal PCB of the ASD).
• Sink/Source configuration is incorrect.
Brake Sequence Response
Error
•
is set to a non-zero value.
• Braking sequence discrete input and output terminals are not setup properly.
Encoder Signal-Loss Error • ASD is configured to receive a signal from a shaft-mounted encoder and no signal is being received while running.
• Disconnection at the Encoder circuit.
• Motor is stopped and is generating torque via torque limit control.
• ASD is not configured properly.
Speed Error
Key Failure
• Result of a motor speed that is greater than the commanded speed when using an encoder for speed control.
• Improper encoder connection or setup information.
• Defective encoder.
• Same key input for 20 seconds or more.
Analog (Terminal) Input
Loss
• V/I signal loss.
• Terminal Board failure.
• P24 over-current condition.
•
setting is too high.
• CPU data Transmit/Receive error.
CPU Communication
Error
V/f Control Error • Torque processing error.
• Make service call.
CPU Processing Error • Software processed incorrectly.
• Make service call.
Logic Input Voltage Error • Incorrect voltage applied to the discrete input terminals.
Optional Expansion Input
Terminal Board 1 Error
Optional Expansion Input
Terminal Board 2 Error
• Optional Expansion Input Terminal Board 1 is defective.
• Optional Expansion Input Terminal Board 2 is defective.
248 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
LED Screen
E-25
E-26
E-50/E-51
EEP1
EEP2/EEP3
EF1/EF2
EPHI
EPHO
ERR2
ERR3
ERR4
ERR5
ERR6
ERR7
ERR8
ERR9
LCD Screen Possible Causes
Stop Position Retaining
Error
CPU2 Fault • CPU malfunction.
• Control board malfunction.
Sink/Source Setting Error • Improperly positioned Sink/Source jumper on the Terminal board or on an option device (see J100 at the Terminal PCB of the ASD).
• Sink/Source configuration is incorrect.
EEPROM Fault
• Load movement while stopped.
•
setting is too low.
• Encoder malfunction.
• Creep speed is too high.
EEPROM Read Error
• EEPROM write malfunction.
• Make a service call.
• EEPROM read malfunction.
• Make a service call.
(Earth) Ground Fault
Input Phase Failure
Output Phase Failure
• Ground fault at the motor.
• Ground fault at the output of the ASD.
• Current leakage to Earth Ground.
• 3-phase input to the ASD is low or missing at the R, S, or T input terminals.
RAM Fault
ROM Fault
CPU Fault
Communication Error
Gate Array Fault
• 3-phase output from the ASD is low or missing at the U, V, or W output terminals or at the input to the motor.
• Internal RAM malfunction.
• Make a service call.
• Internal ROM malfunction.
• Make a service call.
• CPU malfunction.
• Control board malfunction.
• Make a service call.
• Communication time out error.
• Communication malfunction.
• Improper or loose connection.
• Improper system settings.
• Main Gate Array is defective.
Low-Current
Option Device Fault
Flash Memory Fault
• Improper Low-Current detection level settings at
• Check installation, connections, and option device manual.
• Flash memory malfunction.
• Make a service call.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 249
ETN1
ETN2
ETN3
ETYP
LED Screen
ETN
None
OC1
OC1P
LCD Screen
Autotune Error
Typeform Error
No Errors
Over-Current During
Acceleration
Over-Heat During
Acceleration
Possible Causes
• Autotune readings that are significantly inconsistent with the configuration information.
• A non-3-phase motor is being used.
or
• Using a motor that has a significantly smaller rating than the ASD.
• ASD output cabling is too small, too long, or is being housed in a cable tray with other cables that are producing an interfering EMF.
• Motor is running during the Autotune function.
•
adjustment required (Motor temperature is too high).
•
adjustment required (Motor Constant 1 improperly set).
•
adjustment required (Motor Constant 3 improperly set).
• Autotune setting F400 is set to Auto Calculation and there is a problem with the
Motor Constant readings.
• Firmware information (typeform) loaded into the Gate Driver board is inconsistent with the device in which the firmware is being used.
• The Gate Driver board has been replaced.
• The Gate Driver board is defective.
• No active faults.
• Improper V/f setting.
• Restart from a momentary power outage.
• The ASD is starting into a rotating motor.
• ASD/Motor not properly matched.
• Phase-to-phase short (U, V, or W).
• Accel time too short.
• Voltage Boost setting is too high.
• Motor/machine jammed.
• Mechanical brake engaged while the ASD is running.
• ASD current exceeds 340% of the rated FLA on ASDs that are 100 HP or less during acceleration. On ASDs that are greater than 100 HP, this fault occurs when the ASD current exceeds 320% of the rated FLA during acceleration.
• Cooling fan inoperative.
• Ventilation openings are obstructed.
• Internal thermistor is disconnected.
• Acceleration time is too short.
• Improper V/f setting.
• ASD or the motor is improperly matched to the application.
250 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
LED Screen
OC2
OC2P
OC3
OC3P
OCA1 or OCL
OCA2 or OCL
OCA3 or OCL
OCR
OH
OH2
LCD Screen Possible Causes
Over-Current During
Deceleration
Over-Heat During
Deceleration
• Cooling fan inoperative.
• Ventilation openings are obstructed.
• Internal thermistor is disconnected.
• Deceleration time is too short.
• DC Injection current is too high.
• ASD or the motor is improperly matched to the application.
Over-Current During Run • Load fluctuations.
• ASD is operating at an elevated temperature.
• ASD current exceeds 340% of the rated FLA on ASDs that are 100 HP or less during a fixed-speed run or if during a fixed-speed run the ASD overheats. On
ASDs that are greater than 100 HP, it occurs when the ASD current exceeds
320% of the rated FLA on a fixed-speed run.
Over-Heat During Run
• Phase-to-phase short (U, V, or W).
• Deceleration time is too short.
• Motor/machine jammed.
• Mechanical brake engaged while the ASD is running.
• ASD current exceeds 340% of the rated FLA on ASDs that are 100 HP or less during deceleration. On ASDs that are greater than 100 HP, it occurs when the
ASD current exceeds 320% of the rated FLA during deceleration.
U-Phase Over-Current
• Cooling fan inoperative.
• Ventilation openings are obstructed.
• Internal thermistor is disconnected.
• Improper V/f setting.
• ASD or the motor is improperly matched to the application.
• Low impedance at the U lead of the ASD output.
V-Phase Over-Current
W-Phase Over-Current
• Low impedance at the V lead of the ASD output.
• Low impedance at the W lead of the ASD output.
Dynamic Braking Resistor
Over-Current
• ASD inability to discharge the bus voltage during regeneration.
• No Dynamic Braking Resistor (DBR) installed.
• DBR value is too low.
• Deceleration time is too short.
• Improper DBR setup information.
• Defective IGBT7 (or IGBT7 ckt.).
• 3-phase input voltage is above specification.
Over-Heat
External Over-Heat
• Cooling fan inoperative.
• Ventilation openings are obstructed.
• Internal thermistor is disconnected.
• Excessive-heat signature received at the TB3 – TH1(+) and TH1(-) terminals.
for setup information.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 251
LED Screen
OL1
OL2
OLR
OP1
OP2
OP3
OT
SOUT
UP1
UP2
LCD Screen Possible Causes
ASD Overload • Acceleration time is too short.
• DC Injection current is too high.
• Improper V/f setting.
• Motor running during restart.
• ASD or the motor is improperly matched to the application.
Motor Overload
Over-Voltage During
Acceleration
• Improper V/f setting.
• Motor is locked.
• Continuous operation at low speed.
• Load requirement exceeds ability of the motor.
• Startup frequency setting adjustment required.
Dynamic Braking Resistor
Overload
• Deceleration time is too short.
• Improper DBR setup information.
• Improper Stall setup information.
• Motor running during restart.
Over-Voltage During
Deceleration
Over-Voltage During Run • Load fluctuations.
• 3-Phase input voltage out of specification.
• DBR required (DBR setup required).
Over-Torque
• Deceleration time is too short.
• DBR value is too high.
• DBR required (DBR setup required).
• Stall protection is disabled.
• 3-phase input voltage is out of specification.
• Input reactance required.
• A torque requirement by the load in excess of the setting of F616 or F617 for a
time longer than the setting of
• The ASD is improperly matched to the application.
• The load is obstructed.
Step Out
(for PM Motor Only)
• Motor shaft is locked.
• Output phase is open.
• Operating a reciprocating load.
Main Power
Under-Voltage
• Input 3-phase voltage is too low.
• Momentary power failure longer than the time setting of F628 .
Control Power
Under-Voltage
• This fault is caused by an under-voltage condition at the 5, 15, or the 24 VDC supply.
• Loss of the SU+ voltage while operating in the Backup Power mode.
• 3-phase input voltage low.
252 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Viewing Trip Information
In the event that the condition causing an Alarm does not return to the normal operating level within a specified time, the ASD Faults and a Trip is incurred.
When a trip occurs, the resultant error information may be viewed either from the LED Screen, LCD
Fault screen ( Table 14 on pg. 248
), Monitor screen, or the Trip History
screen (Program
Utilities
).
Trip Record at Monitor Screen
The at-trip condition of the last four incurred trips may be viewed on the Monitor Screen. The Monitor
Screen displays the records of up to four trips and catalogs each trip as Past Trip #1 through Past Trip #4
powered up or since the last reset, None is displayed for each trip record.
The Monitor Screen at-trip record is erased when the ASD is reset.
Note:
An improper ASD setup may cause some trips — reset the ASD to the Factory Default settings before pursuing a systemic malfunction (Program
Utilities Type Reset
Reset to Factory Settings).
Trip History
The Trip History screen records the system parameters for up to 20 trips. The recorded trips are numbered from zero to 19. Once the Trip History record reaches trip number 19, the oldest recorded trip will be deleted with each new record stored (first-in first-out). The Trip # field may be selected and scrolled through to view the recorded trip information for a given trip number. The monitored parameters
as At-Trip Recorded Parameters (parameter readings at the time that the trip occurred).
Table 15 . Trip History Record Parameters.
At-Trip Recorded Parameters
1) Trip Number
2) Trip Type
3) Time and Date
4) Frequency at Trip
5) Output Current
8) Frequency Reference
9) Bus Voltage
10) Discrete Input Status
11) OUT1/OUT2/FL Status
12) Timer
15) Feedback (1 sec.)
16) Torque
17) Torque Reference
18) Torque Current
19) Excitation Current
6) Output Voltage
7) Direction
13) Post Compensation Frequency
14) Feedback (inst.)
20) PID Value
21) Motor Overload
Trip records are comprised of the full list of monitored parameters (28).
22) ASD Overload
23) DBR Overload
24) Motor Load
25) ASD Load
26) DBR Load
27) Input Power
28) Output Power
Clearing a Trip
Once the cause of the trip has been corrected, performing a
Reset re-enables the ASD for normal
operation.
The trip may also be cleared using either of the following methods:
• Cycling power (trip info may be saved via
if desired),
• Pressing the Stop-Reset key twice,
• Remotely via the communications channel,
• Momentarily connecting terminal RES to CC of the Terminal Board, or
• Via Program
Utilities Type Reset Clear Past Trip (clears Monitor Screen records only).
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 253
Enclosure Dimensions and Conduit Plate
Information
The G9 ASD part numbering convention is shown below.
The enclosure dimensions for the available models (typeforms) are listed in Table 16
. The
conduit plates referenced are shown in Figure 34
,
.
G9 Part Numbering Convention.
Note:
The Type 1 enclosed versions of these drives meet or exceed the specification UL 50-
1995, the Standard for Heating and Cooling Equipment, and complies with the applicable requirements for installation in a compartment handling conditioned air.
Note:
All Toshiba ASD enclosures carry an IP20 rating.
254 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Enclosure Dimensions
Table 16. 230-Volt G9 ASD Systems.
Frame
Model Number
VT130G9U-
Enclosure
Figure Number
A
Width
(in/mm)
B
Height
(in/mm)
C
Depth
(in/mm)
D
Mounting Hole Dimensions
(in/mm)
E R1 R2
2
3
4
5A
5B
6
7B
9
10
2160
2220
2270
2330
2400
2500
2600
2750
210K
2010
2015
2025
2035
2055
2080
2110
5.2/132 11.2/285 6.1/155 8.7/220 4.5/114
6.1/155 12.4/315
6.6/168
6.9/175 15.0/381
8.3/211 15.1/384
9.1/231 19.3/490
7.6/193
9.8/249
11.1/283
5.4/138
6.2/158
7.5/190
15.2/386 8.3/210
0.098/2.5
0.217/5.5
0.236/6.0
0.118/3.0 0.276/7.0
11.1/283 25.9/658 13.2/335 25.0/635 8.0/203 0.188/4.8 0.375/9.5
14.3/363 33.1/841 15.0/381 32.3/820 8.0/203 0.188/4.8 0.375/9.5
14.6/371 51.7/1313
17.6/447
15.7/399 53.1/1349
50.2/1275 9.2/234
51.7/1313 9.9/252
0.344/8.7 0.670/17.0
Conduit Plate
Figure Number
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 255
Table 17 . 460-Volt G9 ASD Systems.
Frame
Model Number
VT130G9U-
Enclosure
Figure
Number
A
Width
(in/mm)
B
Height
(in/mm)
C
Depth
(in/mm)
2
3
4
5A
5B
6
7A
8
9
10
11
12
13
415K
420K
425K
430K
435K
4270
4330
4400
4500
4600
4750
410K
412K
4080
4110
4160
4220
4015
4025
4035
4055
5.2/132 11.2/285 6.1/155
6.1/155 12.4/315
6.9/175 15.0/381
6.6/168
D
Mounting Hole Dimensions
(in/mm)
E R1 R2
9.8/249 5.4/138
6.2/158
11.1/283
8.3/211 15.1/384
9.1/231 19.3/490
7.6/193
7.5/190
15.2/386 8.3/210
11.1/283
25.9/658 13.2/335 25.0/635
30.8/782 14.3/363 29.7/754
14.3/363 36.1/917 15.3/389 35.3/897
14.6/371 51.7/1313
25.6/650 70.0/1778
8.7/220 4.5/114
8.0/203
50.2/1275 9.2/234
15.7/399 53.1/1349 51.7/1313
9.9/252
15.0/381 63.1/1603
17.6/447
18.9/480 68.5/1740
61.6/1565
67.0/1701 13.8/351
68.5/1740 21.3/541
0.098/2.5
0.118/3.0
0.188/4.8
0.344/8.7
0.217/5.5
0.236/6.0
0.276/7.0
0.375/9.5
0.670/17
Conduit Plate
Figure Number
256 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Figure 31. See
and Table 17 for Actual Dimensions.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 257
Figure 32. See
and Table 17 for Actual Dimensions.
258 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Figure 33. See
and Table 17 for Actual Dimensions.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 259
Conduit Plate Dimensions
and
Table 17 for the associated device. Dimensions are in in/cm.
260 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
and
Table 17 for the associated device. Dimensions are in in/cm.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 261
and
Table 17 for the associated device. Dimensions are in in/cm.
262 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Current/Voltage Specifications
Table 18 . 230-Volt UL Type-1/IP-20 Chassis Standard Ratings Table.
Model
Number
VT130G9U
Output Current
100/115% Cont.
(110% Cont.
60 HP)
Overload Current
150% for 60
Seconds
Overload Current
150% for 120
Seconds
Input Voltage
3-Ph 50/60
± 2 Hz
2500
2600
2750
210K
2220
2270
2330
2400
2055
2080
2110
2160
2010
2015
2025
2035
3.5/4.0 A
4.2/4.8 A
6.9/7.9 A
10.0/11.5 A
15.2/17.5 A
23.8/27.4 A
28.6/32.9 A
46.8/53.8 A
57.2/65.8 A
76.3/87.8 A
90.0/103.5 A
104.0/119.6 A
152.5/175.4 A
176.0/193.6 A
221.0/243.1 A
285.0/313.5 A
N/A
264.0 A
331.5 A
427.5 A
5.3 A
6.3 A
10.4 A
15.0 A
22.8 A
35.7 A
42.9 A
70.2 A
85.8 A
114.5 A
135.0 A
156.0 A
228.8 A
N/A
200 – 240 VAC
(± 10%)
Output Voltage
3-Ph Variable
Frequency
Typical
Motor HP
Input Voltage
Level (Max.)
50
60
75
100
20
25
30
40
5.0
7.5
10
15
0.75
1.0
2.0
3.0
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 263
Table 19. 460-Volt UL Type-1/IP-20 Chassis Standard Ratings Table.
Model
Number
VT130G9U
Output Current
100/115% Cont.
(110% Cont.
125 HP)
Overload Current
150% for 60
Seconds
Overload Current
150% for 120
Seconds
Input Voltage
3-Ph 50/60
± 2 Hz
Output Voltage
3-Ph Variable
Frequency
Typical
Motor HP
4330
4400
4500
4600
4110
4160
4220
4270
4015
4025
4035
4055
4080
4750
410K
412K
415K
420K
425K
430K
435K
2.7/3.1 A
3.6/4.1 A
5.0/5.8 A
9.1/10.5 A
12.4/14.3 A
15.3/17.6 A
24.0/27.6 A
28.6/32.9 A
35.7/41.1 A
42.0/48.3 A
57.2/65.8 A
68.5/78.8 A
81.5/93.7 A
100.8/115.9 A
138.7/159.5 A
179/196.9 A
215/236.5 A
259/284.9 A
314/345.4 A
387/425.7 A
427/469.7 A
N/A
268.5 A
322.5 A
388.5 A
471.0 A
580.5 A
640.5 A
4.1 A
5.4 A
7.5 A
13.7 A
18.6 A
23.0 A
36.0 A
42.9 A
53.6 A
63.0 A
85.8 A
102.8 A
122.3 A
151.2 A
208.1 A
N/A
380 – 480 VAC
(± 10%)
Input Voltage
Level (Max.)
30
40
50
60
10
15
20
25
1.0
2.0
3.0
5.0
7.5
200
250
300
350
75
100
125
150
264 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Cable/Terminal/Torque Specifications
Installation should conform to the 2008 National Electrical Code Article 110 (NEC) (Requirements for
Electrical Installations), all regulations of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration, and any other applicable national, regional, or industry codes and standards.
Note:
The following ratings are guidelines and shall not be the sole determining factor of the lug or wire size used with the ASD. Application-specific applicables, wire insulation type, conductor material, and local and regional regulations are but a few of the considerations when selecting the actual lug and wire type to be used with the ASD.
Note:
Cable/Terminal specifications are based on the rated current of the ASD.
The specifications DO NOT include the 10% Service Factor.
Note:
Use only 75° C copper wire/cable for motor and power connections.
For further installation information see the section titled Installation and Connections on pg. 14 .
Table 20. 230-Volt G9 ASD Cable/Terminal/Torque Specifications.
Typical Wire/Cable
Size
Lug Size Range
Model
Number
VT130G9U
MCP Rating
(Amps)
AWG or kcmil
Input/Output Power
Recommended Maximum
Wire-Size/Lug-Capacity for
Input/Output Power
3Ø-Input 3Ø-Output
2220
2270
2330
2400
2500
2600
2750
210K
2055
2080
2110
2160
2010
2015
2025
2035
15
30
50
175
200
250
300
400
75
100
125
150
14
12
10
8
6
3/0
4/0
*3/0
*250
1
1/0
4
2
10
8
4
3
2
4/0
*4/0
*250
12 to 1/0
6 to 250
14 to 8
12 to 8
10 to 4
8 to 3
6 to 250
4 to 1/0
2 to 300
Terminal
Board
TB1 – 4
Terminals
20
(3-core shield)
Torque to 5.3/0.6
Torque
3Ø-Input 3Ø-Output
In-Lbs./Nm
11.5/1.3
17.7/2.0
50/5.7
21/2.4
275/31
53/6
275/31 168/19
Note:
(*) Indicates that the item is one of a set of two parallel cables.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 265
Table 21. 460-Volt G9 ASD Cable/Terminal/Torque Specifications.
Typical Wire/Cable
Size
Lug Size Range
Terminal
Board
Model
Number
VT130G9U
MCP Rating
(Amps)
Torque
Input/Output Power
Recommended Maximum
AWG or kcmil
Wire-Size/Lug-Capacity for
Input/Output Power
3Ø-Input 3Ø-Output
TB1 – 4 Terminals 3Ø-Input 3Ø-Output
In-Lbs./Nm
4270
4330
4400
4500
4600
4750
410K
412K
415K
420K
425K
430K
435K
4080
4110
4160
4220
4015
4025
4035
4055
15
20
30
300
400
500
600
700
125
175
200
250
50
75
75
100
14
12
10
8
6
4
*1/0
*2/0
*4/0
*250
1/0
3/0
3
1
**3/0
**4/0
10
8
4
3
2
4/0
*4/0
*250
*350
**350
12 to 1/0
6 to 250
0 to 500
14 to 8
12 to 8
10 to 4
8 to 3
6 to 250
4 to 350
4 to 1/0
1 to 300
6 to 350
20
(3-core shield)
Torque to 5.3/0.6
50/5.7
11.5/1.3
17.7/2.0
21/2.4
53/6.0
275/31 168/19
275/31
375/42.4
Note:
(*) Indicates that the item is one of a set of two parallel cables.
Note:
(**) Indicates that the item is one of a set of three parallel cables.
266 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Dynamic Braking Resistor Wire/Cable
Specifications
3-phase power input circuit (see
Figure 38. on pg. 268 ) to the G9 ASD in the event that a DBR over-
temperature condition occurs is a requirement. If a DBR failure occurs or should a power source overvoltage condition occur the DBR thermal protection circuitry will prevent hazardous DBR temperatures.
To use the Dynamic Braking function the following requirements must be met:
• Enable the DBR function,
• Select a Resistance Value, and
•
Set the Continuous Braking Wattage value at F304
,
, respectively.
Set the Braking Resistance Overload Time at parameter
to establish how long the braking resistor is allowed to sustain the overload condition before a trip is incurred (the factory default setting is 5 seconds).
Light-duty and heavy-duty resistors vary from a few ohms to several hundred ohms. The appropriate resistance size will be typeform-specific and application-specific. Contact your Toshiba Sales
Representative or the Toshiba Customer Support Center for more information on your specific DBR requirements.
Heavy-duty DBRs should be wired using the same gauge wire as the motor leads. Light-duty DBRs may use one wire size smaller (AWG or kcmil) than the motor leads.
Because the heat generated by the DBR will affect the cooling capacity of the heat sink, the resistor pack should be mounted above or to the side of the ASD — NEVER below the ASD. Maintain a minimum of six inches between the resistor pack and the ASD.
The total wire length from the ASD to the DBR should not exceed 10 feet.
The wiring from the ASD to the DBR should be twisted approximately two twists per foot throughout the length of the wire.
If EMI/RFI noise is of concern, the DBR wiring should be 3-core screened cable. The screen should connect to the ASD enclosure and the resistor enclosure.
CAUTION
Though the in-line DBR fuse and the thermal relay are designed into the system to prevent a catastrophic
DBR over-current condition, they are both intended to be used as backup protection ONLY.
A proper typeform-specific and application-specific system setup that includes using the appropriate
Dynamic Braking Resistor and Overload settings will be required.
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 267
Figure 37. DBR Configurations.
Braking Resistor circuit with a thermal fuse.
Figure 38. Shown below is a typical connection diagram using an MCCB with a Trip Coil (TC) in lieu of an input contactor. A control transformer is required for 400-volt models only. The primary
MC is opened in the event of a DBR over-current detection. With no power supplied to the G9
ASD the failure will not be displayed on the EOI; see the Trip History for failure information once restarted.
268 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
200
250
300
350
30
40
50
60
10
15
20
25
2
3
5
7.5
60
75
100
1
75
100
125
150
25
30
40
50
7.5
10
15
20
0.75
3
5
1
2
Short Circuit Protection Recommendations
Table 22 . 230/240 and 400/480-Volt ASD Recommended Circuit Breaker Selection.
Model Number
VT130G9U
4110
4160
4220
4270
4330
4400
4500
4600
2600
2750
210K
4015
4025
4035
4055
4080
2080
2110
2160
2220
2270
2330
2400
2500
2010
2015
2025
2035
2055
4750
410K
412K
415K
420K
425K
430K
435K
ASD HP
Continuous Output Current
(Amps)
48
66
79
94
17.6
27.7
33
41
4.1
5.8
10.5
14.3
176
221
285
2.7
116
160
179
76
90
120
152
27.5
33
54
66
3.5
4.8
8.0
10.0
17.5
215
259
314
387
434
Circuit Breaker Part Number
JLL36200
JLL36250
LIL36300
Consult NEC
HLL36015
HLL36015
HLL36025
HLL36040
HLL36050
HLL36070
HLL36090
HLL36100
HLL36100
HLL36125
HLL36150
JLL36200
JLL36225
JLL36250
LIL36300
HLL36015
HLL36015
HLL36015
HLL36025
HLL36025
HLL36040
HLL36050
HLL36070
HLL36090
HLL36100
HLL36100
HLL36125
HLL36150
LIL36300
LIL36400
LIL36400
LIL36450
LIL36500
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 269
Optional Devices
The ASD may be equipped with several options which are used to expand the functionality.
lists the available options and their functions.
Table 23. G9 Optional Devices and Functions.
Part Identifier Device Name Device Function
ASD-CAB-USB
ASD-EOI-HH-G9
ASD-MTG-KIT9
ASD-TB1-SIM9
DEV002Z
ETB003Z
ETB004Z
PDP002Z
USB001Z
VEC007Z
VEC004Z
VEC005Z
VEC006Z
Note:
G9/G7 USB Communication Cable
Display Module Docking Station
9-Series EOI Remote Mounting Kit
ASD Input/Output Signal Simulator
DeviceNet Module
Expansion I/O Board 1
Expansion I/O Board 2
ProfiBus DP Module
USB-to-Serial Converter
PG Vector Feedback Board
PG Vector Feedback Board
PG Vector Feedback Board
PG Vector Feedback Board
Used to connect the ASD to a PC via the PC USB port.
Used to flash the 9-series display module.
Hardware used to mount 9-series ASD EOI remotely.
Used to simulate the ASD I/O monitor and control signals.
Allows the ASD to communicate via DeviceNet with other DeviceNet-supported equipment including a host computer.
Expands the Input/Output functionality of the ASD.
Expands the Input/Output functionality of the ASD.
Allows the ASD to communicate via ProfiBus with other
ProfiBus-supported equipment including a host computer.
Allows for the USB port of a computer to be used as a communications port for monitoring and controlling the
ASD.
Allows for the use of Vector Control using a sensor (for use with a 5-volt encoder).
Allows for the use of Vector Control using a sensor (for use with a 12-volt encoder).
Allows for the use of Vector Control using a sensor (for use with a 15-volt encoder).
Allows for the use of Vector Control using a sensor (for use with a 24-volt encoder).
See the user manual of the applicable option for further information on each item.
270 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Index
Numerics
A
Abnormal Speed Detection Time, 187
Accel/Decel Operation After Torque Limit, 159
Accel/Decel Switching Frequency 1, 167
Acceleration Suspend Frequency, 145
Acceleration Suspend Time, 145
Acceleration/Deceleration Pattern 3, 169
Acceleration/Deceleration Pattern 4, 170
Acceleration/Deceleration Switching Frequency 2, 169
Acceleration/Deceleration Switching Frequency 3, 170
AI2 (Option V/I) Input Bias, 163
AI2 (Option V/I) Input Gain, 163
AM Output Gradient Characteristic, 195
AM Output Terminal Adjustment, 192
AM Output Terminal Function, 192
Analog Function Assigned Object 11, 226
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Analog Function Assigned Object 21, 227
Analog Input Function Target 11, 226
Analog Input Function Target 21, 226
Annual Average Ambient Temperature, 189
ASD Input Phase Failure Detection, 184
ASD Operation at Disconnect, 210
ASD Output Phase Failure Detection, 183
ASD/Motor Connection Diagram, 17
ASD-Side Switching Wait Time, 147
At-trip Recorded Parameters, 253
Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration, 76
Automatic Function Selection, 85
Automatic Light-Load High-Speed Operation
B
BIN Input Point 1 Frequency, 121
271
BIN Input Point 1 Setting, 120
BIN Input Point 2 Frequency, 121
BIN Input Point 2 Setting, 121
Braking Resistance Overload Time (10x rated torque),
Braking Time Learning Function, 144
C
Cable/Terminal Specifications, 265
Carrier Frequency Control Mode, 138
Changed From Default Screen, 74
Circuit Breaker Configuration, 15
Circuit Breaker Part Number, 269
Command Control Selections, 39
Command Mode and Frequency Mode Control, 36
Commercial Power Switching Freq. Hold Time, 147
Commercial Power Switching Wait Time, 147
Commercial Power/ASD Output Switching, 146
Commercial Power/ASD Switching Frequency, 147
Communications Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting
Communications Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting
Communications Option (DeviceNet/Profibus) Setting
Communications Option Speed Switch Monitor
Communications Option Station Address Monitor, 210
Communications Setting Changes, 74
Conduit Plate Information, 254
Continuous Dynamic Braking Capacity, 137
Control Power Under-Voltage, 252
Cumulative Operation Time Alarm, 186
Current Control Proportional Gain, 160
Current/Voltage Specifications, 263
D
DC Injection Braking Current, 124
DC Injection Braking Start Frequency, 124
DC Injection Braking Time, 125
Deceleration Suspend Frequency, 145
Deceleration Suspend Time, 145
Disconnection Detection Extended Time, 210
Discrete Input Terminal Assignment, 234
Display Gradient Characteristic, 197
Display Unit Multiplication Factor, 197
Display Units for Voltage and Current, 197
272 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Drooping Insensitive Torque, 140
Dynamic Braking Resistance, 137
Dynamic Braking Resistor Over-Current, 251
Dynamic Braking Resistor Overload, 252
E
Electronic Operator Interface, 28
Electronic Operator Interface Features, 29
Emergency Off DC Injection Application Time, 183
Emergency Off Mode Settings, 183
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Exciting Strengthening Coefficient, 153
F
Fault Relay (Shown Faulted), 25
FLA, B, and C Switching Relationship, 24
FM Output Gradient Characteristic, 194
FM Output Terminal Adjustment, 78
FM Output Terminal Function, 78
FM Voltage/Current Output Switching, 194
Forward Run/Reverse Run Disable, 138
Forward Speed Limit Input, 155
Forward Speed Limit Level, 155
Forward/Reverse DC Injection Braking Priority, 125
Forward/Reverse Run Priority Selection, 86
Forward/Reverse Run Selection, 79
273
Frequency Command Screen, 31, 73
Frequency Control Selections, 39
Frequency Mode Priority Switching Frequency, 108
Frequency Point Selection, 205
Frequency Priority Selection, 104
Frequency Reference Source, 73
G
H
Heavy-Load Torque During Constant Power Running,
Heavy-Load Torque During Power Running, 142
Input Terminal 1 (F) Function, 88
Input Terminal 1 (F) Response Time, 95
Input Terminal 10 (LI2) Function, 90
Input Terminal 11 (LI3) Function, 90
Input Terminal 12 (LI4) Function, 91
Input Terminal 13 – 20 Response Time, 96
Input Terminal 13 (LI5) Function, 91
Input Terminal 14 (LI6) Function, 91
Input Terminal 15 (LI7) Function, 92
Input Terminal 16 (LI8) Function, 92
Input Terminal 17 (B12) Function, 96
Input Terminal 18 (B13) Function, 96
Input Terminal 19 (B14) Function, 97
Input Terminal 2 (R) Function, 88
Input Terminal 2 (R) Response Time, 95
Input Terminal 20 (B15) Function, 97
Input Terminal 3 (ST) Function, 88
Input Terminal 3 (ST) Response Time, 95
Input Terminal 4 (RES) Function, 89
Input Terminal 4 (RES) Response Time, 96
Input Terminal 5 – 12 Response Time, 96
Input Terminal 5 (S1) Function, 89
Input Terminal 6 (S2) Function, 89
Input Terminal 7 (S3) Function, 89
Input Terminal 8 (S4) Function, 89
Input Terminal 9 (LI1) Function, 90
Installation and Connections, 14
I
I/O Circuit Configurations, 25
Initial UP/DOWN Frequency, 129
Initial UP/DOWN Frequency Rewriting, 129
Input Function Command 1, 213, 215, 216, 221, 222,
Input Function Command 2, 214, 215, 216, 221, 222,
Input Function Target 1, 213, 215, 216, 220, 222, 223,
Input Function Target 2, 214, 215, 216, 221, 222, 223,
Input Function Target 3, 214, 215, 217, 221, 222, 224,
Input Phase Failure Detection, 184
J
Jump Frequency 1 Bandwidth, 131
Jump Frequency 2 Bandwidth, 131
Jump Frequency 3 Bandwidth, 131
K
Keypad ASD-MTG-KIT Dimensions (mounting), 35
274 G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Keypad Installation Precautions, 33
Keypad Remote Mounting using the ASD-MTG-KIT, 35
Keypad Remote Mounting w/o the ASD-MTG-KIT, 34
L
Lead Length Specifications, 20
LED Character/Font Information, 30
LED/LCD Screen Information, 30
Light-Load High-Speed Learning Function, 140
Light-Load High-Speed Operation, 140
Light-Load High-Speed Operation Detection Time, 141
Light-Load High-Speed Operation Heavy-Load
Light-Load High-Speed Operation Load Wait Time, 141
Light-Load High-Speed Operation Switching Lower-
Load-Produced Negative Torque, 12
Low Current Detection Current Hysteresis Width, 184
Low-Current Detection Threshold, 185
Low-Current Trip Threshold Time, 185
Low-Speed Signal Output Frequency, 86
M
Manual Torque Limit Settings, 59
MON 1 Output Gradient Characteristic, 195
MON 1 Voltage/Current Output Switching, 195
MON 2 Output Gradient Characteristic, 196
MON 2 Voltage/Current Output Switching, 196
MON1 Terminal Meter Selection, 193
MON2 Terminal Meter Selection, 193
Monitor Output Function 11, 227
Monitor Output Function 21, 228
Monitor Output Function 31, 228
Monitor Output Function 41, 229
Monitor Output Function Command 11, 227
Monitor Output Function Command 21, 228
Monitor Output Function Command 31, 229
Monitor Output Function Command 41, 229
Motor 150% Overload Time Limit, 184
Motor Overload Protection Configuration, 82
Motor Overload Protection Level 1, 182
Motor Overload Protection Level 2, 98
Motor Overload Protection Level 3, 99
Motor Overload Protection Level 4, 100
Motor Shaft Fixing Control, 125
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual 275
O
276
Multiplying Input Selection, 191
My Function Frequency Data 1, 218
My Function Frequency Data 2, 218
My Function Frequency Data 4, 219
My Function Frequency Data 5, 219
My Function Percent Data 1, 217
My Function Percent Data 3, 218
My Function Percent Data 4, 218
My Function Percent Data 5, 218
N
Network Option Reset Settings, 213
Number of PG Input Phases, 150
Number of PG Input Pulses, 150
Operation Command Clear Selection When ST Off, 198
Operation Panel Parameters, 58
Operational and Maintenance Precautions, 9
Option V/I Terminal Voltage/Current Selection, 88
Output Function Assigned, 214, 216, 217, 221, 223, 224,
Output Phase Failure Detection, 183
Output Terminal 1 (OUT1) Function, 92
Output Terminal 10 (R3) Function, 97
Output Terminal 11 (R4) Function, 97
Output Terminal 2 (OUT2) Function, 92
Output Terminal 3 (FL) Function, 93
Output Terminal 4 (OUT3) Function, 93
Output Terminal 5 (OUT4) Function, 93
Output Terminal 6 (R1) Function, 94
Output Terminal 7 (OUT5) Function, 94
Output Terminal 8 (OUT6) Function, 94
Output Terminal 9 (R2) Function, 95
Over-Current During Acceleration, 250
Over-Current During Deceleration, 251
Over-Heat During Acceleration, 250
Over-Heat During Deceleration, 251
Overload Reduction Starting Frequency, 184
Over-Speed Detection Frequency Lower Band, 187
Over-Speed Detection Frequency Upper Band, 187
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Over-Torque Detection Hysteresis, 186
Over-Torque Detection Level (Negative Torque), 186
Over-Torque Detection Level (Positive Torque), 186
Over-Torque Detection Time, 186
Over-Voltage During Acceleration, 252
Over-Voltage During Deceleration, 252
Over-Voltage Limit Operation, 136
Over-Voltage Limit Operation Level, 187
P
Panel Override Multiplication Gain, 199
Panel Tension Torque Bias, 199
Part Numbering Convention, 254
Pattern Group 1 Selection 1, 172
Pattern Group 1 Selection 2, 173
Pattern Group 1 Selection 3, 173
Pattern Group 1 Selection 4, 173
Pattern Group 1 Selection 5, 173
Pattern Group 1 Selection 6, 174
Pattern Group 1 Selection 7, 174
Pattern Group 1 Selection 8, 174
Pattern Group 2 Selection 1, 175
Pattern Group 2 Selection 2, 175
Pattern Group 2 Selection 3, 175
Pattern Group 2 Selection 4, 175
Pattern Group 2 Selection 5, 176
Pattern Group 2 Selection 6, 176
Pattern Group 2 Selection 7, 176
Pattern Group 2 Selection 8, 176
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Permanent Magnet (PM) Motor Constant 1, 164
Permanent Magnet (PM) Motor Constant 2, 164
PG Disconnection Detection, 151
PG Input Point 1 Frequency, 122
PG Input Point 2 Frequency, 123
PID Deviation Lower-Limit, 149
PID Deviation Upper-Limit, 148
PID Feedback Delay Filter, 148
PID Feedback Differential (D) Gain, 149
PID Feedback Integral (I) Gain, 148
PID Feedback Proportional (P) Gain, 148
Power Running Stall Continuous Trip Detection Time,
Power Running Torque Limit 1, 157
Power Running Torque Limit 1 Level, 157
Power Running Torque Limit 2 Level, 158
Power Running Torque Limit 3 Level, 158
Power Running Torque Limit 4 Level, 159
Preset Speed 1 Operation Mode, 180
Preset Speed 10 Operation Mode, 181
Preset Speed 11 Operation Mode, 181
Preset Speed 12 Operation Mode, 181
277
Preset Speed 13 Operation Mode, 181
Preset Speed 14 Operation Mode, 182
Preset Speed 15 Operation Mode, 182
Preset Speed 2 Operation Mode, 180
Preset Speed 3 Operation Mode, 180
Preset Speed 4 Operation Mode, 181
Preset Speed 5 Operation Mode, 181
Preset Speed 6 Operation Mode, 181
Preset Speed 7 Operation Mode, 181
Preset Speed 8 Operation Mode, 181
Preset Speed 9 Operation Mode, 181
Preset Speed Operation Mode, 179
Preset Speed Operation Selection, 210
Program Mode Menu Navigation, 46
Pulse Output Frequency (FP), 194
Pulse Output Function (FP), 194
Q
R
278
Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 1, 158
Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 1 Level, 158
Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 2 Level, 158
Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 3 Level, 159
Regenerative Braking Torque Limit 4 Level, 159
Regenerative Power Ridethrough Control Level, 188
Regenerative Power Ridethrough Mode, 134
Remote Keypad Required Hardware, 33
Retain Trip Record at Power Down, 182
Reverse Speed Limit Input, 156
Reverse Speed Limit Input Level, 156
Rotation in Specified Direction ONLY, 157
RR Input Point 1 Frequency, 110
RR Input Point 2 Frequency, 111
RS485 2- and 4-Wire Communications Time-Out
RS485 2- and 4-Wire Parity, 202
RS485 2-Wire ASD-to-ASD Communications, 204
RS485 2-Wire Protocol Selection, 204
RS485 2-Wire Send Wait Time, 204
RS485 ASD-to-ASD Communications, 207
RS485 Protocol Selection (TSB/ModBus), 207
Rush Relay Current Activation Time, 189
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
RX Input Point 1 Frequency, 113
RX Input Point 2 Frequency, 114
RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Frequency, 117
RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Rate, 118
RX2 (AI1) Input Point 1 Setting, 116
RX2 (AI1) Input Point 2 Frequency, 117
RX2 (AI1) Input Point 2 Rate, 119
RX2 (AI1) Input Point 2 Setting, 117
S
Second Speed Loop Proportional Gain, 160
Second Speed Loop Stabilization Coefficient, 161
Short Circuit Detection At Start, 185
Simple Positioning Completion Range, 151
Sink/Source Setting Error, 248, 249
S-Pattern Acceleration Lower-Limit Adjustment, 168
S-Pattern Acceleration Upper-Limit Adjustment, 168
S-Pattern Deceleration Lower-Limit Adjustment, 168
S-Pattern Deceleration Upper-Limit Adjustment, 168
Special Protection Parameters, 53
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
Speed at 0% Drooping Gain, 139
Speed at F320 Drooping Gain, 139
Speed Limit (Torque=0) Band, 157
Speed Limit (Torque=0) Center Value, 156
Speed Limit (Torque=0) Center Value Reference, 156
Speed Loop Proportional Gain, 160
Speed Loop Stabilization Coefficient, 160
Speed PID Switching Frequency, 161
Speed Reach Detection Band, 86
Speed Reference Setpoints, 55, 56
Stall Prevention During Regeneration, 160
Stall Prevention Factor 1, 154
Startup Wizard Parameter Requirements, 71
Stepout Current Detection Level, 190
Stepout Current Detection Time, 190
Supply Voltage Correction, 137
Switching Load Torque During Power Running, 142
Switching Load Torque During Regenerative Braking,
Synchronized Acceleration Time, 139
Synchronized Deceleration Time, 138
System Configuration and Menu Options, 41
System Integration Precautions, 7
T
Tension Torque Bias Input, 154
279
Time Limit For Lower-Limit Frequency Operation, 125
Torque Bias Input Selection, 143
Traverse Acceleration Time, 233
Traverse Deceleration Time, 233
Trip History (read-only), 50, 51
Trip Record at Monitor Screen, 253
U
Under-Voltage Trip Detection Time, 188
UP/DOWN Frequency (down) Frequency Step, 129
UP/DOWN Frequency (down) Response Time, 129
UP/DOWN Frequency (up) Frequency Step, 129
UP/DOWN Frequency (up) Response Time, 128
UP/DOWN Frequency Functions, 54
Up/Down Frequency Operation, 130
280
V
V/f 5-Point Setting Frequency 1, 101
V/f 5-Point Setting Frequency 2, 102
V/f 5-Point Setting Frequency 3, 103
V/f 5-Point Setting Frequency 4, 103
V/f 5-Point Setting Frequency 5, 104
V/f 5-Point Setting Voltage 1, 102
V/f 5-Point Setting Voltage 2, 103
V/f 5-Point Setting Voltage 3, 103
V/f 5-Point Setting Voltage 4, 103
V/f 5-Point Setting Voltage 5, 104
V/I Analog Input Broken Wire Detection Level, 189
V/I Input Point 1 Frequency, 106
V/I Input Point 1 Setting, 105
V/I Input Point 2 Frequency, 106
V/I Input Point 2 Setting, 106
Virtual Input Terminal 1 Selection, 230
Virtual Input Terminal 2 Selection, 230
Virtual Input Terminal 3 Selection, 230
Virtual Input Terminal 4 Selection, 230
Voltage and Frequency Rating of the Motor, 71
W
G9 ASD Installation and Operation Manual
TOSHIBA
TOSHIBA INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION
INDUSTRIAL DIVISION
13131 West Little York Road, Houston, TX 77041
TEL: (713) 466-0277 — FAX: (713) 937-9349
Printed in the U.S.A.
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project